2019 Nissan Titan | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information … · 2021. 1. 13. · 2019 TITAN...

2019 TITANOWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CLICK HERE to view the 2019 Nissan Titan Diesel Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information Supplement

Owner’s Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates “WHEELSAND TIRES” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of the 2019 Nissan TitanOwner’s Manual.

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: January 2019Publication No. SU19EA 0A61U0

SchulzH

Rectangle

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” inthe “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

TIRE PRESSURETire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

WARNINGRadio waves could adversely af-fect electric medical equipment.Those who use a pacemakershould contact the electric medi-cal equipment manufacturer forthe possible influences beforeuse.

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS).It monitors tire pressure of all fourtires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit andthe “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”warning appears in the vehicle infor-mation display, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displayspressure of all tires (except the spare

tire) on the display screen by send-ing a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this systemmay not detect a sudden drop in tirepressure (for example a flat tire whiledriving).For additional information, refer to“Warning lights, indicator lights andaudible reminders” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section, “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section,and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressures (includingthe spare) often and always prior tolong distance trips. The recom-mended tire pressure specificationsare shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label or the Tire andLoading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tireand Loading Information label is af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.Tire pressures should be checkedregularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air overtime.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other ob-jects or if the vehicle strikes acurb while parking.

The tire pressures should bechecked when the tires are cold. Thetires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alertprovides visual and audible signalsoutside the vehicle for inflating tiresto the recommended COLD tirepressure. For additional information,refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill TireAlert” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

WHEELS AND TIRES

SchulzH

Rectangle

Incorrect tire pressure, includingunder inflation, may adversely af-fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause anaccident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weightcapacity is indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.Do not load your vehicle beyondthis capacity. Overloading yourvehicle may result in reducedtire life, unsafe operating condi-tions due to premature tire fail-ure, or unfavorable handlingcharacteristics and could alsolead to a serious accident. Load-ing beyond the specified capac-ity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressuregauge to ensure that the tirepressures are at the specifiedlevel.

∙ For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “Impor-tant Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

SchulzH

Rectangle

Tire and Loading Informationlabel

�1 Seating capacity: The maximumnumber of occupants that canbe seated in the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: For additionalinformation, refer to “Vehicleloading information” in the“Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

�3 Original tire size: The size of thetires originally installed on thevehicle at the factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate thetires to this pressure when thetires are cold. Tires are consid-ered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)at moderate speeds. The rec-ommended cold tire inflation isset by the manufacturer to pro-vide the best balance of tirewear, vehicle handling, driveabil-ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-cle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” inthis section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI2926

SchulzH

Rectangle

Checking tire pressure1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gaugesquarely onto the valve stem. Donot press too hard or force thevalve stem sideways, or air willescape. If the hissing sound of airescaping from the tire is heardwhile checking the pressure, re-position the gauge to eliminatethis leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on thegauge stem and compare to thespecification shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. Iftoo much air is added, press thecore of the valve stem brieflywith the tip of the gauge stem torelease pressure. Recheck thepressure and add or release airas needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front OriginalTire:265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psi


LT245/75R17 450 kPa, 65 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 450 kPa, 65 psi


Rear OriginalTire:265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psiLT245/75R17 500 kPa, 73 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 480 kPa, 70 psi

LDI0393

SchulzH

Rectangle

Spare Tire Sizes: Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psiLT245/75R17 500 kPa, 73 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 480 kPa, 70 psi

TIRE LABELINGFederal law requires tire manufac-turers to place standardized infor-mation on the sidewall of all tires.This information identifies and de-scribes the fundamental character-istics of the tire and also provides theTire Identification Number (TIN) forsafety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

ExampleWDI0394

SchulzH

Rectangle

�1 Tire size (example: LT215/65R1595H)

1. LT: The “LT” indicates the tire isdesigned for light truck vehicles(not all tires have this informa-tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in milli-meters of the tire from sidewalledge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): Thisnumber, known as the aspectratio, gives the tire’s ratio ofheight to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameterin inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):This number is the tire’s load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port. You may not find this infor-mation on all tires because it isnot required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You shouldnot drive the vehicle faster thanthe tire speed rating.

ExampleLDI2043

SchulzH

Rectangle

�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)for a new tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-partment Of Transportation”.The symbol can be placedabove, below or to the left orright of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.For example, the numbers 3103means the 31st week of 2003. Ifthese numbers are missing thenlook on the other sidewall of thetire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure.

�5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle, al-ways use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates whether the tire requiresan inner tube (“tube type”) or not(“tubeless”).

ExampleLDI2786

SchulzH

Rectangle

�7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown if the tirehas radial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or brand name isshown.Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms thatare defined throughout this section,Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or modelname molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding onthe other sidewall of the tire, or (2)the outward facing sidewall of anasymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that must always face out-ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with informationabout tire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factoryequipped tires, and may not matchthe potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximumspeed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could affectthe proper operation of the low tirepressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels. Failure todo so may result in a circumferencedifference between tires on the frontand rear axles which can cause theVehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) systemand 4WD system to malfunction re-sulting in personal injury or death, ex-cessive tire wear and may damagethe transmission and differentialgears.

∙ For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

All season tiresNISSAN specifies All Season tires on somemodels to provide good performance allyear, including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All Season tires are identified by ALLSEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.Snow tires have better snow traction thanAll Season tires and may be more appropri-ate in some areas.

SchulzH

Rectangle

Summer tiresNISSAN specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowyor icy conditions, NISSAN recommends theuse of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on allfour wheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load rat-ing to the original equipment tires. If you donot, it can adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-ings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be thesame size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibittheir use. Check local, state and provinciallaws before installing studded tires. Skidand traction capabilities of studded snowtires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorerthan that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When installingtire chains, make sure they are the propersize for the tires on your vehicle and areinstalled according to the chain manufac-turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of awinter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are de-termined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recommendedby the tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingtire chains. In addition, drive at a reducedspeed. Otherwise, your vehicle may bedamaged and/or vehicle handling andperformance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Drivingwith chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving onclear paved roads.

SchulzH

Rectangle

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRESTire rotationNISSAN recommends rotating thetires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”in the “In case of emergency” sectionof this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Non-XD models:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

XD models:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times.It is recommended that wheel nutsbe tightened to specification ateach tire rotation interval.

WARNING∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


∙ After rotating the tires, do notuse the Easy-Fill Tire Alert to ad-just the tire pressure. Insteaduse a gauge to adjust the tiresto the correct pressure in accor-dance with Tire and Loading In-formation label.

CAUTIONTo ensure proper operation of theEasy-Fill Tire Alert system after atire rotation, re-set and registerthe sensor to their new installedlocations. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

WDI0258

SchulzH

Rectangle

Tire wear and damage1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,bulging or objects caught in thetread. If excessive wear, cracks,bulging or deep cuts are found,the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not beobvious. Replace the tires asnecessary to prevent tire failureand possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the sparetire may result in serious per-sonal injury. If it is necessary torepair the spare tire, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


Replacing wheels and tiresWhen replacing a tire, use the same size,tread design, speed rating and load carry-ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

WARNING∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system, 4WD, ground clearance,body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clear-ance, speedometer calibration, head-light aim and bumper height. Some ofthese effects may lead to accidents andcould result in serious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originally equippedwith four tires that were the same sizeand you are only replacing two of thefour tires, install the new tires on therear axle. Placing new tires on the frontaxle may cause loss of vehicle control insome driving conditions and cause anaccident and personal injury.

WDI0259

SchulzH

Rectangle

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimen-sion. Wheels of a different off-setcould cause premature tire wear, de-grade vehicle handling characteris-tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-terference with the brake discs. Suchinterference can lead to decreasedbraking efficiency and/or early brakepad wear. For additional informationon wheel off-set dimensions, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section ofthis manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS willnot function and the low tire pressurewarning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute. The light will remainon after 1 minute. Have your tires re-placed and/or TPMS system reset assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could affectthe proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged ifit is not handled correctly. Be carefulwhen handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, theID registration may be required. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for ID registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is notspecified by NISSAN. The valve stemcap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps arecorrectly fitted. Otherwise the valvemay be clogged up with dirt andcause a malfunction or loss ofpressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires couldhave structural damage and could failwithout warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is notrecommended.


Four-wheel drive models

CAUTIONAlways use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-beltedor radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and maydamage the transmission, transfer caseand differential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-mended that all four tires be replaced withtires of the same size, brand, constructionand tread pattern. The tire pressure andwheel alignment should also be checkedand corrected as necessary. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.

SchulzH

Rectangle

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

∙ For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Care of wheels∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels whenthe wheel is changed or the undersideof the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dentsor corrosion. Such damage may causeloss of pressure or poor seal at the tirebead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt inareas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire)When replacing a wheel without the TPMSsuch as the spare tire, the TPMS will notfunction.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a fullsize spare that is a different size or brandthan the tires originally installed on the ve-hicle. This full size spare tire is intended fortemporary use only and should be re-placed at the first opportunity.

Observe the following precautions if theFULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tiremust be used. Otherwise, your vehiclecould be damaged or involved in an acci-dent:

WARNINGTo help reduce the risk of a crash whichmay result in personal injury or death:

∙ The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tireshould be used for emergency useonly. It should be replaced with thestandard tire at the first opportunityto avoid possible tire or differentialdamage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving. The vehicle driving perfor-mance may be affected when drivingon wet or snow covered roads.

∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare is installed, the following sys-tems may not work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)System

∙ Periodically check the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure.Always keep the TEMPORARY FULLSIZE inflated to the pressure specifi-cation shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

∙ With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE sparetire installed do not drive the vehicleat speeds faster than 50 mph(80 km/h).

SchulzH

Rectangle

∙ When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire should be used on the frontwheels and the original tire used onthe rear wheels. Use tire chains onlyon the drive wheels.

∙ Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire on other vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the sametime.

∙ TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire limi-tations (except for Pro 4X):

– 50 mph MAX

– Towing allowed

∙ Customer can identify TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire condition bychecking the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label located on the B-pillar.

CAUTION∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may causedamage to the vehicle.

∙ Use of the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire on a vehicle that has tireslarger than were originally equippedcan affect the 4WD system. This mayresult in a circumference differencebetween tires on front and rear axleswhich can cause the 4WD system toautomatically place the vehicle in2WD and flash the 4WD light. When theTEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire is re-placed with a tire that matches allother tires on the vehicle, and all tiresare properly inflated the 4WD systemwill operate normally.

SchulzH

Rectangle

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGWARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passengervehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you tochemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoidbreathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated areaand wear gloves or wash your hands frequently whenservicing your vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-derstand the operation and maintenanceof your vehicle so that you may enjoy manymiles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.Please read through this manual beforeoperating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-let explains details about the warrantiescovering your vehicle. The “Maintenanceand schedules” section of this manualexplains details about maintaining andservicing your vehicle. Additionally, aseparate Customer Care/Lemon LawBooklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-solve any concerns you may have withyour vehicle, and clarify your rights un-der your state’s lemon law.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or haveany questions, they will be glad to assistyou with the extensive resources availableto them.

In addition to factory-installed options,your vehicle may also be equipped withadditional accessories installed prior to de-livery. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which you ve-hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,warnings, cautions and instructions con-cerning proper use of such accessoriesprior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-cessory. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your ve-hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensurefamiliarity with controls and maintenancerequirements assisting you in the safe op-eration of your vehicle.

WARNINGIMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast forconditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention todriving and avoid using vehicle fea-tures or taking other actions thatcould distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-propriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in therear seat (if so equipped).

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information aboutthe proper use of vehicle safety fea-tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the be-ginning of the applicable sections/items.As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate 4-wheeldrive models correctly may result in lossof control or a collision. For additionalinformation, refer to “Driving safety pre-cautions” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-INGThis vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passen-ger car because it has a higher centerof gravity for off-road use. As withother vehicles with features of thistype, failure to operate this vehiclecorrectly may result in loss of controlor an accident.

For additional information, refer to“On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions”, “Avoiding collision androllover” and “Driving safety precau-tions” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety, emissions or du-rability and may even violate govern-mental regulations. In addition, dam-age or performance problemsresulting from modifications may notbe covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNINGInstalling an aftermarket On-Board Di-agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that usesthe port during normal driving, for ex-ample remote insurance companymonitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,telematics or engine reprogramming,may cause interference or damage tovehicle systems. We do not recommendor endorse the use of any aftermarketOBD plug-in devices, unless specificallyapproved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-ranty may not cover damage caused byany aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for allfeatures and equipment available on thismodel. Features and equipment in your ve-hicle may vary depending on model, trimlevel, options selected, order, date of pro-duction, region or availability. Therefore,you may find information about features orequipment that are not included or in-stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect at thetime of printing. NISSAN reserves the right tochange specifications, performance, designor component suppliers without notice andwithout obligation. From time to time,NISSAN may update or revise this manual toprovide Owners with the most accurate in-formation currently available. Please care-fully read and retain with this manual all re-vision updates sent to you by NISSAN toensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle.Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manualsand any updates can also be found in theOwner section of the NISSAN website athttps://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you havequestions concerning any information inyour Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-

fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNINGThis is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause death or seri-ous personal injury. To avoid or reducethe risk, the procedures must be fol-lowed precisely.

CAUTIONThis is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damage toyour vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,the procedures must be followedcarefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in anillustration, it means the arrow points tothe front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese indicate movement or action.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese call attention to an item in the illus-tration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-teries, may contain perchlorate material.The following advisory is provided: “Per-chlorate Material – special handling mayapply. For additional information, referto www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

© 2018 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted in anyform, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-erwise, without the prior written permis-sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and yourNISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and serviceneeds.However, if there is something that yourNISSAN dealer cannot assist you with oryou would like to provide NISSAN directlywith comments or questions, please con-tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will askfor the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephonenumber

– Vehicle identification number (attachedto the top of the instrument panel on thedriver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-tion at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003or via e-mail at:[email protected]

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5or via e-mail at:[email protected]

If you prefer, visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . 0-10Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-13

1. Rear seat belts (Crew and KingCab® models only) (if so equipped)(P. 1-15)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactand rollover supplemental air bag(P. 1-53)

3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-10)4. Front seat belts with pretension-

er(s) and shoulder height adjuster(P. 1-15, 1-53)

5. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-53)6. Occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) (if so equipped)(P. 1-53)

7. Front seats (P. 1-2)8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)9. Rear seats (Crew and King Cab®

models only) (if so equipped) (P. 1-2)10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (Crew andKing Cab® models only)(if so equipped) (P. 1-26)

11. Top tether strap anchor (Crew andKing Cab® models only)(if so equipped) (P. 1-26)

LII2479

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

NOTE:

Crew Cab model shown, Single and KingCab® models similar.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Power windows (P. 2-83)2. Windshield (P. 8-21)3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-46)4. Engine hood (P. 3-27)5. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-11)Front sonar sensors(if so equipped) (P5-63)

6. Front fog lights (if so equipped)(P. 2-54)Daytime Running Lights (DRL)system (if so equipped) (P. 2-49)

7. Headlight and turn signal switches(P. 2-49, 2-53)Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)Daytime Running Lights (DRL)system (if so equipped) (P. 2-49)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-35)Flat tire (P. 6-3)Tire chains (P. 8-35)

9. Mirrors (P. 3-33)Side view camera (if so equipped)(P. 4-11)

10. Door locks (P. 3-5)NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-10)

LIC3769

EXTERIOR FRONT



NOTE:



1. Antenna (P. 4-44)2. Cargo lamp (P. 2-55)3. Rear sliding window (P. 2-83)4. Bed liner storage bins

(if so equipped) (P. 2-71)5. Under rail bed lamps

(if so equipped) (P. 2-55)6. Truck box (P. 3-39)

Tailgate (P. 3-39)Rearview camera (P. 4-3)

7. Towing (P. 10-38)8. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-63)9. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)10. Fuel-filler cap* (P. 3-27)

Fuel-filler door* (P. 3-27)Fuel recommendation* (P. 10-2)

11. Child safety rear door lock(Crew Cab models only) (P. 3-5)

*: For diesel models, refer to the Titan DieselOwner’s Manual.


NOTE:


LII2416

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Interior lights (if so equipped)(P. 2-87)

2. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-87)Console light (if so equipped)(P. 2-87)

3. Sun visors (P. 3-32)4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-33)5. Glove box (P. 2-71)6. Console box (if so equipped)

(P. 2-71)Cup holders (P. 2-71)

7. Spare tire tools location (Crew andKing Cab® models only) (P. 6-3)


NOTE:


LII2480

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Vents (P. 4-29)2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-53)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-46)3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control*Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem*Vehicle information displaycontrols (P. 2-26)

4. Driver supplemental air bag(P. 1-53)Horn (P. 2-54)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)Warning and indicator lights(P. 2-16)

6. Cruise control switches (P. 5-41)7. Shift lever (P. 5-17)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-65)8. Audio controls*9. Center display (P. 4-3)10. Climate controls (P. 4-29)11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-53)12. Glove box (P. 2-71)13. Front passenger air bag status

light (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)14. Power outlet (P. 2-67)

LII2558

INSTRUMENT PANEL


15. Heated steering wheel switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)Warning systems switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)

16. Auxiliary jack*USB port*

17. Hazard warning flasher switch(P. 6-2)

18. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)(if so equipped) (P. 2-66)

19. Climate control seat switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-55)Heated front seat switches(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)

20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-60)Front and rear sonar system OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-64)

21. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-45)

22. Push-button ignition switch(P. 5-11)

23. Tilt and telescopic steering wheelcontrol (P. 3-30)

24. Headlight aiming control(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)Power inverter switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-63)Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-55)Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-62)Hill descent control system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-61)

25. Headlight switch (P. 2-49)Fog light switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-54)Instrument brightness controlswitches (P. 2-49)Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

*Refer to the separate NissanConnect®Owner’s Manual

Refer to the page number indicated inparenthesis for operating details.


Cummins 5.0 L engine1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)2. Fuse box (P. 8-23)3. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-23)4. Engine coolant reservoir*5. Fuel filter (Stage 2)*6. Engine oil filler cap*7. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)8. Air cleaner*9. Battery (P. 8-15)10. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)11. Radiator cap*12. Engine oil dipstick*13. Drive belt location*14. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-23)15. Battery (P. 8-15)*: Refer to the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.


LDI2870

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


VK56VD engine (non-XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)2. Fuse box (P. 8-23)3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)4. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-23)9. Drive belt location (P. 8-19)10. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)11. Battery (P. 8-15)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LDI3292


VK56VD engine (XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)2. Fuse box (P. 8-23)3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)4. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-23)9. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)10. Drive belt location (P. 8-19)11. Battery (P. 8-15)12. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LDI3293


Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

2-17

Automatic Trans-mission checkwarning light

2-17

Automatic Trans-mission oil tem-perature warninglight

2-17

Automatic Trans-mission Parkwarning light( model)

2-18

or

Brake warninglight

2-18

Warninglight

Name Page

Charge warninglight

2-19

Diesel ParticulateFilter (DPF) warn-ing light (if soequipped)

2-19

Door open warn-ing light

2-19

Driver seat beltwarning andchime

2-19

Engine oil pres-sure warning light

2-19

Low DEF warninglight (if soequipped)

2-20

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-20

Warninglight

Name Page

Malfunctionwarning light (red)(if so equipped)

2-22

Master warninglight (if soequipped)

2-22

Passenger seatbelt warning light(if so equipped)

2-22

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-22

Water in Fuelwarning light (if soequipped)

2-23

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS


Indicatorlight

Name Page

Electronic lockingrear differential(E-Lock) systemON indicator light(if so equipped)

2-23

Front fog light in-dicator light (if soequipped)

2-23

Front passengerair bag statuslight (if soequipped)

2-23

High beam indi-cator light (blue)

2-24

Hill descent con-trol system ONindicator light (ifso equipped)

2-24

Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL)(yellow)

2-24

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Security indicatorlight

2-25

Side light andheadlight indica-tor light (green)

2-25

Slip indicator light 2-25

TOW mode ONindicator light

2-25

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

2-25

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFFindicator light

2-25


MEMO


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual bench seat adjustment(Single Cab models and if so equippedfor King Cab® and Crew Cab models) . . . . . . . . . .1-3Front manual captain’s chair seatadjustment (if so equipped forpassenger seat for King Cab® and CrewCab models). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Front power captain’s chair seatadjustment (if so equipped for CrewCab and King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Front armrests (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Rear armrests (Crew Cab models and ifso equipped for King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Head restraints/Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Adjustable head restraint/headrestcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

Removable (without Dual HeadRestraint/Headrest Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) System only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Three-point type seat belt withretractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system (Crew Cab modelsand King Cab® models with rear benchseat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Top tether anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31Rear-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH (Crew Cab models andKing Cab® models with rear benchseat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Rear-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts (Crew Cab modelsand King Cab® models with rear benchseat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Rear-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts (Single Cab modelsand King Cab® Rear Seat Deletemodels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using LATCH (Crew Cabmodels and King Cab® models withrear bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using the seat belts — rearbench seat (Crew Cab models and KingCab® models with rear bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using the seat belts —passenger seat and center seat(Single Cab models and King Cab® RearSeat Delete models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-53Precautions on SRS (with NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System) (if soequipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53Precautions on SRS (without NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System) (if soequipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systems . . . . . . 1-78Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-80Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-81

WARNING∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback and upright in the seat with bothfeet on the floor and adjust the seatproperly. For additional information,refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in theseat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls ormake the vehicle move. Unattendedchildren could become involved in se-rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, do notleave children, people who require theassistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation. The seat maymove suddenly and could cause lossof control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort.Seat belts are most effective when thepassenger sits well back and straightup in the seat. If the seatback is re-clined, the risk of sliding under the lapbelt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTIONWhen adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT (Single Cab modelsand if so equipped for King Cab®and Crew Cab models)Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-ally. For additional information about ad-justing the seats, refer to the steps outlinedin this section.

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slidethe seat forward or backward to the de-sired position. Release the lever to lock theseat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever upand lean back. To bring the seatback for-ward, pull the lever up and lean your bodyforward. Release the lever to lock the seat-back in position.The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-age” in this section. Also, the seatback canbe reclined to allow occupants to restwhen the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2559 LRS2560

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Front center bench seatadjustmentThe front center bench seat folds down bypulling on the strap. It does not have ad-justments in between the upright and thefolded down positions. It is either in seatingposition or armrest position.

FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN’S CHAIRSEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equippedfor passenger seat for King Cab®and Crew Cab models)Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-ally. For additional information about ad-justing the seats, refer to the steps outlinedin this section.

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slidethe seat forward or backward to the de-sired position. Release the lever to lock theseat in position.

LRS2787 LRS2559


RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever upand lean back. To bring the seatback for-ward, pull the lever up and lean your bodyforward. Release the lever to lock the seat-back in position.The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-age” in this section. Also, the seatback canbe reclined to allow occupants to restwhen the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is in the P (Park) position.

FRONT POWER CAPTAIN’S CHAIRSEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equippedfor Crew Cab and King Cab®models)Operating tips

∙ The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If themotor stops during operation, wait30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switchfor a long period of time when the en-gine is off. This will discharge the bat-tery.

For additional information, refer to “Auto-matic drive positioner” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section of thismanual.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch as shown will slide theseat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

LRS2560 LRS2743


RecliningMove the recline switch as shown until thedesired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-age” in this section. Also, the seatback canbe reclined to allow occupants to restwhen the vehicle is stopped and the shiftlever is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)Move the switch as shown to adjust theangle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides ad-justable lower back support to the driver.Push the switch as shown to adjust theseatback lumbar area.

LRS2744 LRS2745


FRONT ARMRESTS (if so equipped)To use the center armrest on the frontbench seat, pull on the strap in betweenthe front passenger and center seats andfold it down to the resting position.

REAR ARMRESTS (Crew Cabmodels and if so equipped forKing Cab® models)To use the center armrest on the benchseats, pull on the tab in the center of theseat and fold it down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats (if soequipped) when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas without properrestraints are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-eryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

∙ Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

∙ Do not fold down the rear seats whenthe occupants are in the rear seat areaor any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path isclear before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands orfeet to get caught or pinched in theseat.

LRS0425 LRS2748


∙ Head restraints/headrests should beadjusted properly as they may pro-vide significant protection against in-jury in an accident. Always replaceand adjust them properly if they havebeen removed for any reason.

∙ If the head restraints/headrests areremoved for any reason, they shouldbe securely stored to prevent themfrom causing injury to passengers ordamage to the vehicle in case of sud-den braking or an accident.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched po-sition. If they are not completely se-cured, passengers may be injured inan accident or sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

Folding the rear bench seat up(Crew Cab models and King Cab®models with rear bench seat)To fold the rear bench seat up for storagecapacity behind the front seats or to re-move the jacking tools from the storagearea:

1. Lift the front of the seat cushion up.

2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushiontoward the back of the vehicle until itlocks in place.

LRS2766 LRS2767


3. Repeat this process to raise and securethe seat cushion on the other side ofthe vehicle for maximum storage ca-pacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seatingposition, pull the latch on the bottom of theseat cushions to release the seat from thelocked position. Make sure to properlypush the seat cushion down into place.

WARNING∙ When the vehicle is being used to

carry cargo, properly secure all cargoto help prevent it from sliding or shift-ing. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-eryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly. Never ridein the rear seat unless the seat bot-tom cushions are in place.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched po-sition. If they are not completely se-cured, passengers may be injured inan accident or sudden stop.

Folding the rear bench seat down(Crew Cab models and King Cab®models with rear bench seat)The rear bench seat can be tilted forwardto access the child restraint anchor pointlocations.

To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strapup �1 and tilt the seatback. The child re-straint anchor points �2 can be accessedbehind the rear bench seatback.

LRS2768 WRS0920


WARNINGNever allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper re-straints could result in serious injury ordeath in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNINGHead restraints/headrests supplementthe other vehicle safety systems. Theymay provide additional protectionagainst injury in certain rear end colli-sions. Adjustable headrestraints/headrests must be adjustedproperly, as specified in this section.Check the adjustment after someoneelse uses the seat. Do not attach any-thing to the head restraint/headreststalks or remove the headrestraint/headrest. Do not use the seatif the head restraint/headrest has beenremoved. If the head restraint/headrestwas removed, reinstall and properly ad-just the head restraint/headrest beforean occupant uses the seating position.Failure to follow these instructions canreduce the effectiveness of the headrestraints/headrests. This may in-crease the risk of serious injury or deathin a collision.

Front bucket seatLRS2020

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS


The illustration shows the seating posi-tions equipped with headrestraints/headrests.

� Indicates the seating position isequipped with a head restraint.

� Indicates the seating position is equippedwith a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is notequipped with a head restraint or headrest(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a headrestraint/headrest that may be inte-grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrestshave multiple notches along the stalk(s)to lock them in a desired adjustmentposition.

∙ The non-adjustable headrestraints/headrests have a single lock-ing notch to secure them to the seatframe.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align thehead restraint/headrest so the cen-ter of your ear is approximately levelwith the center of the headrestraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher thanthe recommended alignment, placethe head restraint/headrest at thehighest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has beenremoved, ensure that it is reinstalledand locked in place before riding in thatdesignated seating position.

Front bench seatLRS2633

Front bench seat onlyLRS2818


ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTRAINT/HEADRESTCOMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVEUse the following procedure to remove thehead restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up tothe highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrestfrom the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrestproperly in a secure place so it is notloose in the vehicle.

LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302


5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupantuses the seating position.

REMOVABLE (without Dual HeadRestraint/Headrest Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) System only)

CAUTIONDo not remove head restraint/headrestfrom vehicles equipped with Dual HeadRestraint/Headrest Rear Seat Infotain-ment (RSI) System. Removal may dam-age the system wiring.

INSTALL1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Makesure that the head restraint/headrest isfacing the correct direction. The stalkwith the notch (notches) �1 must beinstalled in the hole with the lock knob�2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupantuses the seating position.

LRS2302 LRS2303


ADJUSTFor adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so thecenter is level with the center of your ears. Ifyour ear position is still higher than therecommended alignment, place the headrestraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob is engaged inthe notch before riding in that designatedseating position.

RaiseTo raise the head restraint/headrest, pull itup.


WRS0134 LRS2351 LRS2305


LowerTo lower, push and hold the lock knob andpush the head restraint/headrest down.


PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat with both feet on thefloor, your chances of being injured or killedin a collision and/or the severity of injurymay be greatly reduced. NISSAN stronglyencourages you and all of your passengersto buckle up every time you drive, even ifyour seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts beworn at all times when a vehicle is beingdriven.

LRS2306 SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be in therear seats (if so equipped) and in anappropriate restraint.

WARNING∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do somay reduce the effectiveness of theentire restraint system and increasethe chance or severity of injury in anaccident. Serious injury or death canoccur if the seat belt is not wornproperly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOTTHE WAIST. A lap belt worn too highcould increase the risk of internal inju-ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed and allseat belts fastened, it may indicate amalfunction in the system. Have thesystem checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ No changes should be made to theseat belt system. For example, do notmodify the seat belt, add material, orinstall devices that may change theseat belt routing or tension. Doing somay affect the operation of the seatbelt system. Modifying or tamperingwith the seat belt system may resultin serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) haveactivated, they cannot be reused andmust be replaced together with theretractor. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any colli-sion. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.NISSAN recommends that all seat beltassemblies in use during a collision bereplaced unless the collision was mi-nor and the belts show no damageand continue to operate properly.Seat belt assemblies not in use duringa collision should also be inspectedand replaced if either damage or im-proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attachinghardware should be inspected afterany collision. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer’s inspection in-structions and replacement recom-mendations. The child restraintsshould be replaced if they aredamaged.

SSS0014


SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHTBoth the driver’s and passenger’s frontseats are equipped with a seat belt warn-ing light. The warning light, located on theinstrument panel, will show the status ofthe driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warninglight will illuminate for a period of time. Ifthe seat is occupied and seat belt islatched within that period of time, thelight will go out.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat belt shouldbe worn snug and always position the lapbelt as low as possible around the hips, notthe waist. Place the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Never runthe lap/shoulder belt over your abdominalarea. Contact your doctor for specific rec-ommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured personsuse seat belts. Check with your doctor forspecific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be in therear seats (if so equipped) and in anappropriate restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, the seatshould be upright. Always sit wellback and upright in the seat with bothfeet on the floor and adjust the seatbelt properly.

LRS0786


∙ Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If theseat belt becomes wrapped around achild’s neck with the ALR mode acti-vated, the child can be seriously in-jured or killed if the seat belt retractsand becomes tight. This can occureven if the vehicle is parked. Unbucklethe seat belt to release the child. If theseat belt cannot be unbuckled or isalready unbuckled, release the childby cutting the seat belt with a suitabletool (such as a knife or scissors) torelease the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

Manual front seat shown (Single Cabmodels and if so equipped for King Cab®

and Crew Cab models)

LRS2559


2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-tractor and insert the tongue into thebuckle �A until you hear and feel thelatch engage.

∙ The retractor is designed to lockduring a sudden stop or on impact.A slow pulling motion permits theseat belt to move and allows yousome freedom of movement in theseat.

∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulledfrom its fully retracted position,firmly pull the belt and release it.Then smoothly pull the belt out ofthe retractor.

Front power captain’s chair seat shown (if so equipped for King Cab® and Crew Cabmodels)

LRS2743 LRS2674


3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips �B as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion towardthe retractor to take up extra slack �C .Be sure the shoulder belt is routed overyour shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat, front center seat(if so equipped), and the rear seating posi-tions’ (if so equipped) three-point seat beltshave two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-tend and retract to allow the driver andpassengers some freedom of movementin the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly orduring certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locksthe seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seatbelt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from thebuckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-turns to the ELR mode after the seat beltfully retracts. For additional information, re-fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During nor-mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALRmode should not be activated. If it is ac-tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seatbelt tension. It can also change the op-eration of the front passenger air bag.For additional information, refer to“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)”in this section.

WARNINGWhen fastening the seat belts, be cer-tain that the seatbacks are completelysecured in the latched position. If theyare not completely secured, passengersmay be injured in an accident or suddenstop.

LRS2675


Unfastening the seat beltsTo unfasten the seat belt, press the buttonon the buckle �1 . The seat belt automati-cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lockseat belt movement by two separatemethods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seatbelts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-ward quickly. The retractor should lockand restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck, get the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service, or to learn more about seatbelt operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment(front seats)The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you. Foradditional information, refer to “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” in this section. Toadjust, pull out the adjustment button �1and move the shoulder belt anchor to thedesired position �2 , so the belt passes overthe center of the shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Release the ad-justment button to lock the shoulder beltanchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242


WARNING∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move theshoulder belt anchor up and down tomake sure it is securely fixed inposition.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so may re-duce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in anaccident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, itis not possible to properly fit thelap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extenderthat is compatible with the installed seatbelts is available for purchase. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)of length and may be used for either thedriver or front passenger seating position.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for assistance with purchasing anextender if an extender is required.

WARNING∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company whichmade the original equipment seatbelts, should be used with NISSANseat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary usecould result in serious personal injuryin the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-stall child restraints. If the child re-straint is not secured properly, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-ommended for cleaning upholstery orcarpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allowthe seat belts to dry in the shade. Do notallow the seat belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, theseat belts may retract slowly. Wipe theshoulder belt guide with a clean, drycloth.

∙ Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, suchas buckles, tongues, retractors, flexiblewires and anchors, work properly. Ifloose parts, deterioration, cuts or otherdamage on the webbing is found, theentire seat belt assembly should be re-placed.


WARNINGDo not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seatbelt becomes wrapped around a child’sneck with the ALR mode activated, thechild can be seriously injured or killed ifthe seat belt retracts and becomestight. This can occur even if the vehicleis parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-lease the child. If the seat belt cannot beunbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-lease the child by cutting the seat beltwith a suitable tool (such as a knife orscissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properly re-strained.

In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, includ-ing doctors, teachers, government trafficsafety offices, and community organiza-tions. Every child is different, so be sure tolearn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’ssize. Generally, infants up to about 1 yearand less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placedin rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for chil-dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-straints and are at least 1 year old. Boosterseats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNINGInfants and children need special pro-tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may notfit them properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-tal injury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require the use of approved childrestraints for infants and small children. Foradditional information, refer to “Child re-straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-chors and Tethers for CHildren) system orwith the vehicle seat belt. For additionalinformation, refer to “Child restraints” in thissection.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rearseat (if so equipped). Studies show thatchildren are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seat than in the frontseat.

This is especially important becauseyour vehicle has a supplemental re-straint system (air bag system) for thefront passenger. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)” in this section.

CHILD SAFETY


INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should beplaced in a rear-facing child restraint.NISSAN recommends that infants beplaced in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose a child restraint that fitsyour vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation anduse.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over 1 year old and weighat least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in arear-facing child restraint as long as pos-sible up to the height or weight limit of thechild restraint. Children who outgrow theheight or weight limit of the rear-facingchild restraint and are at least 1 year oldshould be secured in a forward-facing childrestraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-facturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommen-dations. NISSAN recommends that smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose achild restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDRENChildren should remain in a forward-facingchild restraint with a harness until theyreach the maximum height or weight limitallowed by the child restraint manufac-turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weightlimit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommendsthat the child be placed in a commerciallyavailable booster seat to obtain properseat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, thebooster seat should raise the child so thatthe shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the chest and the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder. The shoulder beltshould not cross the neck or face andshould not fall off the shoulder. The lap beltshould lie snugly across the lower hips orupper thighs, not the abdomen. A boosterseat can only be used in seating positionsthat have a three-point type seat belt. Thebooster seat should fit the vehicle seat andhave a label certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until thechild can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against thevehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily overthe front edge of the seat with feet flaton the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt(lap belt low and snug across the hipsand shoulder belt across mid-chestand shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in positionfor the entire ride?


If you answered no to any of these ques-tions, the child should remain in a boosterseat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may followdifferent guidelines. Check local andstate regulations to confirm your child isusing the correct restraint system beforetraveling.

WARNINGNever let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in thecargo area. The child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a sudden stop orcollision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS


– The child restraint must be usedand installed properly. Always fol-low all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

– Infants and children should neverbe held on anyone’s lap. Even thestrongest adult cannot resist theforces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around botha child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat (if so equipped). Studies showthat children are safer when prop-erly restrained in the rear seat (if soequipped) than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a forward-facingchild restraint in the front seat, re-fer to “Forward-facing child re-straint installation using the seatbelts — passenger seat and centerseat (Single Cab models and KingCab® Rear Seat Delete models)” inthis section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System (if so equipped), neverinstall a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. An inflating airbag could seriously injure or kill achild. A rear-facing child restraintmust only be used in the rear seat(if so equipped).

– Be sure to purchase a child re-straint that will fit the child and ve-hicle. Some child restraints maynot fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used to at-tach adult seat belts, or other itemsor equipment to the vehicle. Doingso could damage the child re-straint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly in-stalled using the damagedanchorage, and a child could be se-riously injured or killed in acollision.

– Never use the anchor points foradult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in thefront passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the childrestraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate childrestraint while in the vehicle.

WRS0256


∙ When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-lision, loose objects can injure occu-pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTIONA child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seatingsurface and buckles before placing achild in the child restraint.

Vehicles equipped with rear seats areequipped with a universal child restraintanchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)system. Some child restraints include rigidor webbing-mounted attachments thatcan be connected to these anchors. Foradditional information, refer to “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)system (Crew Cab models and King Cab®models with rear bench seat)” in this sec-tion.

If you do not have a LATCH compatiblechild restraint, the vehicle seat belts can beused.

Several manufacturers offer child re-straints for infants and children of varioussizes. When selecting any child restraint,keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the vehi-cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in the childrestraint and check the various adjust-ments to be sure the child restraint iscompatible with your child. Choose achild restraint that is designed for yourchild’s height and weight. Always followall recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is less than 65 lbs.(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCHanchors or the seat belt to install thechild restraint (not both at the sametime).

∙ If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is greater than 65 lbs.(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (notthe lower anchors) to install the childrestraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions for installa-tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-quires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to thedesignated anchor point on the vehicle.


LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) SYSTEM(Crew Cab models and King Cab®models with rear bench seat)Your vehicle is equipped with special an-chor points that are used with LATCH sys-tem compatible child restraints. This sys-tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIXor ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seatbelt to secure the child restraint unless thecombined weight of the child and child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraintis greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) toinstall the child restraint. Be sure to followthe child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided toinstall child restraints in the rear outboardseating positions only. Do not attempt toinstall a child restraint in the center positionusing the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNINGFailure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the loca-tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint inthe center rear seating position us-ing the LATCH lower anchors. Thechild restraint will not be securedproperly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-serting your fingers into the loweranchor area. Feel to make surethere are no obstructions over theanchors such as seat belt webbingor seat cushion material. The childrestraint will not be secured prop-erly if the lower anchors areobstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damage thechild restraint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly installed us-ing the damaged anchorage, and achild could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

LATCH system lower anchor locationsLRS2859


LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located asshown. A label is attached to the seatbackto help you locate the LATCH lower an-chors.

Installing child restraint LATCHlower anchor attachmentsLATCH compatible child restraints includetwo rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to two an-chors located at certain seating positionsin your vehicle. With this system, you do nothave to use a vehicle seat belt to secure thechild restraint. Check your child restraint fora label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in theinstructions provided by the child restraintmanufacturer.

LATCH lower anchor locationLRS3036

LATCH lower anchor point locationsLRS3148

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661


When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint.

TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINTLOCATIONSAnchor points are located in the followinglocations:

∙ Under the rear window behind thebench seat (Single Cab models) or be-hind the rear bench seat (Crew Cabmodels and King Cab® models with rearbench seat) as shown.

∙ On the back of the passenger and cen-ter seats (King Cab® Rear Seat Deletemodels) as shown.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662

Crew Cab models and King Cab® modelswith rear bench seat

LRS0393Single Cab models

LRS2819


REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCH (CrewCab models and King Cab®models with rear bench seat)For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint in the rear bench seats usingthe LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors. Check to make sure the LATCHattachment is properly attached to thelower anchors.

King Cab® Rear Seat Delete modelsLRS2879

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2LRS2997


3. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your hand to com-press the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint or try installing by using

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2LRS2996

Rear-facing – step 3LRS0673



the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Notall child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 2 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS (Crew Cab models and KingCab® models with rear benchseat)

WARNINGThe three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will result inthe child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.


Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in thefront seat. Position the child restrainton the seat. Always follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256


2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the ALR mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to the ELRmode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slackin the belt.





5. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the childrestraint to compress the vehicle seatcushion and seatback while pulling upon the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.Try to tug it forward and check to see ifthe belt holds the restraint in place. Ifthe restraint is not secure, tighten theseat belt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse. If the seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS (Single Cab models andKing Cab® Rear Seat Deletemodels)

WARNING∙ Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental air bag could seriouslyinjure or kill your child.

∙ Never let an infant who requires theuse of a rear-facing child restraint ridein this vehicle.




FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCH (Crew Cab models andKing Cab® models with rearbench seat)For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and“Child restraints” sections of this manualbefore installing a child restraint.


Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint in the rear benchseats using the LATCH system:


2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors. Check to make sure the LATCHattachment is properly attached to thelower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point. For additionalinformation, refer to “Installing toptether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have atop tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the cor-rect child restraint fit. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to reinstallthe head restraint/headrest whenthe child restraint is removed. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –step 2

LRS2995Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2994


If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint/headrestand it is interfering with the properchild restraint fit, try another seatingposition or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your knee to com-press the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer’s instructions to re-move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 4LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6WRS0697


7. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 3 through 6.

�A Anchor points

Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withthe LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with theLATCH lower anchors (rear bench out-boarding seating positions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrestand store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section forhead restraint/headrest adjustment,removal and installation information.

2. Position the top tether strap over theseatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tetheranchor point as shown.


If you have any questions when install-ing a top tether strap, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

Rear bench seatLRS2769


WARNINGChild restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damage thechild restraint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly installed us-ing the damaged anchorage, and achild could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — REAR BENCHSEAT (Crew Cab models and KingCab® models with rear benchseat)

WARNINGThe three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will result inthe child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision.


Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seatbelt in the rear seats:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position.Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in thefront seat.


The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back.





If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point (rear seat in-stallation only). For additional informa-tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-quire the use of a top tether strap inseating positions that do not have atop tether anchor.



4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the ALR mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to ELR modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.


6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the childrestraint with your knee to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatbackwhile pulling up on the seat belt.






8. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.Try to tug it forward and check to see ifthe seat belt holds the restraint inplace. If the restraint is not secure,tighten the seat belt as necessary, orput the restraint in another seat andtest it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 3 through 8.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

�A Anchor points

Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withseat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.

Forward-facing – step 8WRS0698 LRS2769


Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrestand store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.



CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap as shown.





FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — PASSENGERSEAT AND CENTER SEAT (SingleCab models and King Cab® RearSeat Delete models)

WARNINGThe three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will result inthe child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Front passenger air bagand status light” in this section.




Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seatbelt:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position.Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in thefront seat.


The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back.




If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point. For additionalinformation, refer to “Installing toptether strap” in this section.



Do not install child restraints that re-quire the use of a top tether strap inseating positions that do not have atop tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seat beltretractor is in the ALR mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to ELR modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.





6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the childrestraint with your knee to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatbackwhile pulling up on the seat belt.


8. After attaching the child restraint, testit before you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.Try to tug it forward and check to see ifthe seat belt holds the restraint inplace. If the restraint is not secure,tighten the seat belt as necessary, orput the restraint in another seat andtest it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 3 through 8.




10. If the child restraint is installed in thefront passenger seat, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position. The frontpassenger air bag status light (ifso equipped) may or may not illumi-nate, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint beingused. For additional information, referto “Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withseat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.

�A Anchor points

Forward-facing — step 10WRS0475

Single Cab modelsLRS2769


�A Top tether straps

�B Anchor points

Bench seat

PASSENGER SEATING POSITION

1. Remove the head restraint/headrestand store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.




CENTER SEATING POSITION






BOOSTER SEATSFor additional information on installing abooster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNINGIf a booster seat and seat belt are notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured or killed in a sudden stop or col-lision greatly increases:

King Cab® Rear Seat Delete modelsLRS2880


– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’sface and neck and the lap portionof the belt does not cross thestomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under thechild’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-stalled in a seating position thathas a lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seatB. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the following pointsin mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the vehi-cle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS2479 LRS0453


∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-erly supported by the booster seat orvehicle seat. The seatback must be ator above the center of the child’s ears.For example, if a low back booster seatis chosen, the vehicle seatback must beat or above the center of the child’s ears.If the seatback is lower than the centerof the child’s ears, a high back boosterseat should be used.

∙ If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place the child in thebooster seat and check the various ad-justments to be sure the booster seat iscompatible with the child. Always followall recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply tobooster seat installation in the rear seats (ifso equipped) or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNINGTo avoid injury to child, do not use thelap/shoulder belt in the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-tions of this manual before installing a childrestraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seatin the rear seat (if so equipped) or in thefront passenger seat:

LRS0464


1. If you must install a booster seat inthe front seat, move the seat to therearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front-facing direction.Always follow the booster seat manu-facturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the cor-rect booster seat fit. If the headrestraint/headrest is removed, store itin a secure place. Be sure to reinstallthe head restraint/headrest whenthe booster seat is removed. For ad-ditional information, refer to "Headrestraints/headrests" in this section.

If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint/headrestand it is interfering with the properbooster seat fit, try another seatingposition or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat beltlow and snug on the child’s hips. Besure to follow the booster seat manu-facturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjust-ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in “Three-point type seatbelt with retractor” in this section.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454


7. If the booster seat is installed in thefront passenger seat, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position. The front pas-senger air bag status light (if soequipped) may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child andthe type of booster seat being used. Foradditional information, refer to “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” inthis section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (withNISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)(if so equipped)This SRS section contains important infor-mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System canhelp cushion the impact force to the headand chest of the driver and right front pas-senger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest area of the driver and rightfront passenger in certain side impact colli-sions. The side air bag is designed to inflateon the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions (if soequipped) in certain side impact or rollovercollisions. In a side impact, the curtain airbags are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover,curtain air bags are designed to inflate andremain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement thecrash protection provided by the seat beltsand is not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and theoccupant seated a suitable distance awayfrom the steering wheel, instrument paneland door finishers. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates. The supplementalair bag warning light will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system is opera-tional.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS)


WARNING∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,rear impact, rollover, or lower severityfrontal collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

∙ The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Front passenger airbag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bagsare most effective when you are sit-ting well back and upright in the seat.The front air bags inflate with greatforce. Even with the NISSAN AdvancedAir Bag System, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death ina crash. You may also receive seriousor fatal injuries from the front air bagif you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatbackand as far away as practical from thesteering wheel or instrument panel.Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sen-sors that detect if the seat belts arefastened. The NISSAN Advanced AirBag System monitors the severity of acollision and inflates the air bags asneeded. Failure to properly wear seatbelts can increase the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sen-sor (weight sensor) that turns thefront passenger air bag OFF undersome conditions. This sensor is onlyused in this seat. Failure to be properlyseated and wearing the seat belt canincrease the risk or severity of injury inan accident. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Front passenger air bagand status light” in this section.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them insidethe steering wheel rim could increasethe risk that they are injured when thefront air bag inflates.

WRS0031


∙ The air bag system monitors the se-verity of a collision and then inflatesthe air bags as needed. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

ARS1133


WARNING∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold themin your lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

WARNING∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teensand children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat (if soequipped), if possible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043


WARNING∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat.An inflating air bag could seriously in-jure or kill a child. A rear-facing childrestraint must only be used in the rearseat (if so equipped).

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256


WARNINGFront seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the eventof a frontal impact, rear impact, orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reducethe risk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

Do not lean against doors or windows.WRS0431

Do not lean against doors or windows.LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.SSS0162


WARNING∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effectivewhen you are sitting well back andupright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain air bag inflate with greatforce. Do not allow anyone to placetheir hand, leg or face near the side airbag on the side of the seatback of thefront seat or near the side roof rails.Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats (ifso equipped) to extend their hand outof the window or lean against thedoor. Some examples of dangerousriding positions are shown in the pre-vious illustrations.

WARNING∙ When sitting in the rear seat (if so

equipped), do not hold onto the seat-back of the front seat. If the side airbag inflates, you may be seriously in-jured. Be especially careful with chil-dren, who should always be properlyrestrained. Some examples of dan-gerous riding positions are shown inthe illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withside air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159


NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactand rollover supplemental air bag infla-tors

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactand rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Occupant classification sensor (weightsensor)

7. Occupant classification system controlunit

8. Seat belt buckle switches

9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules

11. Satellite sensor

LRS3116


WARNINGTo ensure proper operation of the pas-senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, please observe the followingitems.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rearbench seats (if so equipped) to pushor pull on the seatback pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than1 kg (2.2 lbs.) on the seatback, headrestraint or in the seatback pocket.

∙ Do not store luggage behind the seatthat can press into the seatback.

∙ Do not position the front passengerseat so it contacts the rear benchseats (if so equipped). If the front seatdoes contact the rear bench seats (ifso equipped), the air bag system maydetermine a sensor malfunction hasoccurred and the front passenger airbag status light may illuminate andthe supplemental air bag warninglight may flash.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint isinstalled in the front passenger seat,do not position the front passengerseat so the child restraint contacts theinstrument panel. If the child restraintdoes contact the instrument panel,the system may determine the seat asoccupied and the passenger air bagmay deploy in a collision. Also thefront passenger air bag status lightmay not illuminate. For additional in-formation, refer to “Child restraints” inthis section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition withthe front passenger air bag statuslight.

∙ If you notice that the front passengerair bag status light is not operating asdescribed in this section, get the oc-cupant classification system checked.It is recommended that you take yourvehicle to a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ Until you have confirmed with adealer that your passenger seat occu-pant classification system is workingproperly, position the occupants inthe rear seating positions (if soequipped). Do not use the front seat ortransport a child in the vehicle (SingleCab and King Cab® Rear Seat Deletemodels only).

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System for the driver andfront passenger seats. All of the informa-tion, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact airbag is located in the center of the steeringwheel. The front passenger supplementalfront-impact air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The frontair bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although theymay inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity frontal impact. They may not in-flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicledamage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-cation of proper front air bag system op-eration.


The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Systemmonitors information from the crash zonesensor and the Air bag Control Unit (ACU).Inflator operation is based on the severityof a collision and seat belt usage for thedriver. For the front passenger, the occu-pant classification sensor is also moni-tored. Based upon the information fromthe sensor, only one front air bag may in-flate in a crash, depending on the crashseverity. Additionally, the front passengerair bag may be automatically turned offunder some conditions, depending on theweight detected on the front passengerseat and how the seat belt is used. If thefront passenger air bag is OFF, the frontpassenger air bag status light will be illumi-nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the lightwill not be illuminated, but the air bag willbe off). For additional information, refer to“Front passenger air bag and status light” inthis section. One front air bag inflating doesnot indicate improper performance of thesystem.

If you have any questions about your airbag system, it is recommended that youcontact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If youare considering modification of your ve-hicle due to a disability, you may also con-tact NISSAN. Contact information is con-tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by the re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-tion and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants.They can help save lives and reduce seri-ous injuries. However, an inflating front airbag may cause facial abrasions or otherinjuries. Front air bags do not provide re-straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seatbelts should be correctly worn and thedriver and front passenger seated uprightas far as practical away from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. The front airbags inflate quickly in order to help protectthe front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can in-crease the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, the front air bagmodule during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after acollision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.


Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNINGThe front passenger air bag is designedto automatically turn OFF under someconditions. Read this section carefullyto learn how it operates. Proper use ofthe seat, seat belt and child restraints isnecessary for most effective protec-tion. Failure to follow all instructions inthis manual concerning the use ofseats, seat belts and child restraints canincrease the risk or severity of injury inan accident.

Status lightThe front passenger seat is equipped withan occupant classification sensor (weightsensor) that turns the front passenger airbag on or off depending on the weight ap-plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-tus of the front passenger air bag (ON orOFF) is indicated by the front passenger airbag status light which is located onthe instrument panel.After the ignition switch is placed in the"ON" position, the front passenger air bagstatus light on the instrument panel illumi-nates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff or remains illuminated depending onthe front passenger seat occupied status.The light operates as follows:

∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:The light is OFF and the front pas-senger air bag is OFF and will not inflatein a crash.

∙ Front passenger seat occupied by asmall adult, child or child restraint asoutlined in this section: The lightmay or may not illuminate, dependingon the size of the occupant or the typeof child restraint being used. Whenthe light is illuminated, the frontpassenger air bag is OFF and will notinflate in a crash. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Front passenger airbag” in this section.

∙ Occupied front passenger seat and thepassenger meets the conditions asoutlined in this section: The light isOFF to indicate that the front passen-ger air bag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objectsplaced on the front passenger seat mayalso cause the light to operate as de-scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information, refer to “Normaloperation” and “Troubleshooting” in thissection.

WRS0475


Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF when the vehicle isoperated under some conditions as de-scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bagand other air bags in your vehicle are notpart of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to helpreduce the risk of injury or death from aninflating air bag to certain front passengerseat occupants, such as children, by requir-ing the air bag to be automatically turnedOFF under some conditions. Certain sen-sors are used to meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in thisvehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed todetect an occupant and objects on theseat by weight. For example, if a child up tothe approximate size and weight of a oneyear old is properly restrained in the frontpassenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System is designed to turn the frontpassenger air bag OFF. For a properly re-strained child who is larger than the ap-proximate size and weight of a one yearold, the front passenger air bag may ormay not be automatically turned OFF, de-

pending on the size of the child and thetype of child restraint being used. After in-stalling the child restraint and positioningthe child, place the ignition switch in the ONposition: if the front passenger air bag sta-tus light is illuminated, the air bag is OFF. Ifthe front passenger air bag status light isnot illuminated, the air bag will inflate in acrash.

Front passenger seat adult occupants whoare properly seated and using the seat beltas outlined in this manual should notcause the front passenger air bag to beautomatically turned OFF. For small adultsit may be turned OFF, however if the occu-pant takes his/her weight off the seatcushion (for example, by not sitting upright,by sitting on an edge of the seat, or byotherwise being out of position), this couldcause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.Always be sure to be seated and wearingthe seat belt properly for the most effectiveprotection by the seat belt and supple-mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens andchildren be properly restrained in a rear seat(if so equipped). NISSAN also recommendsthat appropriate child restraints and boosterseats be properly installed in a rear seat (if soequipped). If this is not possible, the occu-

pant classification sensor is designed to op-erate as described above to turn the frontpassenger air bag OFF for specified child re-straints as required by the regulations. Fail-ing to properly secure child restraints and touse the ALR mode may allow the restraint totip or move in a collision or sudden stop. Thiscan also result in the passenger air bag in-flating in a crash instead of being OFF. Foradditional information, refer to “Child re-straints” in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,the front passenger air bag is designed notto inflate in a crash. However, heavy objectsplaced on the seat could result in air baginflation, because of the object’s weight de-tected by the occupant classification sen-sor. Other conditions could also result in airbag inflation, such as if a child is standingon the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in thismanual. Always be sure that you and allvehicle occupants are seated and re-strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag statuslight, you can monitor when the front pas-senger air bag is automatically turned OFFwith the seat occupied. The light will notilluminate when the front passenger seat isunoccupied.


If an adult occupant is in the seat but thefront passenger air bag status light is illu-minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),it could be that the person is a small adult,or is not sitting on the seat properly or notusing the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the frontseat, the front passenger air bag statuslight may or may not be illuminated, de-pending on the size of the child and thetype of child restraint being used. Alwaysmake sure that the child restraint is in-stalled properly, the seat belt is used prop-erly and the occupant is positioned prop-erly.

If necessary, a NISSAN dealer can checksystem operation by using a special tool.Until you have confirmed with a dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, repositionthe occupant or child restraint in a rearseat (if so equipped). Do not use the frontseat or transport a child in the vehicle(Single Cab and King Cab® Rear Seat Deletemodels only).

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System andfront passenger air bag status light willtake a few seconds to register a change inthe front passenger seat status. For ex-ample, if a large adult who is sitting in the

front passenger seat exits the vehicle, thefront passenger air bag status light will gofrom OFF to ON for a few seconds and thento OFF. This is normal system operationand does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-ger air bag system, the supplemental airbag warning light , located in the me-ter and gauges area of the instrumentpanel, will blink. Have the system checked. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Normal operationIn order for the occupant classificationsensor system to classify the front passen-ger based on weight, please follow the pre-cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objectsweighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) hanging onthe seat or placed in the seatbackpocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or otherobject is not pressing against the rearof the seatback.

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is notpushing or pulling on the back of thefront passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passengerseat or seatback is not forced backagainst an object on the seat or floorbehind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placedunder the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-ing against the seatback, and centeredon the seat cushion with your feet com-fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on yourlap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the“Seat belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 secondsallowing the system to classify thefront passenger before the vehicle isput into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-ing the front passenger air bag statuslight.


NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classificationsensor system locks the classificationduring driving so it is important that youconfirm that the front passenger is prop-erly classified prior to driving. Also, theoccupant classification sensor systemmay recalculate the weight of the occu-pant when the vehicle comes to a stop(i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so frontpassenger seat occupants should con-tinue to remain seated as outlinedabove.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bagstatus light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with no front passengerand no objects on the front passengerseat:

This may be due to the following condi-tions that may be interfering with theweight sensors:

∙ An object weighing over 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)hanging on the seat or placed in theseatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressingagainst the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling onthe back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatbackagainst an object on the seat or floorbehind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seatcushion and center console or betweenthe seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to astop when it is safe to do so. Check andcorrect any of the above conditions. Re-start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed duringwhich the front passenger air bag statuslight will remain lit for about 7 secondsinitially.

If the light is still ON after this, the vehicleshould be checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

2. If the light is ON with an adult occupy-ing the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air baglight is functioning as intended. Thefront passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a smalladult, then this may be due to the followingconditions that may be interfering with theweight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaningagainst the seatback, and centered onthe seat cushion with his/her feet com-fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressingagainst the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling onthe back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatbackagainst an object on the seat or floorbehind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seatcushion and center console or betweenthe seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to astop when it is safe to do so. Check andcorrect any of the above conditions. Re-start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.


NOTE:

A system check will be performed duringwhich the front passenger air bag statuslight will remain lit for about 7 secondsinitially.

If the light is still ON after this, the personshould be advised not to ride in the frontpassenger seat and the vehicle should bechecked as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Other supplemental front-impact airbag precautions

WARNING∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steer-ing wheel or instrument panel. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. Thisis to prevent accidental inflation ofthe supplemental air bag or damageto the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or front end struc-ture. This could affect proper opera-tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-tem may result in serious personal in-jury. Tampering includes changes tothe steering wheel and the instru-ment panel assembly by placing ma-terial over the steering wheel pad andabove the instrument panel or by in-stalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-senger seat may affect the function ofthe air bag system and result in seri-ous personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing ma-terial on the seat cushion or by install-ing additional trim material, such asseat covers, on the seat that are notspecifically designed to assure properair bag operation. Additionally, do notstow any objects under the front pas-senger seat or the seat cushion andseatback. Such objects may interferewith the proper operation of the occu-pant classification sensor (weightsensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affectthe front air bag system. Tamperingwith the seat belt system may resultin serious personal injury.


∙ It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe front air bag. It is also recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor installation of electrical equip-ment. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the air bagsystem.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect the function of thesupplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identifica-tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the front airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (withoutNISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)(if so equipped)This SRS section contains important infor-mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-tal front-impact air bag

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the head and chest of the driverand right front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest area of the driver andright front passenger in certain side impactcollisions. The side air bag is designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impactforce to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions in certainside impact or rollover collisions. In a sideimpact, the curtain air bags are designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate and remain inflated fora short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement thecrash protection provided by the seat beltsand is not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and theoccupant seated a suitable distance awayfrom the steering wheel, instrument paneland door finishers. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.



WARNING∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,rear impact, rollover, or lower severityfrontal collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bagsare most effective when you are sit-ting well back and upright in the seat.The front air bags inflate with greatforce. If you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of po-sition in any way, you are at greaterrisk of injury or death in a crash. Youmay also receive serious or fatal inju-ries from the front air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sitback against the seatback and as faraway as practical from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Alwaysproperly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sen-sors that detect if the seat belts arefastened. The air bag system moni-tors the severity of a collision and in-flates the air bags as needed. Failureto properly wear seat belts can in-crease the risk or severity of injury inan accident.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them insidethe steering wheel rim could increasethe risk that they are injured when thefront air bag inflates.

∙ The air bag system monitors the se-verity of a collision and then inflatesthe air bags as needed. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

WRS0031


WARNING∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold themin your lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041


WARNING∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teensand children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044


WARNING∙ Even with the air bag system, never

install a rear-facing child restraint inthe front seat. An inflating air bagcould seriously injure or kill a child. Arear-facing child restraint must onlybe used in the rear seat.

WARNINGFront seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the eventof a frontal impact, rear impact, orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reducethe risk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256Do not lean against doors or windows.

WRS0431


WARNING∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effectivewhen you are sitting well back andupright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain air bag inflate with greatforce. Do not allow anyone to placetheir hand, leg or face near the side airbag on the side of the seatback of thefront seat or near the side roof rails.Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the windowor lean against the door. Some ex-amples of dangerous riding positionsare shown in the previousillustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.SSS0162


WARNING∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, youmay be seriously injured. Be espe-cially careful with children, whoshould always be properly restrained.Some examples of dangerous ridingpositions are shown in theillustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withside air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159


Supplemental air bag system1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags in-flators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactand rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Seat belt buckle switches

7. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules

9. Satellite sensor

This vehicle is equipped with supplementalfront air bag system for the driver and rightfront passenger seats. This system is de-signed to meet certification requirementsunder U.S. regulations. It is also permitted inCanada. However, all of the information,cautions and warnings in this manualstill apply and must be followed.LRS3115


The driver supplemental front-impact airbag is located in the center of the steeringwheel. The front passenger supplementalfront-impact air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. Thesupplemental front air bags are designedto inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,although they may inflate if the forces inanother type of collision are similar tothose of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal colli-sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is notalways an indication of proper front air bagsystem operation.

The supplemental air bag system moni-tors information from the crash zone sen-sor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU) and seatbelt buckle sensors that detect if the seatbelts are fastened. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision andwhether the seat belts are being used. Onlyone front air bag may inflate in a crash,depending on the crash severity andwhether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. This does not indicate improperperformance of the system. If you have anyquestions about the performance of yourair bag system, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to obtain informationabout the system.

If you have any questions about your airbag system, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to obtain informationabout the system. If you are consideringmodification of your vehicle due to a dis-ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-tact information is contained in the begin-ning of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by the re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-tion and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the driver and rightfront passenger. They can help save livesand reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facialabrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from the steering wheelor instrument panel. The front air bags in-flate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the forceof the front air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after acollision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START po-sition.


WARNING∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steer-ing wheel or instrument panel. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if the front airbag inflates.


∙ Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. Thisis to prevent accidental inflation ofthe supplemental air bag or damageto the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or front end struc-ture. This could affect proper opera-tion of the front air bag system.

∙ If your vehicle has front recoveryhooks as original factory equipmentdo not remove or modify them. If itwas not equipped with front recoveryhooks do not install them. Either ac-tion could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system resulting ininjury or death.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-tem may result in serious personal in-jury. Tampering includes changes tothe steering wheel and the instru-ment panel assembly by placing ma-terial over the steering wheel pad andabove the instrument panel or by in-stalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affectthe front air bag system. Tamperingwith the seat belt system may resultin serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe front air bag. It is also recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor installation of electrical equip-ment. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring harness* shouldnot be modified or disconnected. Un-authorized electrical test equipmentand probing devices should not beused on the air bag system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect the function of thesupplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identifica-tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the front airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.


FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGAND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAINSIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVERSUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMSThe side air bags are located in the outsideof the seatback of the front seats. The cur-tain air bags are located in the side roofrails. All of the information, cautions andwarnings in this manual must be fol-lowed. The side air bags and curtain airbags are designed to inflate in higher se-verity side collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severityimpact. They are designed to inflate on theside where the vehicle is impacted. Theymay not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflatein certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-ments (for example, during severe off-roading) may cause the curtain air bags toinflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not alwaysan indication of proper side air bag andcurtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke isnot harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as itmay cause irritation and choking. Thosewith a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest of the front occupants. Curtainair bags help to cushion the impact force tothe head of occupants in the front and rearoutboard seating positions. They can helpsave lives and reduce serious injuries. How-ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.Side air bags and curtain air bags do notprovide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and front passenger seatedupright as far as practical away from theside air bag. Rear seat passengers shouldbe seated as far away as practical from thedoor finishers and side roof rails. The sideair bags and curtain air bags inflate quicklyin order to help protect the occupants. Be-cause of this, the force of the side air bagand curtain air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, these air bag modules dur-ing inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bags will remain inflated fora short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bagsoperate only when the ignition switch isin the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

LRS2094


WARNING∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, donot place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door fin-isher and the front seat. Such objectsmay become dangerous projectilesand cause injury if a side air baginflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side airbag and curtain air bag system com-ponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damage toor accidental inflation of the side airbag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thecurtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-tem may result in serious personal in-jury. For example, do not change thefront seats by placing material nearthe seatbacks or by installing addi-tional trim material, such as seat cov-ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe side air bag and curtain air bag. Itis also recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for installation of elec-trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-nesses* should not be modified or dis-connected. Unauthorized electricaltest equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the side air bagor curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectorsare yellow or orange for easy identifica-tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the side air bagand curtain air bag systems and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.

SEAT BELT WITH PRETENSIONER(s)(front seats)

WARNING∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-placed together with the retractorand buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but pretensioner(s) are notactivated, be sure to have the preten-sioner system checked and, if neces-sary, replaced. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is toprevent damage to or accidental acti-vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-ing with the pretensioner system mayresult in serious personal injury.


∙ It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on and aroundthe pretensioner system. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. Unauthorized electricaltest equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the preten-sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. Incorrect dis-posal procedures could cause per-sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activatewith the supplemental air bag system incertain types of collisions. Working with theseat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) helptighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within theseat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.These seat belts are used the same way asconventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indi-cate a fire. Care should be taken not toinhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breath-ing condition should get fresh air promptly.After the pretensioner(s’) activation, loadlimiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces againstthe chest.

The supplemental air bag warninglight is used to indicate malfunctionsin the pretensioner system. For additionalinformation, refer to "Supplemental air bagwarning light" in this section. If the opera-tion of the supplemental air bag warninglight indicates there is a malfunction, havethe system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the preten-sioner system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on thesurface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLABELSWarning labels about the supplementalfront-impact air bag system are placed inthe vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WRS0885


WARNINGDo not use a rear-facing child restrainton a seat protected by an air bag infront of it. If the air bag deploys, it maycause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLIGHTThe supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates for about 7 seconds andthen turns off. This means the system isoperational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensionersystems may not operate properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

WARNINGIf the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand/or pretensioner systems will notoperate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

LRS0100


Repair and replacementprocedureThe front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags and pretensioner(s) are designed toinflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-mental air bag warning light remains illu-minated after inflation has occurred. Thesesystems should be repaired and/or re-placed as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

When maintenance work is required on thevehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-lated parts should be pointed out to theperson performing the maintenance. Theignition switch should always be placed inthe LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function againand must be replaced. Additionally,the activated pretensioner(s) mustalso be replaced. The air bag moduleand pretensioner(s) should be re-placed. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.However, the air bag module and pre-tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems and the pretensionersystem should be inspected if there isany damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag or pretensioner sys-tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehiclefrom any direction, your OccupantClassification Sensor (OCS) (if soequipped) should be checked to verifyit is still functioning correctly. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. The OCS(weight sensor) (if so equipped)should be checked even if no air bagsdeploy as a result of the impact. Fail-ure to verify proper OCS (weight sen-sor) (if so equipped) function may re-sult in an improper air bagdeployment resulting in injury ordeath.


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Auxiliary gauges (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Off-road monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Compass (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26How to use the vehicle informationdisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Vehicle information display warningsand indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Diesel warnings and indicators(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Rain-sensing auto wiper system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Rear window and/or outside mirror defrosterswitch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)system (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Cargo lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Climate controlled seat switches(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-56Heated rear seat switches (if so equipped). . . . . . 2-57Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-59Warning systems switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-59Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-60Hill descent control switch (if so equipped). . . . . . 2-61Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-63Front and rear sonar system OFF switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67

12v Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67120v outlets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71Rear-door pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-72Console side pockets (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-72

Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72Under-seat storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-73Console box storage trays(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75Center armrest storage (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-76Under front seat storage bin(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77Overhead sunglasses storage(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78Grocery hooks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-81Cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82C-Channel cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-82

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83Rear power window switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-86

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88

Personal Lights (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89HomeLink® Universal Transceiver(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89

Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90Programming HomeLink® for Canadiancustomers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91Operating the HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92

Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-92Reprogramming a single HomeLink®button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

1. Vents (P. 4-29)2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-53)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-46)3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control*Bluetooth® Hands-Free PhoneSystem*Vehicle information displaycontrols (P. 2-26)

4. Driver supplemental air bag(P. 1-53)Horn (P. 2-54)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)Warning and indicator lights(P. 2-16)

6. Cruise control switches (P. 5-41)7. Shift lever (P. 5-17)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-65)8. Audio controls*9. Center display (P. 4-3)10. Climate controls (P. 4-29)11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-53)12. Glove box (P. 2-71)13. Front passenger air bag status

light (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)14. Power outlet (P. 2-67)

LII2558

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-4 Instruments and controls

15. Heated steering wheel switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)Warning systems switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)

16. Auxiliary jack*USB port*

17. Hazard warning flasher switch(P. 6-2)

18. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)(if so equipped) (P. 2-66)

19. Climate control seat switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-55)Heated front seat switches(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)

20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-60)Front and rear sonar system OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-64)

21. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-45)

22. Push-button ignition switch(P. 5-11)

23. Tilt and telescopic steering wheelcontrol (P. 3-30)

24. Headlight aiming control(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)Power inverter switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-63)Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-55)Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-62)Hill descent control system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-61)

25. Headlight switch (P. 2-49)Fog light switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-54)Instrument brightness controlswitches (P. 2-49)Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

*Refer to the separate NissanConnect®Owner’s Manual

Refer to the page number indicated inparenthesis for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-5

1. Tachometer2. Warning and indicator lights3. Vehicle information display

OdometerOutside temperature display

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETERThis vehicle is equipped with a speedom-eter and odometer. The speedometer islocated on the right side of the meter clus-ter. The odometer is located in the vehicleinformation display to the left of the speed-ometer and can be accessed with the ve-hicle in the ON position.

LIC3100

METERS AND GAUGES


SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates the vehiclespeed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer and the twin trip odometer�1 are displayed in the vehicle informationdisplay when the ignition switch is placedin the ON position.

The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET switch �2 on the leftside of the instrument panel to change thedisplay as follows:

ODO → Trip → Trip → ODO

Resetting the trip odometerPushing the TRIP RESET switch �2 for about2 seconds resets the currently displayedtrip odometer to zero.

LIC2255 LIC3727


TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm). Do not revthe engine into the red zone �1 .

CAUTIONWhen engine speed approaches the redzone, reduce engine speed. Operatingthe engine in the red zone may causeserious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGEThe gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature. The engine coolant tempera-ture is within the normal range �1 whenthe gauge needle points within the zoneshown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varieswith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

CAUTIONIf the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over thenormal range, stop the vehicle as soonas safely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.For additional information, refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manualfor immediate action required.

LIC3543 LIC2220


FUEL GAUGEThe gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-fillerdoor is located on the driver’s side of thevehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible. Ifthe vehicle has run out of fuel, the sys-tem will need to be primed. Turn thekey switch to ON for 20–30 secondsand then back OFF. Repeat 3–4 timesor until the fuel pressure builds. Onceprimed, start the vehicle. After a fewdriving trips. the light shouldturn off. If the light remains on after afew driving trips, have the vehicle in-spected. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthis section.

LIC2222


AUXILIARY GAUGES (if soequipped)

1. Exhaust temperature gauge (if soequipped)

2. Automatic Transmission fluid tem-perature gauge

3. Turbo meter (if so equipped)

4. Engine oil pressure gauge

5. Engine oil temperature gauge

6. Voltmeter

Exhaust temperature gauge (if soequipped)

For additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

Automatic Transmission fluid tempera-ture gauge

This gauge indicates the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid.

CAUTION∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate

low automatic transmission fluidlevel. Use the dipstick to check thefluid level. For additional information,refer to “6- speed automatic trans-mission fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

∙ If the gauge indicates automatictransmission fluid temperature overthe normal range, stop the vehicle assoon as safely possible. It is recom-mended that you have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-ued operation of the vehicle may seri-ously damage the transmission.

Turbo meter (if so equipped)


Engine oil pressure gauge

The gauge indicates the engine lubricationsystem oil pressure while the engine is run-ning. The bar should be in the middle of thegauge when the engine is running.

LIC3390


CAUTION∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. For additional in-formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the“Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

∙ If the gauge needle does not movewith the proper amount of engine oil,it is recommended that you have thevehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.Continued vehicle operation in such acondition could cause serious dam-age to the engine.

Engine oil temperature gauge

This gauge measures the temperature ofthe engine oil.

Voltmeter

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the voltmeter indicates the bat-tery voltage. When the engine is running, itindicates the generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts dropbelow the normal range. If the range is notwithin the normal range (11 – 15 volts) whilethe engine is running, it may indicate thatthe charging system is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)LEVEL (if so equipped)This gauge measures the DEF level re-maining in the vehicle. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Fuel and refueling” in theTitan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

LIC3479


OFF-ROAD MONITOR (if soequipped)The off-road monitor displays the variousslopes of the vehicle.

The Pitch Gauge (left) indicates the angle ofthe vehicle position up or down. The valuewill be displayed below the gauge while thevehicle graphic will rotate to indicate con-dition pointed up or down.

The Tire Angle (center) indicates the angleof the tires based on turning of the steeringwheel. The graphic image will show the ac-tual vehicle tire position while the angle isto be displayed below as reference.

The Roll Gauge (right) indicates the angle ofthe vehicle position left and right. The valuewill be displayed below the gauge while thevehicle graphic will rotate to indicate con-dition of the vehicle leaning to the left orright.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetismand indicates the direction of the vehicle’sheading.

With the ignition switch placed in the ONposition, press the button as de-scribed in the chart below to activate vari-ous features of the automatic anti-glarerearview mirror.

Press and holdthebutton forabout:

Feature:(Press button again for about1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 secondsCompass zone can be changedto correct false compass read-ings

9 seconds Compass enters calibrationmode

For information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glarerearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section of this manual.

LIC3417

COMPASS (if so equipped)


Press the button for about 1 secondwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition to toggle the compass display �1on or off. The display will indicate the direc-tion of the vehicle’s heading.N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-pass by driving the vehicle in three com-plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driv-ing your vehicle on your everyday route.The compass will be calibrated once it hastracked three complete circles.

LIC1487


Zone variation change procedureThe difference between magnetic northand geographical north is known as vari-ance. In some areas, this difference cansometimes be great enough to cause falsecompass readings. Follow these instruc-tions to set the variance for your particularlocation if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button forabout 11 seconds or the buttonfor about 8 seconds. The current zonenumber will appear in the display. Re-lease the button.

2. Find your current location on the zonemap. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button re-peatedly to toggle through the zonenumbers until the desired number ap-pears in the display. Once you have se-lected a zone number, the display willshow a compass direction within a fewseconds.

WIC0355


NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with au-tomatic correction function. If the correctdirection is not shown, follow this proce-dure.

1. With the display turned on, press andhold the for about 10 seconds.The “C” icon in the compass display willilluminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving thevehicle in three complete circles at amaximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

CAUTION∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect theoperation of the compass.

∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as itmay cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.


or Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light

Low DEF warning light (if so equipped) High beam indicator light (blue)

Automatic Transmission check warninglight

Low tire pressure warning light Hill descent control system ON indicatorlight (if so equipped)

Automatic Transmission oil temperaturewarning light

Malfunction warning light (red)(if so equipped)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (yellow)

Automatic Transmission Park warninglight ( model)

Master warning light (if so equipped) Security indicator light

or Brake warning light Passenger seat belt warning light(if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light(green)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Slip indicator light

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) warninglight (if so equipped)

Water in Fuel warning light(if so equipped)

TOW mode ON indicator light

Door open warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Driver seat belt warning light and chime Front fog light indicator light(if so equipped)g light (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFindicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light(if so equipped)

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTSAND AUDIBLE REMINDERS


CHECKING LIGHTSWith all doors closed, apply the parkingbrake, fasten the seat belts and place theignition switch in the ON position withoutstarting the engine. The following lights (ifso equipped) will come on:

, , orThe following lights (if so equipped) willcome on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , ,

, , ATP ,If any light does not come on or operate ina way other than described, it may indicatea burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-function. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-played on the vehicle information displaybetween the speedometer and tachom-eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve-hicle information display” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTSFor additional information, refer to “Vehicleinformation display” in this section.

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the ABS warning light illuminatesand then turns off. This indicates the ABS isoperational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates whilethe engine is running or while driving, itmay indicate the ABS is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lockfunction is turned off. The brake systemthen operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information,refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Automatic Transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about2 seconds. If the light comes on at anyother time, it may indicate the automatictransmission system is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Automatic Transmission oiltemperature warning light

This light comes on when the automatictransmission oil temperature is too high. Ifthe light comes on while driving, reduce thevehicle speed as soon as safely possibleuntil the light turns off.

CAUTIONContinued vehicle operation when theA/T oil temperature warning light is onmay damage the automatictransmission.


Automatic TransmissionPark warning light (model)

WARNING∙ If the 4WD mode indicator is off or the

ATP warning light is on, this indicatesthat the automatic transmission P(Park) position will not function andcould result in the vehicle moving un-expectedly, causing serious personalinjury or property damage. Always setthe parking brake. For additional in-formation, refer to “Using 4–wheeldrive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

∙ If the ATP light is on, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park)position will not function and thetransfer case is in neutral.

∙ When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illumi-nates and the parking brake is set.Failure to engage the transfer posi-tion in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result inthe vehicle moving unexpectedly, re-sulting in serious personal injury orproperty damage.

∙ Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4Hor 4LO position again to turn off theATP warning light when the shift leveris in the P position and the ATP warn-ing light is on. (Before shifting the4WD switch into the 4LO position,move the shift lever to the N positiononce, shift the shift lever into P againand make sure the ATP warning lightis off.)

This light indicates that the automatictransmission parking function is not en-gaged. If the transfer control is not securedin any drive position while the shift lever isin the P (Park) position, the transmission willdisengage and the drive wheels will notlock.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluidlevel. If the light comes on while the engineis running, with the parking brake not ap-plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brakefluid as necessary. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, havethe warning system checked. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


WARNING∙ Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.Driving could be dangerous. If youjudge it to be safe, drive carefully tothe nearest service station for repairs.Otherwise, have your vehicle towedbecause driving it could bedangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort and pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the charging sys-tem is not functioning properly. Turn theengine off and check the generator belt. Ifthe belt is loose, broken, missing, or if thelight remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION∙ Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable voltagecontrol system (if so equipped) andthe vehicle battery may not chargecompletely. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Variable voltage controlsystem” in the “Do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.

∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Diesel Particulate Filter(DPF) warning light (if soequipped)


Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doorsare not closed securely while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

Driver seat belt warninglight and chime

The light and chime remind you to fastenyour seat belt. The light illuminates when-ever the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition and remains illuminated until thedriver’s seat belt is fastened. At the sametime, the chime sounds for about 6 sec-onds unless the driver’s seat belt is se-curely fastened.

For additional information, refer to “Seatbelts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual.

Engine oil pressurewarning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during nor-mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,stop the engine immediately, and call aNISSAN dealer or other authorized repairshop.

The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level. Foradditional information, refer to “Engine oil”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.


CAUTIONRunning the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

Low DEF warning light (if soequipped)


Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-tors the tire pressure of all tires except thespare.

The low tire pressure warning light warnsof low tire pressure or indicates that theTPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illumi-nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”warning also appears in the vehicle in-formation display (if so equipped).

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjustthe tire pressure of all four tires to therecommended COLD tire pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information la-bel located in the driver’s door opening.The low tire pressure warning light doesnot automatically turn off when the tirepressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-flated to the recommended pressure,the vehicle must be driven at speedsabove 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the low tire pressurewarning light. Use a tire pressure gaugeto check the tire pressure.

For vehicles with a vehicle information dis-play, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-ing appears each time the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position as long as the lowtire pressure warning light remains illumi-nated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicleinformation display” in this section, “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” and “In case of emer-gency” sections of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, thelow tire pressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Have thesystem checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warningdoes not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate aTPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section and “Tirepressure” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual.


WARNING∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Thosewho use a pacemaker should contactthe electric medical equipmentmanufacturer for the possible influ-ences before use.

∙ If the light does not illuminate withthe ignition switch placed in the ONposition, have the vehicle checked assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury ordeath. Check the tire pressure for allfour tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshow on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label located in the driver’sdoor opening to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light off. If the light stillilluminates while driving after adjust-ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flator the TPMS may be malfunctioning. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible. If no tireis flat and all tires are properly in-flated, have the vehicle checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tire pres-sure warning light will flash for ap-proximately 1 minute. The light will re-main on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor these services.


CAUTION∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 mph (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the four wheels correctly.


Malfunction warning light(red) (if so equipped)

If this warning light illuminates this indi-cates either the coolant temperature isabove a critical threshold or the exhausttemperatures are above a critical thresh-old. When illuminated this lamp indicatesthe need to stop the engine as soon as itcan be safely done. The engine must re-main shut down until the engine can berepaired. For additional information, referto the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

CAUTION∙ Continuing vehicle operation without

proper servicing of the engine controlsystem could lead to poor driveability,reduced fuel economy, and damageto the engine control system, whichmay affect the vehicle’s warrantycoverage.

∙ Failure to drain the water from thefuel filter can cause serious damageto the engine. It is recommended thatyou contact a NISSAN dealer as soonas possible.

Master warning light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when various vehicleinformation display warnings appear.

∙ No key warning

∙ Low fuel warning

∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning

∙ Parking brake release warning

∙ Door open warning

∙ Loose fuel cap warning

∙ Check tire pressure warning

∙ 4WD error (if so equipped)

∙ Front & rear tire size differences (if soequipped)

Passenger seat beltwarning light (if soequipped)

The light reminds you to notify the passen-ger to fasten their seat belt. The light illumi-nates whenever the ignition is placed in theON or START position and remains illumi-nated until the passenger’s seat belt is fas-tened.

The light will remain on for a period of timewhen the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)and the passenger seat belt is unfastened.If the passenger seat belt is fastened, thelight will turn off.

For additional information, refer to “Seatbelts” in the “Safety-Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual for precautions on seat beltusage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONor START position, the supplemental airbag warning light illuminates for about7 seconds and then turns off. This meansthe system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,and pretensioner seat belt systems needservicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightremains on after approximately 7 sec-onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.


∙ The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-mental restraint system (air bag system)and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-tion properly. For additional information, re-fer to “Supplemental Restraint System(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section ofthis manual.

WARNINGIf the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand/or pretensioner systems will notoperate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Water in Fuel warning light(if so equipped)


INDICATOR LIGHTSFor additional information, refer to “Vehicleinformation display” in this section.

Electronic locking reardifferential (E-Lock) systemON indicator light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when the electroniclocking rear differential (E-Lock) systemclutch is fully engaged.

The indicator light flashes when the sys-tem is first turned on. When the system fullyengages, the light remains on. If the switchis on and the indicator light continues toflash, the system is not engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-tem switch” in this section and “Electroniclocking rear differential (E-Lock) system” inthe “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

Front fog light indicatorlight (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-nates when the front fog lights are on. Foradditional information, refer to “Fog lightswitch” in this section.

Front passenger air bagstatus light (if so equipped)

The front passenger air bag status light willbe lit and the passenger front air bag will beoff depending on how the front passengerseat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” in the“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-light high beams are on and goes out whenthe low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comeson when the passing signal is activated.


Hill descent control systemON indicator light (if soequipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light comes on briefly andthen turns off.

The light comes on when the hill descentcontrol system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on andthe indicator light blinks, the system maybe disabled.

You may feel or hear the system working;this is normal.

If the indicator light does not come onwhen the hill descent switch is on, the sys-tem may not be functioning properly. Havethe system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-scent control system ON indicator light” inthis section and “Hill descent control sys-tem” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) (yellow)

If this indicator light comes on steady orblinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate a potential emission control mal-function.

If this indicator light comes on steady for20 seconds and then blinks for 10 secondswhen the engine is not running, it indicatesthat the vehicle is not ready for an emissioncontrol system inspection/maintenancetest. For additional information, refer to“Readiness for inspection/maintenance(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been de-tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if theLoose Fuel Cap warning appears in thevehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten orinstall the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn offafter a few driving trips. If the lightdoes not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. You do not needto have your vehicle towed to thedealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire hasbeen detected which may damage theemission control system. To reduce oravoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled or towed.


The MIL may stop blinking and come onsteady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTIONContinued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, reducedfuel economy, and possible damage tothe emission control system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignitionswitch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the secu-rity system equipped on the vehicle is op-erational.

For additional information, refer to “Securitysystems” in this section.

Side light and headlightindicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator lightilluminates when the side light or headlight

position is selected. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Headlight switch” in this sec-tion.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system is operat-ing, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearingits traction limits. The road surface may beslippery.

TOW mode ON indicatorlight

This light comes on when the tow modefunction is on.

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turnsignal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch isturned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when theVDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-cates the VDC system is not operating.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine and the system will operatenormally. For additional information, referto “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

The VDC light also comes on when youplace the ignition switch in the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 secondsif the system is operational. If the light stayson or comes on along with the indi-cator light while you are driving, have theVDC system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.While the VDC system is operating, youmight feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-tem working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERSBrake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a disc brake pad requiresreplacement, it makes a high pitchedscraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked as soonas possible if the warning sound is heard.


Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFFposition, a chime sounds when the driver’sdoor is opened if the headlights or parkinglights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off beforeleaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® doorbuzzerThe Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds ifthe Intelligent Key is left inside the vehiclewhen locking the doors. When the buzzersounds, be sure to check both the vehicleand the Intelligent Key. For additional infor-mation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” inthe “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section of this manual.

The vehicle information display is locatedto the left of the speedometer. It displayssuch items as:

∙ Vehicle settings

∙ Trip computer information

∙ Drive system warnings and settings (ifso equipped)

∙ Cruise control system information

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (if soequipped)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system (ifso equipped)

∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor-mation

∙ Indicators and warnings

∙ Tire Pressure information

LIC2630

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY


HOW TO USE THE VEHICLEINFORMATION DISPLAYThe vehicle information display can benavigated using the ENTER and but-tons located on the steering wheel.

1. ENTER — press to select the vehicle in-formation menu items. Additionally, usethe UP/DOWN function to navi-gate the menu items

2. — move LEFT/RIGHT to navigatethrough the items in the vehicle infor-mation display

The ENTER button also controls audiofunctions. For additional information, referto the separate NissanConnect® Owner’sManual.

STARTUP DISPLAYWhen the vehicle is placed in the ON or ACC(if so equipped) position, the vehicle infor-mation display may display the followingscreens:

∙ Home

∙ Off Road

∙ Auxiliary Gauges (if so equipped)

∙ DEF Level (if so equipped)

∙ Trip

∙ Fuel Economy

∙ Navigation (if so equipped)

∙ Audio

∙ Driving Aids (if so equipped)

∙ Tire Pressures

∙ Warning Confirmation

∙ Settings

Warning Confirmation will only display ifthere are any warnings present. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-mation display warnings and indicators” inthis section.

To control which items display in the ve-hicle information display, refer to “Settings”in this section.

SETTINGSThe setting mode allows you to change theinformation displayed in the vehicle infor-mation display:

∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

∙ Meter Settings

∙ Vehicle Settings

∙ Towing Settings (if so equipped)

∙ Alarm (if so equipped)

∙ Maintenance

∙ Unit

∙ Language

∙ Factory Reset

LIC4099


Driver Assistance (if so equipped)The driver assistance menu allows the userto change the various driving and parkingaids.

Menu item ResultDriving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traf-

fic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Blind Spot (BSW) Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids. For additional information, refer to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

Moving Object (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, refer to “Moving Ob-ject Detection (MOD)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.

Sensor (if so equipped) Allows the user to turn the sensors on, off, or front only.Display Allows user to turn the display on or off in the vehicle information display.Volume Allows user to adjust the volume of warning chimes.Range Allows user to set a specific range for the sensors to engage.


Meter SettingsThe meter settings allow the user tochange the settings for the vehicle infor-mation display.

Menu item ResultMain Menu Selection Allows user to customize the screens shown in the vehicle information display.

Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display.Off Road Allows user to turn the off road monitor on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Off Road Monitor” in this section.Auxiliary Gauges Allows user to turn the auxiliary gauges on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Auxiliary gauges” in this section.DEF Level (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the DEF LEVEL meter on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.4x4–i (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 4x4–i screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,

refer to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Trip Allows user to turn the trip on or off in the vehicle information display.Fuel Economy (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display.Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer

to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,

refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.Driving Aids (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display.Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.TPMS (if so equipped) Allows user to set tire pressure targets.

Body Color Allows user to change the color of the vehicle shown in the vehicle information display.ECO Drive Report Allows user to access the ECO drive report.

Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.View History Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history.

Welcome Effect Allows user to customize the available welcome effects.


Vehicle SettingsThe vehicle settings allow the user tochange the settings for lights, wipers, lock-ing, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item ResultRear Door Alert Displays the available rear Door Alert options.

Alert and Horn When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds.Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed.Off When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

Lighting Displays available lighting features of the vehicle.Welcome Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp feature on or off.Light Sensitivity (if so equipped) Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.

Turn indicator Displays available turn indicator options.3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off.

Locking Displays available locking options.I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped) Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door ispushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if thedoor unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will beunlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Answer Bk. Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off.Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped) Displays available options for the auto door unlock.

Off Doors will have to be manually unlocked.IGN Off Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.Shift into P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Wipers Displays available wiper options.


Menu item ResultRain Sensor (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the rain sensor feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer

switch” in this section.Speed Dependent (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and

washer switch” in this section.Memory Seat (ADP) (if so equipped) Displays available memory seat options.

Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seatbackward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting intothe vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous setposition. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-justments” section of this manual.

Exit Steering Up Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steer-ing wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After get-ting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the pre-vious position. For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section of this manual.

Reverse Tilt Mirror (if so equipped) Displays reverse tilt mirror information.Towing Settings (if so equipped) Displays available towing settings options.

Trailer light check Allows user to select a mode in which the vehicle will test various lights that could affect a trailer if con-nected properly. This feature can also be activated using the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. For additionalinformation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” and “Towing atrailer” in the Technical and consumer information” sections of this manual.


AlarmThe alarm menu allows the user to set spe-cific alarms for various items on the vehicle.

Menu item ResultOutside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm.Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off.Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.


MaintenanceThe maintenance menu allows the user toset reminders for various vehicle mainte-nance items.

WARNINGThe tire replacement indicator is not asubstitute for regular tire checks, in-cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-tional information, refer to “Changingwheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”section of this manual. Many factors in-cluding tire inflation, alignment, drivinghabits and road conditions affect tirewear and when tires should be re-placed. Setting the tire replacement in-dicator for a certain driving distance

does not mean your tires will last thatlong. Use the tire replacement indicatoras a guide only and always performregular tire checks. Failure to performregular tire checks, including tire pres-sure checks could result in tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to a collision, which couldresult in serious personal injury ordeath.

Menu item ResultMaintenance Allows user to cycle through various maintenance items and set reminders to perform maintenance at spe-

cific intervals.Oil Control System (if so equipped) Allows user to view the oil control system maintenance interval.Oil Filter (if so equipped) Allows user to set an oil filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Oil and Filter (if so equipped) Allows user to set an oil and filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Air Filter Allows user to set an air filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Tire Allows user to set a tire reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Brake Pad Allows user to set a brake pad reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Brake Fluid Allows user to set a brake fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Battery Allows user to set a battery reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Transmission Fluid Allows user to set a transmission fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Engine Coolant Allows user to set an engine coolant reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.DEF Level (if so equipped) Allows user to set a DEF level reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Spark Plug (if so equipped) Allows user to set a spark plug reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Other Allows user to set a reminder, other than for the maintenance items listed above, at a specific interval or re-

set the current one.


UnitThe units menu allows the user to changethe units shown in the vehicle informationdisplay.

Menu item ResultMileage Displays available mileage display units.Pressure Displays available pressure display units.Temperature Displays available temperature display units.

LanguageThe language menu allows the user tochange the languages displayed in the ve-hicle information display.

Menu item ResultLanguage Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Factory ResetThe factory reset menu allows the user torestore the vehicle information display set-tings to factory status.

Menu item ResultFactory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or deny the reset.


LIC4055


VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAYWARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. Door Open

2. Release Parking Brake

3. Range XX miles

4. Low Fuel

5. Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)

6. Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Die-sel engines only)

7. Oil Level Sensor Fault (For Diesel en-gines only)

8. AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK

9. AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: SeeOwner’s Manual

10. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

11. Low Tire Pressure Error — Info

12. Flat Tire

13. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

14. Push brake and start button to drive

15. Remote Engine Start Mode (if soequipped)

16. Brightness indicator

17. Low Outside Temperature

18. Shift to Park

19. Low fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

20. Low Washer Fluid

21. Cruise control indicator

22. 4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)

23. FRT & RR tire size difference: See Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped)

24. Push Ignition to OFF

25. Headlight System Error: See Owner’sManual (if so equipped)

26. Key ID Incorrect

27. No Key Detected

28. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

29. Key Battery Low

30. Power will turn off to save the battery

31. Power turned off to save the battery

32. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

33. 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if soequipped)

34. Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

35. Maintenance indicators

36. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’sManual (if so equipped)

37. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

38. 4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)

39. Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)

40. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if soequipped)

41. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if soequipped)

42. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

43. Rear Door Alert is activated (if soequipped)

44. Check Rear Seat For All Articles (if soequipped)

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door hasbeen opened.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the messagearea of the vehicle information displaywhen the parking brake is set and the ve-hicle is driven. Press the brake pedal to re-lease the parking brake.


Range XX miles

This warning illuminates to indicate the ap-proximate distance remaining before thefuel reaches 0 (Empty).

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel levelin the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel assoon as it is convenient, preferably beforethe fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). Therewill be a small reserve of fuel in the tankwhen the fuel gauge needle reaches 0(Empty).

Oil Level Low (For Diesel engines only)

If the Oil Level Low indicator is displayed,the engine oil level is low. If the low levelreminder is displayed, check the level usingthe engine oil dipstick.

CAUTIONThe oil level should be checked regu-larly using the engine oil dipstick. Oper-ating with an insufficient amount of oilcan damage the engine and such dam-age is not covered by the warranty.

Low Oil Pressure Stop Vehicle (For Dieselengines only)

This warning appears in the message areaof the vehicle information display if low oilpressure is detected. This gauge is not de-signed to indicate low oil level. The low oilpressure warning is not designed to indi-cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

Oil Level Sensor Fault (For Diesel en-gines only)

This warning appears in the message areaof the vehicle information display if the oillevel sensor malfunctions. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer tohave this system checked.

AT (Automatic Transmission) CHECK

If the AT Check warning appears while theengine is running, or while driving, it mayindicate that the AT is not functioning prop-erly and may need servicing. Have the sys-tem checked, and if necessary, repairedpromptly. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

AT (Automatic Transmission) Error: SeeOwner’s Manual

If this message appears while the engine isrunning, or while driving, it may indicatethat the AT is not functioning properly andmay need servicing. Have the systemchecked, and if necessary, repairedpromptly. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tirepressure warning light in the meter illumi-nates and low tire pressure is detected. Thewarning appears each time the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position as longas the low tire pressure warning light re-mains illuminated. If this warning appears,stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-sures of all four tires to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. For additionalinformation, refer to “Low tire pressurewarning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section of thismanual.


Low Tire Pressure Error — Info

This warning appears when the low tirepressure warning light in the meter illumi-nates and low tire pressure is detected.Press the ENTER button for informationabout the low tire pressure. For additionalinformation, refer to “Low tire pressurewarning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the“Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

Flat Tire

This warning appears when the low tirepressure warning light in the meter illumi-nates and one or more flat tires are de-tected while driving.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extendedstorage switch is not pushed in. When thiswarning appears, push in the extendedstorage switch to turn off the warning. Foradditional information, refer to “Extendedstorage switch” in this section.

Push brake and start button to drive

This indicator appears when the shift leveris in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine willstart by pushing the ignition switch withthe brake pedal depressed. You can startthe engine from any position of the ignitionswitch.

Remote Engine Start Mode (if soequipped)

This warning appears in the vehicle infor-mation display when the vehicle has beenstarted using the remote start function. Tostart the vehicle, apply the brake and placethe ignition switch in the ON position.

Brightness indicator

This indicator appears when the vehicleinformation display screen brightness isbeing adjusted.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside tem-perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-ture can be changed to display in Celsius orFahrenheit. For additional information, re-fer to “Settings” in this section.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignitionswitch is in the ACC or OFF position and theshift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,

a chime sounds when the ignition switch isin the ACC or OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shiftlever to the P (Park) position and start theengine.

Low fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when the fuel pres-sure is low. Check the fuel level and refuel ifneeded. If the warning remains illuminated,have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service. For additional information, re-fer to “Diesel fuel system” in the “Introduc-tion” of the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

CAUTIONSince the fuel pump is lubricated by thefuel itself, prolonged driving with lowfuel levels may cause progressive dam-age to the fuel pump. This may causethe pump to fail.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when thewindshield-washer fluid is at a low level.Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.For additional information, refer to“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.


Cruise control indicator

This indicator shows the cruise control sys-tem status.

For additional information, refer to “Cruisecontrol” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

4WD shift indicators (if so equipped)

These indicators show which 4WD mode isselected. For additional information, referto “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

FRT & RR tire size difference: See Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a largedifference between the diameters of thefront and rear wheels. Pull off the road in asafe area, with the engine idling. Check thatall the tire sizes are the same, that the tirepressure is correct and that the tires arenot excessively worn. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” ofthis manual.

Push Ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illu-minates, the warning will illuminate if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC positionwhen the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ig-nition switch in the ON position and then inthe LOCK position.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’sManual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the LED head-lights are not functioning properly.

If this warning appears, have your systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignitionswitch is placed from the OFF position andthe Intelligent Key is not recognized by thesystem. You cannot start the engine withan unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSANIntelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section of this manual.

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the IntelligentKey is left outside the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. Make surethe Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.


Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, this light comes on for a periodof time and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of amalfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-tem. If the light comes on while the engineis stopped, it may be impossible to startthe engine.

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, you can drive the vehicle. However,in these cases, have the system checked. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelli-gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat-tery with a new one. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Battery replacement” inthe “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.


Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle infor-mation display after a period of time if theignition switch is in the ACC or the ON po-sition and if the vehicle is in P (Park). Foradditional information, refer to “Push-button ignition switch positions” in the“Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This warning appears after the ignitionswitch is automatically turned off to savethe battery.

Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

This warning appears when the headlightsare left in the ON position when exiting thevehicle. Place the headlight switch in theOFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Headlight switch” in thissection.

4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if soequipped)

This warning appears when the 4-wheeldrive system is not functioning properlywhile the engine is running.

Battery Voltage Low Charge Battery

This warning appears when the battery islow and needs to be charged.

Maintenance indicators

When engine oil service is due, one or moreof these icons will appear automatically toremind you. For additional information, re-fer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” sec-tion of this manual.

These will also appear when the user-setreminders are met. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” inthis section.

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’sManual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is anerror with the system. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Front and rear sonar sys-tem” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an er-ror with your TPMS. If this warning comeson, have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

4WD MODE SHIFTING (if so equipped)

This message appears when the vehicle isshifting into 4WD. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” inthe “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

Loose Fuel Cap (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the fuel-fillercap is not tightened correctly after the ve-hicle has been refueled. For additional in-formation, refer to “Fuel-filler door” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion of this manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and RearCross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if soequipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW andRCTA systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “BlindSpot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if soequipped)

This warning appears when one or more ofthe following systems (if so equipped) isnot functioning properly:


∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic alert (RCTA)

If one or more of these warning appears,have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

This message appears when the BlindSpot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA) systems become unavailablebecause a radar blockage is detected. Foradditional information, refer to “Blind SpotWarning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” sectionof this manual.

Rear Door Alert is activated (if soequipped)

When the system is enabled, this messageappears when the Rear Door Alert systemis active and can remind the driver to checkthe back seat.

∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a drivercan select “Dismiss Message” to clearthe display for a period of time. If noselection is made, this message auto-matically turns off after a period of time.

∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a drivercan select “Disable Alert” to disable thehorn alert for the remainder of the cur-rent trip.

WARNINGSelecting “Dismiss Message” during astop within a trip temporarily dismissesthe message for that stop without turn-ing the system off. Alerts can be pro-vided for other stops during the trip. Se-lecting “Disable Alert” turns off the RearDoor Alert system for the remainder ofa trip and no audible alert will beprovided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en-ables it using the vehicle informationdisplay. For additional information, referto “How to use the vehicle informationdisplay” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “RearDoor Alert” in this section.

Check Rear Seat For All Articles (if soequipped)

When the system is enabled, this messageappears when the vehicle comes to a com-plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned fromthe D (Drive) position to P (Park) position,and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes-sage alerts the driver, after a period of time,to check for items in the rear seat after theaudible alert has been provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en-ables it using the vehicle informationdisplay. For additional information, referto “How to use the vehicle informationdisplay” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “RearDoor Alert” in this section.


DIESEL WARNINGS ANDINDICATORS (if so equipped)These warning and indicators apply to thediesel-only models. For additional informa-tion, refer to the Titan Diesel Owner’sManual.

LIC4100


Your vehicle has two types of security sys-tems:

∙ Vehicle security system

∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visualand audible alarm signals if someoneopens the doors or hood when the systemis armed. It is not, however, a motion detec-tion type system that activates when a ve-hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your keys in the vehicle, andalways lock the vehicle when unattended.Be aware of your surroundings, and park insecure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offersuch equipment. Check with your insur-ance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protectionfeatures.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve-hicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. Thedoors can be locked with the IntelligentKey, door handle request switch, or me-chanical key (if so equipped).

4. Confirm that the security indica-tor light stays on for about 30 seconds.The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. The vehicle security system willautomatically shift into the armedphase. The security light beginsto flash once every three seconds. Ifduring the pre-armed phase one of thefollowing occurs, the system will notarm:

∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechani-cal key (if so equipped), the IntelligentKey or door request switch.

∙ Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ONposition.

∙ If the key is turned slowly when lock-ing the door, the system may not arm.Furthermore, if the key is turned be-yond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key,the system may be disarmed whenthe key is removed. If the indicatorlight fails to glow for a period of time,unlock the door once and lock itagain.

LIC0359

SECURITY SYSTEMS


∙ Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willactivate with all the doors, hood andlocked with the ignition switch placedin the LOCK position. When placingthe ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, the system will be released.

∙ The lockable bedside storage com-partment (if so equipped) is not pro-tected by the vehicle security system.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give thefollowing alarm:

∙ The headlights blink and the hornsounds intermittently but synchro-nously.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off aftera period of time. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tamperedwith again.

The alarm is activated by:

∙ opening any door or hood without us-ing the key (if so equipped) or IntelligentKey (even if the door is unlocked by re-leasing the door inside lock knob).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-er’s door with the key (if so equipped), thekey fob (if so equipped), or by pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key (if soequipped).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in theON position for approximately 5 sec-onds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) separate from the regis-tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.


For Canada:

This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

Security indicator lightThe security indicator light blinks wheneverthe ignition switch is placed in the OFF,LOCK or ACC position.

This function indicates the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ismalfunctioning, the light will remain onwhile the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

If the light still remains on and/or theengine will not start, seek service for theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System assoon as possible. Please bring all regis-tered keys that you have. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

LIC0474


SWITCH OPERATION

WARNINGIn freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the windshieldand obscure your vision which may leadto an accident. Warm the windshieldwith the defroster before you wash thewindshield.

CAUTION∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with windshield-washerfluid concentrates at full strength.Some methyl alcohol basedwindshield-washer fluid concen-trates may permanently stain thegrille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-centrates with water to the manufac-turer’s recommended levels beforepouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir tomix the windshield-washer fluid con-centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in-terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper maystop moving to protect its motor. If thisoccurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFFposition and remove the snow or ice thatis on and around the wiper arms. In ap-proximately 1 minute, turn the switch onagain to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

Type A (if so equipped)LIC3445

Type B (if so equipped)LIC3035

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


Rotate the end of the lever to operate thewiper at the following speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-eration can be adjusted by turning theknob toward �A (Slower) or �B (Faster).Also, the intermittent operation speedvaries in accordance with the vehiclespeed. (For example, when the vehiclespeed is high, the intermittent opera-tion speed will be faster.)

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-eration

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed op-eration

Rotate the lever the opposite direction �4to have one sweep operation (MIST) of thewiper.

Press the button on the end of the lever �5to operate the washer. The wiper will alsooperate several times.

NOTE:

The Speed Dependent feature may bedisabled. For additional information, re-fer to “Vehicle information display” inthis section.

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPERSYSTEM (if so equipped)

CAUTION∙ Do not touch the rain sensor and

around it when the wiper switch is inthe AUTO position and the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. The wip-ers may operate unexpectedly andcause an injury or may damage awiper.

∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-tended for use during rain. If theswitch is left in the AUTO position, thewipers may operate unexpectedlywhen dirt, fingerprints, oil film or in-sects are stuck on or around the sen-sor. The wipers may also operatewhen exhaust gas or moisture affectthe rain sensor.

∙ When the windshield glass is coatedwith water repellent, the speed of therain-sensing auto wipers may behigher even though the amount of therainfall is small.

∙ Be sure to turn off the rain-sensingauto wiper system when you use a carwash.

∙ The rain-sensing auto wipers may notoperate if rain does not hit the rainsensor even if it is raining.

∙ Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades isrecommended for proper operationof the rain-sensing auto wiper sys-tem. For additional information, referto “Windshield wiper blades” in the“Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

LIC3446


The rain-sensing auto wiper system canautomatically turn on the wipers and ad-just the wiper speed depending on therainfall and the vehicle speed by using therain sensor located on the upper part ofthe windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,rotate the lever to the AUTO position �1 .The wiper will sweep once while the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be ad-justed by turning the knob toward the front�B (High) or toward the rear �A (Low).

– High — High sensitive operation

– Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper systemoff, rotate the lever to the OFF position, orrotate the lever to the LO or HI position.

NOTE:

The Rain Sensor feature may be dis-abled. For additional information, referto “Vehicle information display” in thissection.

To defrost the rear window glass and/oroutside mirrors, start the engine and pushthe rear window/outside mirror defrosterswitch on. The indicator light on the switchwill illuminate. Push the switch again toturn the defroster off.

The defroster automatically turns off afterapproximately 15 minutes.



REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDEMIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if soequipped)


NOTE:

If the rear power window (if so equipped)is open while the defroster switch is on,the rear window defroster will automati-cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors(if so equipped) will remain on. The rearwindow defroster will automatically turnon when the rear power window is fullyclosed if the switch is on.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCHLighting

�1 Rotate the switch to the position,and the front parking, tail, license plate,map lights (if so equipped), and instru-ment panel lights will come on.

�2 Rotate the switch to the position,and the headlights will come on. Allother lights, except the map lights (if soequipped), will remain on.



HEADLIGHT SWITCH


CAUTIONUse the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)The autolight system allows the headlightsto be set so they turn on and off automati-cally. The autolight system can:

∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,tail, license plate and instrument panellights automatically when it is dark.

∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.

∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of timeafter you place the ignition switch in theOFF position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff can beadjusted. For additional information, re-fer to “Vehicle information display” inthis section.To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTOposition �1 .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-sition.

3. The autolight system automaticallyturns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position and a door is opened and leftopen, the headlights remain on for a periodof time. If another door is opened while theheadlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn theswitch to the OFF, , or position.

LIC3380


Be sure you do not put anything on topof the autolight sensor �1 located on thetop side of the instrument panel. The au-tolight sensor controls the autolight; if itis covered, the autolight sensor reacts asif it is dark out and the headlights willilluminate. If this occurs while parkedwith the engine off and the ignitionswitch placed in the ON position, yourvehicle’s battery could become dis-charged.

Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, en-sure the low beams are on using theheadlight control switch, then push thelever forward. The high beam lightscome on and the blue indicatorlight illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to return to the lowbeam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashesthe headlight high beams on and off.The low beams need not be engagedfor this function.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition while the headlight switch is inthe or position, the headlightswill turn off after a period of time.After the headlights automatically turn offwith the headlight switch in theor position, the headlights will illumi-nate again if the headlight switch is movedto the OFF position and then turned tothe or position.

CAUTIONEven though the battery saver featureautomatically turns off the headlightsafter a period of time, you should turnthe headlight switch to the OFF positionwhen the engine is not running to avoiddischarging the vehicle battery.

LIC3487 LIC3060


Manual headlight aiming control(if so equipped)Depending on the number of occupants inthe vehicle and the load it is carrying, theheadlight axis may be higher than desired.If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, theheadlights may directly hit the rearviewmirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-shield of the oncoming vehicle. The lightaxis can be lowered with the operation ofthe switch.

The larger the number designated on theswitch, the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on aflat road, select position 0.

Select the switch position by referring tothe following sample.

Vehicle Load SwitchPosition

Driver only or Driver/frontpassenger 0

Driver/front seat passenger/rear seat passengers 1

Driver/front seat passenger/rear seat passengers/cargo

or driver/cargo/no trailer2

Fully loaded/no trailer 3

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)The lights in the fog light area automati-cally illuminate at 100% intensity when theengine is started and the parking brakereleased. The Daytime Running Lights(DRL) operate with the headlight switch inthe OFF position.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.

The DRL illuminate when the parking brakeis released. The DRL remain on while theengine is running.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlightswitch on for interior controls and switchesto illuminate, as those remain off while theswitch is in the OFF position.

WARNINGWhen the DRL system is active, taillights on your vehicle are not on. It isnecessary at dusk to turn on your head-lights. Failure to do so could cause anaccident injuring yourself and others.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS(DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if soequipped)The LED portion of the headlights auto-matically illuminates at 100% intensitywhen the engine is started and the parkingbrake released. The LED Daytime RunningLights (LED DRL) operate with the headlightswitch in the OFF position. When you turnthe headlight switch to the positionfor full illumination, the LED lights switchfrom LED DRL to the park function.

LIC2230


If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-nate. The LED DRL illuminate when theparking brake is released. The LED DRL re-main on while the engine is running.It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlightswitch ON for interior controls andswitches to illuminate, as those remain offwhile the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNINGWhen the LED DRL system is active, taillights on your vehicle are not on. It isnecessary at dusk to turn on your head-lights. Failure to do so could cause anaccident injuring yourself and others. INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROLPress the “+” button to increase the bright-ness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” button to decrease the bright-ness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCHTurn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn iscompleted, the turn signal cancels au-tomatically.

Lane change signal

�2 Move the lever up or down until theturn signal begins to flash, but the leverdoes not latch, to signal a lane change.Hold the lever until the lane change iscompleted.

LIC3176 LIC3061


Move the lever up or down until theturn signal begins to flash, but the leverdoes not latch, and release the lever.The turn signal will automatically flashthree times.

Choose the appropriate method to signala lane change based on road and trafficconditions.

NOTE:

The 3 flash pass turn indicator may bedisabled. For additional information, re-fer to “Vehicle information display” inthis section.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlightswitch to the position, then push thefog light switch �1 on.To turn the fog lights on with the headlightswitch in the AUTO position (if so equipped),the headlights must be on, then push thefog light switch on.

To turn the fog lights off, push the fog lightswitch again.

The headlights must be on and the lowbeams selected for the fog lights to oper-ate. The fog lights automatically turn offwhen the high beam headlights are se-lected.

To sound the horn, push near the horn iconon the steering wheel.

WARNINGDo not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury.

LIC2197 LIC2051

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) HORN


To turn on the cargo lamp and the underrail bed lamps (if so equipped) push theswitch down to the ON position. The tail-gate lights (if so equipped) will also illumi-nate when the cargo lamp switch is in theON position.

CAUTIONDo not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

WARNINGDo not use or allow occupants to usethe climate controlled seats if you or theoccupants cannot monitor seat tem-peratures or have an inability to feelpain in those body parts in contact withthe seat. Use of the climate controlledseats by such people could result in se-rious injury.

CAUTION∙ The battery could run down if the cli-

mate control seat is operated whilethe engine is not running.

∙ Do not use the climate control seat forextended periods or when no one isusing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar objects. This may result indamage to the climate controlledseat.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat shouldbe removed immediately with a drycloth.

∙ The climate controlled seat has an airfilter. Do not operate the climate con-trolled seat without an air filter. Thismay result in damage to the system.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or anysimilar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or theclimate controlled seat does not oper-ate, turn the switch off and have thesystem checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

LIC0616

CARGO LAMP SWITCH CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATSWITCHES (if so equipped)


The climate controlled seat warms up orcools down the front seat by blowing warmor cool air from under the surface of theseat. The climate control switch is locatedon the center console.

The climate controlled seat can be oper-ated as follows:

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob �A to the heatside �1 or the cool side �2 . The indica-tor light �B on the control knob will illu-minate.

3. Adjust the desired amount of air usingthe control knob. The climate con-trolled seat blower remains on lowspeed for approximately 60 secondsafter turning the switch on or selectingthe desired temperature.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmedor cooled, or before you leave the ve-hicle, be sure to turn the control knobto the Off (center) position. The indica-tor light �B on the control knob goes offwith the switch in the off (center) posi-tion.

To check the air filter for the climate con-trolled seat, it is recommended that youcontact a NISSAN dealer.

WARNINGDo not use or allow occupants to usethe seat heater if you or the occupantscannot monitor elevated seat tempera-tures or have an inability to feel pain inbody parts that contact the seat. Use ofthe seat heater by such people couldresult in serious injury.

CAUTION∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-ing the seat.


∙ Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result in dam-age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.


SIC4334

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if soequipped)


∙ If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.


2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,as desired, depending on the tempera-ture. The indicator light in the switchwill illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-stat, automatically turning the heateron and off. The indicator light will re-main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn theswitch off.

WARNINGDo not use or allow occupants to usethe seat heater if you or the occupantscannot monitor elevated seat tempera-tures or have an inability to feel pain inbody parts that contact the seat. Use ofthe seat heater by such people couldresult in serious injury.

CAUTION∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine isnot running.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-tended periods or when no one is us-ing the seat.


∙ Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result in dam-age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.

LIC3037

HEATED REAR SEAT SWITCHES (if soequipped)



∙ If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The rear seats are warmed by built-in heat-ers. The switches are located on the rear ofthe front center console and can be oper-ated independently of each other.


2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,as desired. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-stat, automatically turning the heateron and off. The indicator light will re-main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn theswitch off.

LIC3037


The heated steering wheel system is de-signed to operate only when the surfacetemperature of the steering wheel is below68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch towarm the steering wheel after the enginestarts. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steeringwheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system willheat the steering wheel and cycle off andon to maintain a temperature above 68°F(20°C). The indicator light will remain on aslong as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heatedsteering wheel system off manually. Theindicator light will go off. The switch will turnoff automatically 30 minutes after activa-tion, once this happens the switch will needto be pressed again to restart the cycle.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when theswitch is turned on, the system will notheat the steering wheel. This is not amalfunction.

The warning systems switch is used to turnon and off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)system that is activated using the settingsmenu on the vehicle information display.

When the warning systems switch isturned off, the indicator �1 on the switch isoff. The indicator will also be off if the warn-ing system is deactivated using the set-tings menu.

The BSW system will turn on the BSW/RCTAindicator light, located next to the outsidemirrors, if the radar detects a vehicle in thedetection zone. If the turn signal is acti-vated in the direction of the detected ve-hicle, a chime sounds twice and the

LIC3476 LSD2208

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (ifso equipped)

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if soequipped)


BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Blind SpotWarning (BSW)” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDCsystem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDCOFF switch. The indicator will comeon.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn on the system. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3344

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH


WARNING∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehiclespeed when driving on steep downhillgrades. Always drive carefully whenusing the hill descent control systemand decelerate the vehicle speed bydepressing the brake pedal if neces-sary. Be especially careful when driv-ing on frozen, muddy or extremelysteep downhill roads. Failure to con-trol vehicle speed may result in a lossof control of the vehicle and possibleserious injury or death.

∙ The hill descent control may not con-trol the vehicle speed on a hill underall load or road conditions. Always beprepared to depress the brake pedalto control vehicle speed. Failure to doso may result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

CAUTIONWhen the hill descent control systemoperates continuously for a long time,the temperature of the brake pads mayincrease and the hill descent controlsystem may be temporarily disabled(the indicator light will blink). If the indi-cator light does not come on continu-ously after blinking, stop using thesystem.

The hill descent control system is designedto reduce driver workload when goingdown steep hills. The hill descent controlsystem helps to control vehicle speed sothe driver can concentrate on steering thevehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

∙ activate the 4H or 4LO switch,

∙ the transmission shift lever must be inforward or reverse gear,

∙ the hill descent control system switchmust be ON.

The vehicle speed must be kept below15 mph (25 km/h).

The hill descent control indicator light willcome on when the system is activated.Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while thehill descent control system applies thebrakes to control vehicle speed.

You may hear a noise from under the hoodor feel a vibration from the actuator when itis operating. This is normal and indicatesthe hill descent control system is workingproperly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-pressed while the hill descent control sys-tem is on, the system will stop operatingtemporarily. As soon as the accelerator orbrake pedal is released, the hill descentcontrol system begins to function again ifthe hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control indicator lightblinks if the switch is on and all conditionsfor system activation are not met or if thesystem becomes disengaged for any rea-son.

LIC3447

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (ifso equipped)


To turn off the hill descent control system,push the switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-scent control system ON indicator light” inthis section and “Hill descent control sys-tem” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

The E-Lock system can help provide addedtraction if the vehicle is stuck or becomingstuck.

To activate the E-Lock system:

∙ the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO po-sition (4-wheel drive vehicles),

∙ the vehicle must be stopped or movingat 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and

∙ the E-Lock system switch must beturned ON.

When the E-Lock system switch is turnedON, the indicator light will flash until thesystem engages. However, if all operationconditions listed above are not met or thesystem becomes disengaged, the indica-tor light will continue to flash.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) systemis disabled and the ABS light illuminateswhen the E-Lock system is on.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-tem” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual for further explanation andsystem limitations.

WARNING∙ Never leave the E-Lock system ON

when driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehiclemay result in the rear wheels slippingand result in an accident and personalinjury. After using the E-Lock systemto free the vehicle, turn the systemOFF.

LIC3157

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEMSWITCH (if so equipped)


∙ Use the E-lock system only in anemergency when it is not possible tofree a stuck vehicle even using 4LO.Never use the E-Lock system on a slip-pery road surface such as snow or icesurface. Using the E-Lock systemwhen driving in these road conditionsmay cause unexpected movement ofthe vehicle during engine braking, ac-celerating or turning, which may re-sult in an accident and serious per-sonal injury.

∙ Observe the above warnings. Other-wise, loss of normal steering controlmay result. This may result in an acci-dent and serious personal injury.

CAUTION∙ After using the E-Lock system, or dur-

ing normal driving, turn the switchOFF to prevent possible damage todrivetrain components from ex-tended use.

∙ When the E-Lock system is in opera-tion, turning the vehicle becomes dif-ficult. This can be dangerous, espe-cially at high speeds. Doing so coulddamage drivetrain components.

∙ Do not operate the E-Lock systemwhen the vehicle is turning or whenone side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,the drivetrain components could bedamaged.

∙ The E-Lock system operates onlywhen the engine is running.

∙ In 4H mode, the E-Lock system doesnot operate when the E-Lock systemswitch is turned to the ON position.(The E-Lock system indicator light willflash.)

∙ Avoid quick starts while the E-Locksystem is in operation. Otherwise thedrivetrain components could bedamaged.

∙ Observe the above cautions. Other-wise, loss of normal steering mayresult.

To use the outlets for devices that require120v power, place the ignition in the ONposition and push the power inverterswitch.

The 400W or 150W on the switch will illumi-nate according to the mode selected. Onlythe 150W is available when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position and thevehicle is being driven. For additional infor-mation, refer to “120v outlets” in this sectionregarding using devices that require thepower inverter switch activated.

LIC2075

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if soequipped)


CAUTION∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

∙ Do not attempt to use this whiledriving.

∙ Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory, doingso could significantly drain the bat-tery of your vehicle.

The Front and rear sonar system OFFswitch on the instrument panel allows thedriver to turn the Front and rear sonar sys-tem, Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if soequipped), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) system on and off. To turn the sys-tems on and off, the ignition switch mustbe in the ON position.

The indicator light on the switch will illumi-nate when the systems are turned on.

If the indicator light flashes when the Frontand rear sonar system, MOD (if soequipped), or RCTA systems are not turnedoff, it may indicate a malfunction in one ormore of these systems.

The Front and rear sonar system, MOD (if soequipped), or RCTA systems will be turnedon automatically under the following con-ditions:

∙ When the ignition switch is switchedfrom the OFF position to the ON posi-tion.

∙ When the shift lever is shifted into the R(Reverse) position.

∙ When the vehicle speed increases to6 mph (10 km/h) and decreases.

The automatic turning on function can beturned on and off for these systems in thevehicle information display. For additionalinformation, refer to “Settings” in the “In-strument and controls” section of thismanual.

For additional information, refer to “Frontand rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual, or the “Mov-ing Object Detection (MOD)” in the “Monitor,climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-tion systems” section of this manual.

LIC3596

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEMOFF SWITCH (if so equipped)


Tow mode should be used when pulling aheavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driv-ing the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will notcause any damage. However, fueleconomy may be reduced, and thetransmission/engine driving characteris-tics may feel unusual.

Push the tow mode switch to activate towmode. The TOW indicator light illuminateswhen tow mode is selected. Push the towmode switch again to turn tow mode off.

Tow mode is automatically canceled whenthe ignition switch is placed in the OFF po-sition.

For additional information, refer to “Towmode” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

The E-call (SOS) system button is used incombination with a NissanConnect® Ser-vices subscription to call for assistance incase of an emergency.

Pushing the button will (with a paid subscrip-tion) reach a Response Specialist that willprovide assistance based on the situationdescribed by the vehicle’s occupant. For ad-ditional information, or to enroll your vehicle,refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect or call855–426–6628.

LIC3381 LIC3376

TOW MODE SWITCH E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if soequipped)


The TBCU on the instrument panel allowsthe driver to adjust the braking force ap-plied to the trailer brakes.

For additional information, refer to “Towinga trailer” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

The Rear Door Alert system functions un-der certain conditions to indicate theremay be an object or passenger in the rearseat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting thevehicle.

The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis-abled. The driver can enable the systemusing the vehicle information display. Foradditional information, refer to “Vehicle in-formation display warnings and indicators”in this section.

When the system is enabled:

∙ The system is activated when a reardoor is opened and closed approxi-mately 10 minutes before the vehicle isstarted. When the vehicle is started andthe system is activated, a visual mes-sage appears in the vehicle informationdisplay. For additional information, referto “Rear Door Alert is activated” in thissection.

∙ If a rear door is opened and closed butthe vehicle is not started within approxi-mately 10 minutes, the system will notbe activated. A rear door must beopened and closed and the car startedwithin 10 minutes for the system to ac-tivate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is acti-vated and a driver exits the vehicle afterarriving at a destination:

∙ When the driver puts the vehicle in the P(Park) position, a message appears inthe vehicle information display for adriver to “Dismiss Message” or “DisableAlert” if desired.

∙ With the system enabled, when thedriver exits the vehicle, an audible alert(horn sound) will occur unless a reardoor is opened and closed within ashort time to deactivate the alert.

∙ If the doors are locked before the alert isdeactivated by opening a rear door, thehorn will sound.

∙ If the audible horn alert occurs, a mes-sage will also appear in the vehicle in-formation display that states, “CheckRear Seat for All Articles”.

WARNING• If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, noaudible alert will be provided regard-less of rear door open/close status.

LIC3382

TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER UNIT(TBCU) (if so equipped)

REAR DOOR ALERT (if so equipped)


• There may be times when there is anobject or passenger in the rear seat(s)but the audible alert does not sound.For example, this may occur if the en-gine is turned off and then on again in ashort period of time during a trip, or ifrear seat passengers enter or exit thevehicle during a trip.

• The system does not directly detectobjects or passengers in the rearseat(s). Instead, it can detect when arear door is opened and closed, indicat-ing that there may be something in therear seat(s).

NOTE:

There may be times when the hornsounds but there are no objects or pas-sengers in the rear seat(s).

For additional information, refer to “RearDoor Alert is activated” in this section.

12V OUTLETSThe power outlets are for powering electri-cal accessories such as cellular tele-phones.

The power outlets located on the instru-ment panel, inside the center armrest (if soequipped), and on the back of the centerconsole (if so equipped) are powered onlywhen the ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

Instrument panelLIC4057

Inside center console (if so equipped)LIC3385

POWER OUTLETS


CAUTION∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-signed for use with a cigarette lighterunit. Do not use any other power out-let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for additional information.

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the enginerunning to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when theair conditioner, headlights, or rearwindow defroster (if so equipped) ison.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tem-perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

Rear center console (if so equipped)LIC3784

In truck box (if so equipped)LIC0617


120V OUTLETS (if so equipped)Before Drive (idling) (Park) When shifting out of Park When shifting back to

(idling) (Park)Switch Reset

Options What is plugged IN Indicator InverterStatus

Indicator InverterStatus



Nothing plugged but switch ison

150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOTNECESSARY

NOTNECESSARY

Device<150W 150 and 400 ON 150 ON 150 and 400 ON NOTNECESSARY

NOTNECESSARY

150W>device<400W 150 and 400 ON OFF OFF ON ON 150 and 400 ONDevice>400W 150 and 400 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF** OFF**

** OFF means that the inverter system cannot be reset until a device that is within the specified range of operation is plugged in. Therefore, the switch indicatorsand inverter would remain OFF. There may be a very short period of time where the switch indicators are on, but once the inverter reaches its peak saturationpoint (temp and power level). it will shut off both the inverter and the switch indicators.

Center console (if so equipped)LIC3384


Do not use the outlet located in the truckbox with accessories that exceed 120 volt.Do not use double adapters or more thanone electrical accessory. When the dualwall bed liner is installed (if so equipped),the power outlet is still accessible throughthe access door in the bed liner.

CAUTION∙ Operation of the 120 volt system with

the ignition in the ON position and theengine not running (idle) will drain thebattery charge. This could lead to adead battery or no start condition.

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

∙ Use power outlets with the enginerunning to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

∙ Do not use double adaptors or morethan one electrical accessory.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when theair conditioner, headlights or rear win-dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tem-perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

The extended storage switch is used whenshipping the vehicle. It is located in the fusepanel inside the glove box. To reach it, openthe glove box �1 on the instrument panel,then open the fuse panel cover �2 .

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, ensure the extended storage switch isON by pushing it fully in place, as shown.

LIC3502

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH


FRONT-DOOR POCKETSPulled positionLIC3266

Pushed positionLIC3268 LIC3397

STORAGE


REAR-DOOR POCKETS (if soequipped)

CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if soequipped)

SEATBACK POCKETS (if soequipped)The seatback pocket(s) may be located onthe back of the driver’s and/or passenger’sseat, there may be one or two pocketsequipped. The pockets can be used tostore maps.

LIC3213 LIC2392 LIC0575


WARNINGTo ensure proper operation of the pas-senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, please observe the followingitems:

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rearseat to push or pull on the seatbackpocket or head restraint/headrest.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, headrestraint/headrest or in the seatbackpocket.

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE (if soequipped)To access the storage bin, lift the benchseat toward the rear of the vehicle, then liftthe cover the same direction. The covermay be locked �1 if so equipped.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the tray under theseat, cargo in the trays should not ex-ceed 20 lbs. (9.08kg).

To adjust the divider �1 , pull it straight upand reposition it to the desired location,sliding it straight down.

Both sides of the storage bin, under therear seat on the driver’s and passenger’ssides, operate similarly. They can be ac-cessed simultaneously or independently ofeach other.

Further, to create a flat floor space for stor-age, rather than access the storage bin, liftthe bench seat as before, then lift the tab�2 and rotate the bin cover toward thefront of the vehicle. Use the tab as a leg tosupport the cover as the new floor space.

Rear seat (driver’s side shown)LIC3407 LIC3408


Cargo can be secured to the extendedfloor with bungee cords. Secure the bun-gee cords to the loops in the extendedfloor.

CAUTION∙ To avoid damaging the extended

floor, the weight secured should notexceed 247 lbs. (112 kg).

∙ To avoid damaging the bungee hookloops, do not exceed 35 lbs. (16 kg) offorce to any given loop.

CAUTION∙ To avoid damaging the extended

floor, the leg of the extended floormust be perpendicular to the floor be-fore any weight is applied.

∙ To avoid damaging the extendedfloor, ensure that the under-seat stor-age area is completely stowed beforelowering the rear seat bottom.

CONSOLE BOX STORAGE TRAYS (ifso equipped)

LIC4098 LIC3406


GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use the master key to lock or unlock theglove box lock. The valet key cannot beused to lock or unlock the glove box lock.

WARNINGKeep glove box lid closed while drivingto help prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)

WARNINGThe center console box should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

LIC3386 LIC3399 LIC3400


CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if soequipped)To access the center armrest storage area,lower the center armrest and lift the lid.

CAUTIONThe center armrest storage should notbe used while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.

LIC0621


UNDER FRONT SEAT STORAGE BIN(if so equipped)To access the storage bin, lift the center ofthe front bench seat toward the front of thevehicle.

CAUTION∙ To avoid damaging the tray under the

seat, cargo in the tray should not ex-ceed 20 lbs. (9.08 kg).

∙ The cushion storage bin should not beused while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSESSTORAGE (if so equipped)To open the sunglasses holder, push andrelease.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in theholder.

WARNINGKeep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to avoid obstructing thedriver’s view and to help prevent anaccident.

Bench seat (center)LIC3437 LIC3387


CAUTION∙ Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

WARNINGAvoid abrupt starting and brakingwhen the cup holder is being used toprevent spilling the drink. If the liquid ishot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTIONUse only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Front — Type A (if so equipped)LIC3401

Front — Type B (if so equipped)LIC3512


Armrest (if so equipped)LIC0622

2nd row (rear of front console)(if so equipped)

LIC34022nd row (door armrest) (if so equipped)

LIC3724


CAUTION∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-uid containers.

2nd row bench (if so equipped)LIC0556

Front bottle holderLIC3396

Rear bottle holder (if so equipped)LIC3707


GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)The grocery hooks allow for standard sizeplastic grocery bags to hang side by side.

To access the grocery hooks, fold up therear bench seat. For additional information,refer to “Folding the rear bench seat up” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section of thismanual.

CAUTIONDo not apply a total load of more than18 lbs. (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

BED LINER STORAGE BINS (if soequipped)To open the bed liner storage bins on thetop of the wheel wells, unlock the bin andlift the lid toward the inside of the truck bed.

To close, replace the lid and lock the bin.

To open the bed liner storage bins on thetail gate end of the bed liner, lift the tabaway from the truck bed, pull the lid up andaway from the truck.

LIC3389 LIC3449 LIC3450


CARGO HOOKS (if so equipped)When securing items using cargo hooks,located on the rear door pillars, do not ap-ply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to asingle hook.

The cargo hooks that are located on thefloor should have loads less than 110 lbs.(490 N) to a single hook.

The cargo hooks can be used to securecargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from slidingor shifting. Do not place cargo higherthan the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-cure cargo.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremely dangerousto ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-hicle. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and seat belts.

∙ The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Secure anyitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killed in acollision if the top tether strap isdamaged.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

C-CHANNEL CARGO HOOKS (if soequipped)The C-Channel cargo hooks, located on theback panel, can be used to secure cargowith ropes or other types of straps.

When securing items using C-Channelcargo hooks, located on the back panel, donot apply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N)to a single hook.

LIC3709 LIC3710




∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-cure cargo.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremely dangerousto ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-hicle. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.


∙ The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Secure anyitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killed in acollision if the top tether strap isdamaged.


POWER WINDOWS

WARNING∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehiclewhile it is in motion and before closingthe windows. Use the window lockswitch to prevent unexpected use ofthe power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do not leavechildren, people who require the as-sistance of others or pets unattendedin your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-perature inside a closed vehicle on awarm day can quickly become highenough to cause a significant risk ofinjury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition switch is placed in the ON position orfor a period of time after the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position. If the driver’sor passenger’s door is opened during thisperiod of time, the power to the windows iscanceled.

1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side automatic

window switch4. Right rear passenger window

switch (if so equipped)5. Left rear passenger window switch

(if so equipped)6. Driver side automatic window

switch

WIC1124

WINDOWS


Driver’s side power windowswitchThe driver’s side control panel is equippedwith switches to open or close the frontand rear (if so equipped) passenger win-dows.

To open a window, push the switch andhold it down. To close a window, pull theswitch and hold it up. To stop the openingor closing function at any time, simply re-lease the switch.

Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operatesonly the corresponding passenger’s win-dow. To open the window, push the switchand hold it down �1 . To close the window,pull the switch up �2 .

Rear power window switch (if soequipped)The rear power window switches open orclose only the corresponding windows. Toopen the window, push the switch and holdit down �1 . To close the window, pull theswitch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock switch is depressed,only the driver’s side window can beopened or closed. Push it again to cancelthe window lock function.

WIC1125 WIC0261


Automatic operationTo fully open a window equipped with au-tomatic operation, push the windowswitch down to the second detent and re-lease it; it need not be held. The windowautomatically opens all the way. To stopthe window, lift the switch up while the win-dow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with au-tomatic operation, pull the switch up to thesecond detent and release it; it need not beheld. To stop the window, push the switchdown while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be acti-vated when a window is closed by auto-matic operation.

Depending on the environment or driv-ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-tion may be activated if an impact orload similar to something being caughtin the window occurs.

WARNINGThere are some small distances imme-diately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., in-side the vehicle before closing thewindow.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re-placed, or jump started, the power windowauto-reverse function may not operateproperly. Have the power window auto-reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in a window equipped with auto-matic operation as it is closing, the windowwill be immediately lowered.

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH (ifso equipped)

WARNING∙ You must ensure all occupants and

objects are free of the rear windowarea prior to and during operation.Failure to do so may result in injuryand/or damage to the rear windowsystem.

∙ The rear window is not designed tocarry long items through it.

LIC0410 LIC3448


∙ Do not place objects through theopened rear window. Do not use therear window as a cargo area pass-through. This may result in damage tothe rear window system, or personalinjury.

WARNING∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of thevehicle and or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do not leavechildren, people who require the as-sistance of others or pets unattendedin your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-perature inside a closed vehicle on awarm day can quickly become highenough to cause a significant risk ofinjury or death to people and pets.

To open the rear power window, push inand hold the switch.

To close the rear power window, pull outand hold the switch.

To stop the opening or closing function atany time, simply release the switch.

NOTE:

If the rear power window is opened whilethe defroster switch is on, the rear win-dow defroster (if so equipped) will auto-matically shut off. The heated outsidemirrors (if so equipped) will remain on.The rear window defroster will auto-matically turn on when the rear powerwindow is fully closed if the switch is on.

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if soequipped)

WARNING∙ You must ensure all occupants and

objects are free of the rear windowarea prior to and during operation.Failure to do so may result in injuryand/or damage to the rear windowsystem.

∙ The rear window is not designed tocarry long items through it.

LIC3488


∙ Do not place objects through theopened rear window. Do not use therear window as a cargo area pass-through. This may result in damage tothe rear window system, or personalinjury.

Squeeze the handles of the lever �1 , thenslide the window open �2 .

The interior light has a three-positionswitch and operates regardless of ignitionswitch position.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 ,the interior lights illuminate, regardless ofdoor position. The lights will go off after aperiod of time unless the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

When the switch is in the DOOR or normaloperation position �2 , the interior lights,puddle lights (if so equipped), and cargolight will stay on for a period of time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, akey or the power door lock switch whileall doors are closed and the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and thenclosed while the key is removed fromthe ignition switch.

∙ The key (if so equipped) is removedfrom the ignition switch while all doorsare closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer isactivated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a key, or the power door lock switch.

∙ The ignition switch is turned ON.

When the switch is in the OFF position �3 ,the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-less of door position. The puddle lights (if soequipped) and cargo light come on whenany front or rear passenger door is opened.

The lights will turn off automatically after aperiod of time while doors are open to pre-vent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

LIC0792

INTERIOR LIGHTS



CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)The console light will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be ad-justed with the illumination brightnesscontrol.

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)To turn the map lights on, push theswitches. To turn them off, push theswitches again.


LIC3405 LIC0790


PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)To turn the rear personal lights on, push theswitch. To turn them off, push the switchagain.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

∙ Will operate most radio frequency de-vices such as garage doors, gates,home and office lighting, entry doorlocks and security systems.

∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If thevehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-connected, HomeLink® will retain allprogramming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-ceiver is programmed, retain the originaltransmitter for future programming pro-cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. For additional infor-mation, refer to “ProgrammingHomeLink®” in this section.

WARNING∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standardsbecame effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). Agarage door opener which cannot de-tect an object in the path of a closinggarage door and then automaticallystop and reverse, does not meet cur-rent federal safety standards. Using agarage door opener without thesefeatures increases the risk of seriousinjury or death.

∙ During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that peopleor objects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

Rear personal lightsLIC0790

HOMELINK® UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)


∙ Your vehicle’s engine should beturned off while programming theHomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Donot breathe exhaust gases; they con-tain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-gerous. It can cause unconsciousnessor death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-tion when programming HomeLink®. It isalso recommended that a new batterybe placed in the hand-held transmitterof the device being programmed toHomeLink® for quicker programmingand accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away fromthe HomeLink® surface, keeping theHomeLink® indicator light �1 in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneouslypress and hold the desired HomeLink®button and hand-held transmitter but-ton. DO NOT release until theHomeLink® indicator light �1 flashesslowly and then rapidly. When the indi-cator light flashes rapidly, both buttonsmay be released. (The rapid flashingindicates successful programming.)

LIC2365 LIC2366


NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replaceStep 2 with the cycling procedure notedin “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-dian customers and gate openers” in thissection.

3. Press and hold the programmedHomeLink® button and observe the in-dicator light.

∙ If the indicator light �1 issolid/continuous, programming iscomplete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® buttonis pressed and released.

∙ If the indicator light �1 blinks rapidlyfor 2 seconds and then turns to asolid/continuous light, continuewith Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-vice. A second person may make thefollowing steps easier. Use a ladder orother device. Do not stand on yourvehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garagedoor opener motor in the garage, lo-cate the “learn” or “smart” button (thename and color of the button may varyby manufacturer but it is usually lo-cated near where the hanging an-

tenna wire is attached to the unit). Ifthere is difficulty locating the button,reference the garage door opener’smanual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly pressand hold the trained HomeLink® but-ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeatthe “press/hold/release” sequence upto three times to complete the trainingprocess. HomeLink® should now acti-vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming yourHomeLink® buttons, refer to theHomeLink® web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATEOPENERSCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission –which may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal duringtraining. Similar to this Canadian law, some

U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-culties training a gate operator or garagedoor opener by using the “Training” proce-dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage dooropener, etc., unplug the device duringthe “cycling” process to prevent possibledamage to the garage door opener com-ponents.

1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in thissection.

2. Using both hands, simultaneouslypress and hold the desired HomeLink®button and the hand-held transmitterbutton. During training, your hand-heldtransmitter may automatically stoptransmitting. Continue to press andhold the desired HomeLink® buttonwhile you press and re-press (“cycle”)your hand-held transmitter every2 seconds until the frequency signalhas been learned. The HomeLink® indi-cator light will flash slowly and then


rapidly after several seconds uponsuccessful training. DO NOT release un-til the HomeLink® indicator light flashesslowly and then rapidly. When the indi-cator light flashes rapidly, both buttonsmay be released. The rapid flashing in-dicates successful training.Proceed with “ProgrammingHomeLink®” step 3 to complete.If the device was unplugged during theprogramming procedure, rememberto plug it back in when programming iscompleted.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, afterit is programmed, can be used to activatethe programmed device. To operate, sim-ply press and release the appropriate pro-grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-ceiver button. The amber indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being trans-mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-ter of the device may also be used at anytime.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLink® does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:

∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-teries with new batteries.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter withits battery area facing away from theHomeLink® surface.

∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®and hand-held transmitter buttonswithout interruption.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 -3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.If HomeLink® is not programmed withinthat time, try holding the transmitter inanother position – keeping the indicatorlight in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONThe following procedure clears the pro-grammed information from both buttons.Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-ever, individual buttons can be repro-grammed. For additional information, referto “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outerHomeLink® buttons until the indicatorlight begins to flash in approximately10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programmingmode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with “ProgrammingHomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINK® BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®button. DO NOT release the button.


2. The indicator light will begin to flashafter 20 seconds. Without releasing theHomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-ton has now been reprogrammed. Thenew device can be activated by pressingthe HomeLink® button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affectany other programmed HomeLink® but-tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should changethe codes of any non-rolling code devicethat has been programmed intoHomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual ofeach device or call the manufacturer ordealer of those devices for additional infor-mation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-versal Transceiver with your new trans-mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

NOTE:


For Canada:

This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear doors (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-9Child safety rear door lock(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-24Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Conditions the Remote Engine Start willnot work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Diesel fuel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Gasoline fuel engines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Automatic operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-31

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Card holder (driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Manual anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Truck box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-43Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

1. Master key2. Transponder chip3. Key number plateA key number plate is supplied with yourkeys. Record the key number and keep it ina safe place (such as your wallet), not in thevehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forduplicates by using the key number.NISSAN does not record key numbers so itis very important to keep track of your keynumber plate.

A key number is only necessary when youhave lost all your keys. If you still have a key,it can be duplicated without knowing thekey number.

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)2. Mechanical key3. Key number plate (one plate)NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®Your vehicle can only be driven with theIntelligent Keys which are registered toyour vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-ponents and NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem components.

LPD2130Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2842

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can beregistered and used with one vehicle. Thenew keys must be registered prior to theuse with the Intelligent Key system andNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of yourvehicle. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service. Since theregistration process requires erasing allmemory in the Intelligent Key componentswhen registering new keys, be sure to takeall Intelligent Keys that you have to theNISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with yourkeys. Record the key number and keep it ina safe place (such as your wallet), not in thevehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forduplicates by using the key number.NISSAN does not record key numbers so itis very important to keep track of your keynumber plate.

A key number is only necessary when youhave lost all keys and do not have one toduplicate from. If you still have a key, it canbe duplicated without knowing the keynumber.

CAUTIONListed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the Intelli-gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Keysharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-gent Key.

∙ Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completelydry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area wheretemperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key witha key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipmentand personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of thatIntelligent Key from the vehicle. This mayprevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-mation regarding the erasing procedure, itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer.

Type B (if so equipped)LPD2844

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Mechanical keyThe Intelligent Key contains the mechani-cal key.

To remove the mechanical key, release thelock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert itinto the Intelligent Key until the lock knobreturns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlockthe driver’s door or tailgate.

CAUTIONAlways carry the mechanical key in-stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors”or “Tailgate” in this section.

Valet hand-offWhen you have to leave a key with a valet,give them the Intelligent Key itself, keep themechanical key and master key with you toprotect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from beingopened during valet hand-off, follow theprocedures below:

1. Remove the mechanical key from theIntelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechani-cal key or master key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key without themechanical key to the valet, keep themechanical and master key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Stor-age” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion of this manual and “Tailgate” in thissection.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYSYou can only drive your vehicle using theIntelligent Keys which are registered to theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-ponents in your vehicle.

The mechanical key can be used for all thelocks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-isting key can be duplicated without know-ing the key number. As many as fourNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keyscan be used with one vehicle. You shouldbring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem keys that you have to the NISSANdealer for registration. This is because theregistration process will erase the memoryof all key codes previously registered intothe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-ter the registration process, these compo-nents will only recognize keys coded intothe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemduring registration. Any key that is not

SPA1951


given to the dealer at the time of registra-tion will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

CAUTIONDo not allow the immobilizer systemkey, which contains an electrical tran-sponder, to come into contact with wa-ter or salt water. This could affect sys-tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors cannot beopened using the inside or outside doorhandles. The doors must be unlocked toopen the doors.

WARNING∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from unintention-ally opening the doors, and will helpkeep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do not leavechildren, people who require the as-sistance of others or pets unattendedin your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-perature inside a closed vehicle on awarm day can quickly become highenough to cause a significant risk ofinjury or death to people and pets.

DOORS


LOCKING WITH KEYTo lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key asshown.

ManualTo lock a door, turn the key toward the frontof the vehicle �1 . To unlock, turn the keytoward the rear of the vehicle �2 .

Power (if so equipped)The power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front �1 of thevehicle locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear�2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. Fromthat position, returning the key to neutral�3 (where the key can only be removed andinserted) and turning it toward the rearagain within 5 seconds unlocks all doors�4 .

Opening and closing windows (ifso equipped)The driver’s door key operation allows youto open and close windows equipped withautomatic operation at the same time.

∙ To open the windows, turn the driver’sdoor key toward the rear of the vehiclefor longer than 1 second.

∙ To close the windows, turn the driver’sdoor key toward the front of the vehiclefor longer than 1 second.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is re-leased.

Driver’s sideWPD0311 WPD0444


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOBTo lock the door without the key, move theinside lock to the lock position �1 , thenclose the door.

To unlock the door without the key, movethe inside lock knob to the unlock position�2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors and the tailgate lock (ifso equipped) without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the lock position �1 . When lockingthe door this way, be certain not to leavethe key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors and the tailgate lock(if so equipped) without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passen-ger’s side) to the unlock position �2 .

Lockout protectionWith the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle, ifall doors are locked, then closed, a chimewill sound after the last door is closed andall doors will unlock automatically.

These functions help to prevent the Intelli-gent Key from being accidentally lockedinside the vehicle.

Inside lockLPD2092 WPD0381


REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.

2. From the outside, pull the door handle�A toward you.

3. Open the door to the desired position.LPD0278 LPD2591 LPD2592


CAUTIONBe careful when opening and exitingthe driver’s side rear door if the fuel-filler door is open. This may cause dam-age to the driver’s side rear door or fuel-filler door if you open fully and theymake contact.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if soequipped)

∙ All doors lock automatically when thevehicle speed reaches 15 mph(24 km/h).

NOTE:

The automatic door unlock function canbe changed (if so equipped) using the“Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle informa-tion display. For additional informationrefer to “Vehicle information display” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionof this manual.

LPD2593 LPD2594


CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(if so equipped)Child safety locks help prevent the reardoors from being opened accidentally, es-pecially when small children are in the ve-hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located onthe edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position �2 ,the door can be opened from the outsideor the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position �1 ,the door can be opened only from theoutside.



∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and com-munication systems. Do not operatethe Intelligent Key while on an air-plane. Make sure the buttons are notoperated unintentionally when theunit is stored for a flight.

∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system can operate allthe door locks using the remote controlfunction or pushing the request switch (ifso equipped) on the vehicle without takingthe key out from a pocket or purse. Theoperating environment and/or conditionsmay affect the Intelligent Key system op-eration.

Be sure to read the following before usingthe Intelligent Key system.

LPD2433

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®


CAUTIONBe sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is capable of receivingand transmitting radio waves. The Intelli-gent Key system transmits weak radiowaves from various distances. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with theoperation of the Intelligent Key system un-der the following operating conditions:

∙ When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted,such as a TV tower, power station andbroadcasting station.

∙ When in possession of wireless equip-ment, such as a cellular telephone,transceiver, or a CB radio.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contactwith or covered by metallic materials.

∙ When any type of radio wave remotecontrol is used nearby.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed nearan electric appliance such as a personalcomputer.

∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-ing meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-tions before using the Intelligent Key func-tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de-pending on the operating conditions, thebattery’s life is approximately two years. Ifthe battery is discharged, replace it with anew one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, ayellow indicator illuminates with the mes-sage “Warning, Key ID Incorrect” in the ve-hicle information display. When the Intelli-gent Key battery is low, the NISSANIntelligent Key® warning light (if soequipped) will blink green. For additionalinformation, refer to “Vehicle informationdisplay warnings and indicators” in the “In-struments and controls” section of thismanual.

Since the Intelligent Key is capable of re-ceiving radio waves, if the key is left nearequipment which transmits strong radiowaves, such as signals from a TV and per-sonal computer, the battery life may be-come shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Batteryreplacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can beregistered and used with one vehicle. Forinformation about the purchase and use ofadditional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.


OPERATING RANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only beused when the Intelligent Key is within thespecified operating range from the requestswitch �1 (if so equipped).

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged or strong radio waves are presentnear the operating location, the IntelligentKey operating range becomes narrower,and the Intelligent Key may not functionproperly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in(80 cm) from each request switch �1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the doorglass or handle, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-ating range, it is possible for anyone, evensomeone who does not carry the Intelli-gent Key, to push the request switch tolock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

∙ Do not push the door handle requestswitch (if so equipped) with the Intelli-gent Key held in your hand as illustrated.The close distance to the door handlewill cause the Intelligent Key system tohave difficulty recognizing that the In-telligent Key is outside the vehicle.

∙ After locking with the door handle re-quest switch (if so equipped), verify thedoors are securely locked by testingthem.

LPD2338 LPD2554


∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-ing left inside the vehicle, make sure youcarry the Intelligent Key with you andthen lock the doors.

∙ Do not pull the door handle beforepushing the door handle requestswitch (if so equipped). The door will beunlocked but will not open. Release thedoor handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors withouttaking the Intelligent Key out of your pocketor bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,you can lock or unlock all doors by pushingthe door handle request switch (if soequipped) within the range of operation.

Locking doors1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, place the ignition switch in theLOCK position and make sure you carrythe Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close the driver’s door and press thedriver’s door request switch OR closeall doors and press any door requestswitch while carrying the Intelligent Keywith you.

3. Push the door handle request switch (ifso equipped) while carrying the Intelli-gent Key with you.

LPD2382 LPD2918


4. All doors and the tailgate lock (if soequipped) will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice,the outside chirp sounds twice, and thefront and tail lights may turn on for10 seconds.

NOTE:

∙ Request switches (if so equipped) forall doors can be deactivated when the“I-Key Door Lock” setting is switchedto OFF in the Vehicle Settings of thevehicle information display. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicleinformation display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of thismanual.

∙ Doors and the tailgate lock (if soequipped) will lock with the doorhandle request switch �1 while theignition switch is not in the LOCK po-sition.

∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while the driv-er’s door is open. However, doors lockwith the mechanical key even if anydoor is open.

∙ Doors and the tailgate lock (if soequipped) do not lock with the doorhandle request switch if the Intelli-gent Key is inside the vehicle. A beepwill sound to warn you. However,when an Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION∙ After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch (if so equipped), makesure that the doors have been se-curely locked by operating the doorhandles.

∙ When locking the doors using the re-quest switch (if so equipped), makesure to have the Intelligent Key in yourpossession before operating the re-quest switch (if so equipped) to pre-vent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

∙ The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from beingaccidentally locked in the vehicle, lockoutprotection is equipped with the IntelligentKey system.

When any door is open, the doors arelocked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors areclosed; a chime will sound and the lock willautomatically unlock.

LPD2579


NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is op-erating the request switch to lock thedoor. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,pocket or your other hand.

CAUTIONThe lockout protection may not func-tion under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch (ifso equipped).

3. The door will unlock and the hazardindicator lights flash once, the outsidechirp sounds once, and the front andtail lights may turn on for 30 seconds.

4. Push the door handle request switchagain within one minute.

5. The outside chirp will sound once andthe remaining doors and tailgate lock(if so equipped) will unlock.

NOTE:

∙ If “Selective Unlock” is turned OFF inthe Vehicle Settings, all doors andtailgate lock (if so equipped) will un-lock upon the first request switch �1press.

∙ The request switch can be deacti-vated when the “I-Key Door Lock” isswitched to OFF in the Vehicle Set-tings of the vehicle information dis-play. For additional information, referto “Vehicle information display” in the“Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

LPD2918 LPD2579


If a door handle is pulled while unlockingthe doors, that door may not be unlocked.Returning the door handle to its originalposition will unlock the door. If the doordoes not unlock after returning the doorhandle, push the door handle requestswitch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically un-less one of the following operations is per-formed within one minute after pushingthe request switch.

∙ Opening any door.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a pe-riod of time when a door is unlocked andthe room light switch is in the DOOR posi-tion.

The interior light can be turned off withoutwaiting by performing one of the followingoperations:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-sition.

∙ Locking the doors and tailgate lock (if soequipped) with the remote control.

∙ Switching the room light switch to theOFF position.

∙ Switching the “Auto Room Lamp” to theOFF position in Vehicle Settings of thevehicle information display. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-formation display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this manual.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can op-erate all door locks using the remote key-less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-mote keyless function can operate at adistance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-hicle. The operating distance dependsupon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will notfunction under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

∙ When the doors are open or not closedsecurely.

CAUTIONWhen locking the doors using the Intel-ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.


Locking doors1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors and tailgate.

3. Press the button on the Intelli-gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice,the horn beeps once, and the front andtail lights may turn on for 10 seconds.

5. All doors and tailgate lock (if soequipped) will be locked.

CAUTIONAfter locking the doors using the Intel-ligent Key, be sure that the doors havebeen securely locked by operating thedoor handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the IntelligentKey.

2. The driver’s door will unlock, the hazardindicator light flash once, and the frontand tail lights may turn on for 30 sec-onds.

3. Press the button again withinone minute.

4. The remaining doors and tailgate lock(if so equipped) will unlock.

LPD2906 LPD2833


NOTE:

If Selective Unlock is turned off in theVehicle Settings, all doors and tailgatelock (if so equipped) will unlock upon thefirst press of the Intelligent Key re-mote. For additional information, refer to“Vehicle information display” in the “In-struments and controls” section of thismanual.All doors and tailgate lock (if so equipped)will be locked automatically unless one ofthe following operations is performedwithin one minute after pressing thebutton:

∙ Opening any doors.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.The interior light illuminates for a period oftime when a door is unlocked and theroom light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the following opera-tions:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the IntelligentKey.

∙ Switching the room light switch to theOFF position.

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to theOFF position in Vehicle Settings of thevehicle information display. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-formation display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this manual.

Opening windows (if so equipped)The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-ously open windows equipped with auto-matic operation.

∙ To open the windows, press thebutton on the Intelligent Key for longerthan 3 seconds after all doors are un-locked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.The door windows cannot be closed byusing the Intelligent Key.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the panic alarm tocall attention by pressing and holdingthe button on the Intelligent Key forlonger than 1 second.The panic alarm and headlights will stay onfor a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time, or

∙ Any button is pressed on the IntelligentKey.

WPD0374


∙ The request switch (if so equipped) onthe driver’s door is pushed and the In-telligent Key is in range of the doorhandle.

Trailer light check (if so equipped)This functionality allows the customer toconfirm trailer light operation, without theneed of a second person to press the brakepedal or activate each turn signal light. Thetrailer light check can be performed by theIntelligent Key or through the Vehicle Set-tings in the vehicle information display. Foradditional information, refer to “Vehicle in-formation display” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

To activate the trailer light check functionwith your Intelligent Key, perform the fol-lowing:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the LOCKbutton.

3. Within 2 seconds, press and holdthe LOCK button again for atleast 2 seconds, until the horn beepsonce and the park lights turn on.

The following events will occur:

∙ The left turn signal light on the vehicleand the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.

∙ The right turn signal light on the vehicleand the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.

∙ The brake lights on the vehicle and thetrailer will turn ON for 5 seconds.

LPD2906


NOTE:

If the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion, the park lights will turn off after theevents above occur. If ignition switch isin the ON position, lights will stay on for45 seconds after trailer light check. If thetrailer lights do not work properly, checkthe connections and bulbs. If the vehiclelights do not turn on, check the bulbs. Ifthe trailer light check routine fails tostart, ensure the following vehicle condi-tions:

∙ The vehicle is NOT moving, 0 mph(0 km/h)

∙ Brake switch is NOT depressed

∙ Left or right flasher is OFF

∙ Trailer light check configuration is NOTdisabled and available in the metertowing settings

∙ The hazard switch is NOT turned ON

∙ The shift position is fully in P (Park) posi-tion

∙ Vehicle is within Remote Keyless Entryrange

Answer back horn featureIf desired, the answer back horn featurecan be deactivated using the IntelligentKey. When it is deactivated and theLOCK button is pressed, the hazardindicator lights flash twice. When theUNLOCK button is pressed, neitherthe hazard indicator lights nor the hornoperates.

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn andlight flash feature with the IntelligentKey while the ignition is in the ON posi-tion, the vehicle information displayscreen will show the previous mode. Thevehicle information display screen willshow the current mode after the ignitionswitch has been cycled from the OFF tothe ON position. The vehicle informationdisplay screen can also be used tochange the answer back horn mode. Foradditional information refer to “Vehicleinformation display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section of this manual.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.The hazard indicator lights will flash threetimes to confirm that the answer backhorn feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.The hazard indicator lights will flash onceand the horn will sound once to confirmthat the horn beep feature has been reac-tivated.

LPD2878


Deactivating the horn beep feature doesnot silence the horn if the alarm is trig-gered.

Intelligent Key button operationlightThe light blinks only when you push anybutton on the Intelligent Key. The light illu-mination only signifies that the key fob hastransmitted a signal. You may look and/orlisten to verify that the vehicle has per-formed the intended operation. The num-ber of blinks identifies each registered key(i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) foryour own identification purposes. If thelight does not blink, your battery may betoo weak to communicate to the vehicle. Ifthis occurs, the battery may need to bereplaced. For additional information re-

garding the replacement of a battery, referto “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly by erroneous operation ofthe Intelligent Key or to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen, a chime or chirpsounds from inside and outside the vehicleand a warning is displayed in the instru-ment panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warningis displayed, be sure to check the vehicleand the Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2836


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys thatare programmed for the vehicle. If anotherIntelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-ferently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch tostop the engine

The red “Shift to Park” warning ap-pears on the vehicle information dis-play and the inside warning chimesounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)position.

When opening the driver’s door to getout of the vehicle

The door open warning appears onthe display and the inside warningchime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACCposition.

Place the ignition switch in the ON po-sition or close the driver’s door.

When closing the door after gettingout of the vehicle

The yellow “No Key Detected” warningappears on the vehicle informationdisplay, the outside chime soundsthree times and the inside warningchime sounds for approximately threeseconds.

The Intelligent Key is not detected in-side of the vehicle.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The Rear Door Alert (if so equipped)warning message appears on thedisplay, the horn sounds three timestwice, or a Check Back Seat For All Ar-ticles warning appears on the display.

The Rear Door Alert (if so equipped) isactivated.

Check the back seat for all articles,press the ENTER button to clear theRear Door Alert (if so equipped) warn-ing message.

The red “Shift to Park” warning ap-pears on the vehicle information dis-play and the inside and outsidechimes sound continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC orOFF position and the shift lever is notin the P (Park) position.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.


Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When closing the door with the insidelock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi-mately three seconds and all thedoors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-quest switch or (if so equipped)the button on the IntelligentKey to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-mately three seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch tostart the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicatorappears on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.For additional information, refer to“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

The yellow “Key ID Incorrect” warningappears on the vehicle informationdisplay .

The Intelligent Key is not detected in-side of the vehicle.

Carry the registered Intelligent Keywith you.


The button will be on the NISSAN In-telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-gine Start. This feature allows the engine tostart from outside the vehicle.The following features may be affectedwhen the Remote Engine Start feature isused:

∙ Vehicles with a manual climate controlsystem (if so equipped) will default tothe last used heating or cooling mode.

∙ Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system (if so equipped) will de-fault to either heating or cooling mode.For additional information, refer to “Re-mote Engine Start with Intelligent Cli-mate Control” in the “Monitor, climate,audio, phone and voice recognition sys-tems” section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may re-strict the use of remote starters. For ex-ample, some laws require a person usingRemote Engine Start to have the vehicle inview. Check local regulations for any re-quirements.

Other conditions may affect the function ofthe Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-tional information, refer to “Conditions theRemote Engine Start will not work” in thissection.

Other conditions can affect the perfor-mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.For additional information, refer to “NISSANIntelligent Key®” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE STARTOPERATING RANGE

WARNINGTo help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadvertentdoor lock activation, do not leave chil-dren, people who require the assistanceof others or pets unattended in your ve-hicle. Additionally, the temperature in-side a closed vehicle on a warm day canquickly become high enough to cause asignificant risk of injury or death topeople and pets.

CAUTIONWhen the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged or other strong radio wavesources are present near the operatinglocation, the Intelligent Key operatingrange becomes narrower, and the Intel-ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can onlybe used when the Intelligent Key is withinthe specified operating range from the ve-hicle.

LPD2860

REMOTE ENGINE START (if soequipped)


The Remote Engine Start operating rangeis approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve-hicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLETo use the Remote Engine Start feature tostart the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the button to lock alldoors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and holdthe button until the turn signallights flash and the tail lamps turn on. Ifthe vehicle is not within view press andhold the button for at least 2 sec-onds.

The following events will occur when theengine starts:

∙ The parking lights will turn on and re-main on as long as the engine is run-ning.

∙ The doors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

∙ The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extendthe time for an additional 10 minutes.For additional information, refer to “Ex-tending engine run time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then push thepush-button ignition switch to the ON po-sition before driving. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the“Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIMEThe Remote Engine Start feature can beextended one time by performing thesteps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”in this section. Run time will be calculatedas follows:

∙ The first 10 minute run time will startwhen the Remote Engine Start functionis performed.

∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme-diately when the Remote Engine Startfunction is performed again. For ex-ample, if the engine has been runningfor 5 minutes, and 10 minutes areadded, the engine will run for a total of15 minutes.

∙ Extending engine run time will count to-wards the two Remote Engine Startlimit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,or a single Remote Engine Start with anextension, are allowed between ignitioncycles. The ignition switch must be cycledto the ON position and then back to theOFF position before the Remote EngineStart procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINESTARTTo cancel a Remote Engine Start, performone of the following:

∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicleand press until the parking lightsturn off.

∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

∙ Cycle the ignition switch on and thenoff.

∙ The extended engine run time has ex-pired.

∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.

∙ The engine hood has been opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.


∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entryinto the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is pushed withoutan Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is pushed with anIntelligent Key in the vehicle but thebrake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINESTART WILL NOT WORKThe Remote Engine Start will not operate ifany of the following conditions are present:

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

∙ The hood is not securely closed.

∙ The hazard warning lights are on.

∙ The engine is still running. The enginemust be completely stopped. Wait atleast 6 seconds if the engine goes fromrunning to off. This is not applicablewhen extending engine run time.

∙ The button is not pressed andheld for at least 2 seconds.

∙ The button is not pressed andheld within 5 seconds of pressing thelock button.

∙ The brake is pressed.

∙ The doors are not closed and locked.

∙ The I-Key Indicator Light remains solidin the vehicle information display.

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entryinto the vehicle.

∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a singleRemote Engine Start with an extension,have already been used.

∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).

∙ There is a detected registered key al-ready inside of the vehicle.

∙ The remote start function has beenswitched to the OFF position in VehicleSettings of the vehicle information dis-play. For additional information, refer to“Vehicle information display” in the “In-struments and controls” section of thismanual.

The Remote Engine Start may display awarning or indicator in the vehicle informa-tion display. For additional information, re-fer to “Vehicle information display” in the“Instruments and controls” section of thismanual.


1. Pull the hood lock release handle �1located below the driver side instru-ment panel. The hood will spring upslightly.

2. Push the lever at the front of the hoodto the side �2 as illustrated with yourfingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly andmake sure it locks into place.

WARNING∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause the hoodto fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke comingfrom the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD0244King Cab® models only

LPD2593

HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR



DIESEL FUEL ENGINESFor additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

GASOLINE FUEL ENGINES

WARNING∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seri-ously injured if it is misused or mis-handled. Always stop the engine anddo not smoke or allow open flames orsparks near the vehicle whenrefueling.

King Cab® models onlyLPD2594 LPD2434


∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refuelingmay cause fuel overflow, resulting infuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed forproper operation of the fuel systemand emission control system. An in-correct cap can result in a serious mal-function and possible injury. It couldalso cause the Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyto attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portablefuel containers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you arefilling it.

– Use only approved portable fuelcontainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information,refer to “Fuel recommendation” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning messagewill appear if the fuel-filler cap is notproperly tightened. It may take a fewdriving trips for the message to bedisplayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the Loose FuelCap warning message appears maycause the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-nate. If the light illuminates be-cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after afew driving trips. If the light doesnot turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.


To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-wise to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook�1 while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into thefuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until asingle click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warningThe Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in thevehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after thevehicle has been refueled. It may take a fewdriving trips for the message to be dis-played. To turn off the warning, perform thefollowing:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap aspreviously described as soon as pos-sible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a singleclick is heard.

WARNING∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary forproper steering operation and com-fort. The driver’s air bag inflates withgreat force. If you are unrestrained,leaning forward, sitting sideways orout of position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the air bag if youare up against it when it inflates. Al-ways sit back against the seatbackand as far away as practical from thesteering wheel. Always use the seatbelts.

LPD2435 LPD2652

STEERING WHEEL


MANUAL OPERATION (if soequipped)Tilt and telescopic operationPull the lock lever �1 down:

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down indirection �2 to the desired position.

∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward orbackward in direction �3 to the desiredposition.

Push the lock lever �1 up firmly to lock thesteering wheel in place.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if soequipped)Tilt and telescopic operationTo adjust the steering wheel move theswitch �1 in the following directions:

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down indirection �2 to the desired tilt position.

∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward orbackward in direction �3 to the desiredtelescopic position.

CAUTIONFor vehicles with automatic drive posi-tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele-scoping functions of the steeringwheel, after the vehicle’s battery hasbeen discharged, may prevent thesteering wheel position from beingadjusted.

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-tioner: Both the tilt and telescopic steeringoperation must be reset after the vehicle’sbattery has been discharged in order toprevent the tilt and telescopic operationfrom locking in one position. When the bat-tery has been recharged or replaced, per-form the following:

∙ For tilt operation: Adjust the switch �1so the steering wheel moves to thehighest position �2 that can bereached.

∙ For telescopic operation: Adjust theswitch �1 so the steering wheel movesto the most forward and backward po-sition �3 that can be reached.

Performing these operations resets therange of the steering wheel’s tilt and tele-scopic function.

LPD2597 LPD2580


Entry/Exit function (if soequipped)The automatic drive positioner system (ifso equipped) will make the steering wheelmove up automatically when the driver’sdoor is opened and the ignition switch is inthe LOCK position. This lets the driver getinto and out of the seat more easily. Thesteering wheel moves back into positionwhen the driver’s door is closed and theignition switch is pushed.

For additional information, refer to “Auto-matic drive positioner” in this section.

1. To block glare from the front, swingdown �1 the sun visor.

2. To block glare from the side, removethe sun visor from the center mountand swing the visor to the side �2 .

3. To extend the sun visor, slide �3 in orout as needed.

CAUTION∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its originalposition.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visorforcedly downward.

WPD0344

SUN VISORS


VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sunvisor down and flip open the mirror cover.Some vanity mirrors are illuminated andturn on when the mirror cover is open.

CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)To access the card holder, slide card in thecard holder. Do not view information whileoperating the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEWMIRROR (if so equipped)Use the night position �1 to reduce glarefrom the headlights of vehicles behind youat night.

Use the day position �2 when driving indaylight hours.

WARNINGUse the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear viewclarity.

LPD2583 LPD2436 WPD0126

MIRRORS


AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it au-tomatically dims during night time condi-tions and according to the intensity of theheadlights of the vehicle following you. Theautomatic anti-glare feature is activatedwhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

The indicator light �2 will illuminate whenthe automatic anti-glare feature is operat-ing.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-sors �1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivityof the sensors, resulting in improper op-eration.

Type A (if so equipped)To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,press the O button. The indicator lightwill turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare featureagain, press the | button. The indicatorlight will turn on.

For additional information, refer to the“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the“Instruments and controls” section of thismanual.

Type B (if so equipped)∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light willturn off.

∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressthe button again. The indicatorlight will turn on.

For additional information about the com-pass and compass features �3 , refer to“Compass” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

Type A - Without compass(if so equipped)

LPD0469Type B - With compass (if so equipped)

LPD2419


For additional information, refer to the“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the“Instruments and controls” section of thismanual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer thanthey appear. Be careful when movingto the right. Using only this mirrorcould cause an accident. Use the in-side mirror or glance over your shoul-der to properly judge distances toother objects.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-ing. You could lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

Manual control type (if soequipped)The outside mirrors can be moved in anydirection for a better rear view.

Electric control type (if soequipped)The outside mirror remote control will op-erate only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or ON position.

Rotate the control dial to select the right orleft mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desiredposition by moving the control dial.

Return the control dial to the center (neu-tral) position to prevent accidentally mov-ing the mirror.

LPD2581 LPD2606


Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)

WARNINGObjects viewed in the convex portion ofthe trailer tow mirror are closer thanthey appear. Be careful when changinglanes or turning. Using only the convexmirror could cause an accident. Use theother mirrors or glance over your shoul-der to properly judge distances to otherobjects.

Use the outside mirror remote control toadjust the top portion of the trailer towmirror.

The lower portion of the trailer tow mirrorcan be moved manually in any direction fora better rear view.

Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to ex-tend it to the desired position for bettervisibility while towing a trailer.

WARNINGDo not extend or retract mirrors whiledriving. You may lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

CAUTIONDriving in tight spaces with mirrors ex-tended may cause damage to thevehicle.

LPD2474 LPD0268


Power folding outside mirrors (ifso equipped)

CAUTIONDo not manually fold the power foldingmirrors. Manually folding the mirrorscan damage the mirrors.

Push the switch to open or close the mir-rors.

If one of the mirrors are manually operatedor bumped, the mirror body can becomeloose at the pivot point. To correct elec-tronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors bypushing the “CLOSE” switch until com-pletely closed, then push the “OPEN” switchuntil the mirrors are in the open position.

Manual folding outside mirrors (ifso equipped)Pull the outside mirror toward the door tofold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if soequipped)The reverse tilt-down feature will turn bothoutside mirror surfaces downward to pro-vide better rear visibility close to the vehiclewhen the mirror control switch is in eitherthe L or R position.

LPD0417Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2634


The mirrors automatically return to theiroriginal position when you shift out of R(Reverse).

The outside mirror surfaces will return totheir original position when one of the fol-lowing conditions has occurred:

∙ The shift lever is moved to any positionother than R (Reverse).

∙ The outside mirror control switch is setto the neutral or center position.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is inthe center position, the mirror surfacewill NOT turn downward when the shiftlever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to “Auto-matic drive positioner” in this section.

Automatic anti-glare outsidemirror (if so equipped)The outside mirror will automatically dimduring nighttime conditions to reduce theglare from the headlights of trailing ve-hicles. The automatic anti-glare featureoperates only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be onwhen starting the vehicle. The indicatorlight on the automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror will illuminate when the automaticanti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the anti-glare feature, pressthe button on the rearview mirror.The indicator light will turn off.To turn on the anti-glare feature again,press the button on the rearview mir-ror. The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information on the auto-matic anti-glare rearview mirror, refer to“Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” inthis section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated todefrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-ibility. For additional information, refer to“Rear window and/or outside mirror de-froster switch” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

Type B (if so equipped)LPD0269


TAILGATEOpening the tailgatePull the tailgate handle upward and lowerthe tailgate. The support cables hold thetailgate open.

When closing the tailgate, make sure thelatches are securely locked.

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgatedown, unless equipped with NISSAN’sBed Extender (accessory) or equivalentin the extended position.

For additional information on proper truckbox loading, refer to “Vehicle loading infor-mation” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section of this manual.

WARNING∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat (if soequipped) when it is in the folded po-sition. Use of these areas by passen-gers without proper restraints couldresult in serious injury or death in anaccident or sudden stop.

∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.



LPD2334

TRUCK BOX


Disconnecting the rear cameraBefore removing the tailgate disconnectthe rear camera by performing the follow-ing:

1. Open the tailgate to access the rearcamera connector bracket �1 locatedon the rear sill.

2. Remove the connector bracket �2from the sill by pressing the locking tabinward, in the direction shown, whilepulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness�3 by pressing inward on the lockingtab, in the direction shown, while pullingthe connectors apart. Hold the con-nector firmly to prevent the connectorin the chassis harness from falling intothe sill.

4. Use the supplied chassis plug andbracket and connect them to thechassis wiring harness to avoid con-tamination to the terminals which willlead to malfunction of the rear camera.

5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glovebox and connect it to the tailgate wir-ing harness to avoid contaminationwhich will lead to malfunction of therear camera.

7. Remove the tailgate. For additional in-formation, refer to “Removing the tail-gate” in this section.

LPD2582


Removing the tailgate1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the

rear camera (if so equipped). For addi-tional information, refer to “Disconnect-ing the rear camera” in this section.

2. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION∙ The tailgate is heavy. Two people

should remove or install it. Be carefulnot to drop it during removal.

∙ After releasing the support cables, donot let the tailgate rest on thebumper.

3. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

4. Pull the tailgate out from the left sidehinge.

5. Slide the tailgate out of the right sidehinge.

Installing the tailgate1. Insert the tailgate into the right side

hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angleand insert into the left side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45degree angle and attach the tailgatesupport cables.

4. For vehicles with rear camera: Be surethe tailgate harness is not hanging be-low the tailgate and keep the tailgateopen. For additional information, referto “Connecting the rear camera” in thissection before closing the tailgate.

5. For vehicles without rear camera: Closethe tailgate securely.

LPD0271


Connecting the rear cameraBefore closing the tailgate reconnect therear camera by performing the following:

1. After attaching the rear tailgate to thetruck, keep the tailgate open and checkthat the tailgate harness is not hangingbelow the tailgate.

2. Remove the connector bracket �2from the sill by pressing the locking tabinward, in the direction shown, whilepulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis plug andbracket from the chassis wiring har-

ness �3 . Keep the connector andbracket in a safe place such as theglove box.

4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from thetailgate wiring harness. Keep the tail-gate plug in a safe place such as theglove box.

5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness tothe chassis wiring harness.

6. Securely fix the rear camera connectorbracket �1 to the rear sill.

7. Close the tailgate securely.

Locking the TailgateTo unlock the tailgate, turn the key towardthe passenger side of the vehicle�1 . Tolock, turn the key toward the driver side �2 .

If your vehicle is equipped with an elec-tronic tailgate, you may use the doorhandle request switch (if so equipped) orI-key to lock or unlock the tailgate. For ad-ditional information please refer to “NISSANIntelligent Key® Operation” in the this sec-tion of the manual.

LPD2582


TIE DOWN HOOKSFor your convenience, tie down hooks areplaced at each corner of the truck box.These may be used to help secure cargoloaded into the truck box.

∙ The weight of the cargo load must beevenly distributed over the rear axles.

∙ All cargo should be securely fastenedwith ropes or straps to prevent it fromshifting or sliding within the vehicle.


straps to help prevent it from slidingor shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

The automatic drive positioner system hastwo features:

∙ Memory storage function

∙ Entry/exit function

LPD2393

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if soequipped)


MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTIONTwo positions for the driver’s seat, steeringcolumn, and outside mirrors (if soequipped) can be stored in the automaticdrive positioner memory. Follow these pro-cedures to set the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC po-sition (the vehicle should be stoppedwhile setting the memory).

2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col-umn, and outside mirrors (if soequipped) to the desired positions bymanually operating each adjustingswitch. For additional information, refer

to “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual, and “Steer-ing wheel” and “Outside mirrors” in thissection.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on and stayon for approximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound when thememory is stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in thesame memory switch, the previousmemory position will be overwritten bythe new stored position.

Confirming memory storage∙ Push the SET switch.

∙ If a memory position has been stored inthe switch (1 or 2) then the indicator lightfor the respective switch will stay on forapproximately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a storedmemory positionEach key fob can be linked to a storedmemory position (memory switch 1 or 2)with the following procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storagefunction” section for storing thememory position.

2. The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on. While theindicator light is on for 5 seconds, pressthe button on the key fob. Thehazard lights will flash twice. The indi-cator light of the linked memory switchwill blink and click twice. After the indi-cator light goes off, the key fob is linkedto that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch isin the OFF position, pressing the but-ton on the key fob will move the driver’sseat, steering wheel and outside mirrors tothe linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in thelinked memory switch, then the key fobwill link the new position and overwritesthe previous position.

LPD2302


ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTIONThis system is designed so that the driver’sseat and steering column will automati-cally move when the shift lever is in the P(Park) position. This allows the driver toeasily get in and out of the driver’s seat.

The driver’s seat will slide backward andthe steering column will move up:

∙ When the driver’s door is opened withthe ignition switch in the OFF position.

∙ When the ignition switch is changedfrom ACC to OFF with the driver’s dooropen.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel willreturn to the previous position:

∙ When the ignition switch is changedfrom ACC or ON while the shift lever is inthe P (Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted orcanceled through the vehicle settings inthe vehicle information display by perform-ing the following:

∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON toOFF.

∙ Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON toOFF.

Restarting the entry/exit functionIf the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the stored memory positionswill be lost and some of the functions willbe restricted:

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).

OR

2. Open and close the driver’s door morethan two times with the ignition switchin the OFF position.

The entry/exit function should now workproperly.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe automatic drive positioner system willnot work or will stop operating under thefollowing conditions:

∙ When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph(7 km/h).

∙ When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive posi-tioner is operating.

∙ When the switch for the driver’s seatand steering column is pushed whilethe automatic drive positioner is oper-ating.

∙ When the seat has already been movedto the memorized position.

∙ When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

∙ When the shift lever is moved from P(Park) to any other position.


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Difference between predicted andactual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to park with predicted courselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8How to turn on and off predictedcourse lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-9System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Intelligent Around View Monitor(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Intelligent Around View Monitor systemoperation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Difference between predicted andactual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16How to park with predicted courselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Intelligent Around View Monitor systemlimitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Moving Object Detection (MOD)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-27MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Heater and air conditioner (manual)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43USB/iPod® charging port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) (if so equipped) . . . .4-44

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45Control description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51Remote control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52Remote control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Wireless headphone operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55DVD operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57DVD playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58CD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61CD playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

HDMI/MHL connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62USB/SD card operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Slingplayer® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69Miracast®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72Using the mobile application on yourmobile device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72SmartStream. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85Compliance information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-89

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’sManual that includes the following infor-mation.

∙ NissanConnect® Services (if soequipped)

∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)

∙ Audio system

∙ Apple CarPlayTM

∙ Android AutoTM

∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system

∙ Viewing information

∙ Other settings

∙ Voice recognition

∙ General system information

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’SMANUAL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA buttonLHA4859

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3


structions for proper use of the Rear-View Monitor system could result inserious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a conveniencefeature and is not a substitute forproper backing. Always turn and lookout the windows and check mirrors tobe sure that it is safe to move beforeoperating the vehicle. Always back upslowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in showing large stationaryobjects directly behind the vehicle, tohelp avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-hicle width line should be used as areference only when the vehicle is on alevel paved surface. The distanceviewed on the monitor is for referenceonly and may be different than theactual distance between the vehicleand displayed objects.

CAUTIONDo not scratch the camera lens whencleaning dirt or snow from the front ofthe camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-cally shows a rear view of the vehicle whenthe shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)position. While in R (Reverse), pressing theCAMERA will cycle through guideline op-tions. The radio can still be heard while theRearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-tor system uses a camera located justabove the vehicle’s license plate �1 on thetailgate.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMOPERATIONWith the ignition switch in the ON position,move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA3671


HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESGuiding lines which indicate the vehiclewidth and distances to objects with refer-ence to the vehicle body line �A are dis-played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line �1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line �2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line �3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines �4

Indicate the vehicle width when backingup.

Predicted course lines �5

Indicate the predicted course when back-ing up. The predicted course lines will bedisplayed on the monitor when the shiftlever is in the R (Reverse) position and thesteering wheel is turned. The predictedcourse lines will move depending on howmuch the steering wheel is turned and willnot be displayed while the steering wheel isin the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the widthof the predicted course lines are wider thanthe actual width and course.

Center guide lines �6

Indicates the vehicle’s center to improvetrailer hitching guidance.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTEDAND ACTUAL DISTANCESThe displayed guidelines and their loca-tions on the ground are for approximatereference only. Objects on uphill or downhillsurfaces or projecting objects will be actu-ally located at distances different fromthose displayed in the monitor relative tothe guidelines (refer to illustrations). Whenin doubt, turn around and view the objectsas you are backing up, or park and exit thevehicle to view the positioning of objectsbehind the vehicle.

LHA4980


Backing up on a steep uphillWhen backing up the vehicle up a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown closer than the actualdistance. Note that any object on the hill isfurther than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhillWhen backing up the vehicle down a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown farther than the actualdistance. Note that any object on the hill iscloser than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projectingobjectThe vehicle may seem to nearly clear theobject in the display. However, the vehiclemay hit the object if it projects over theactual backing up course.

LHA4981 LHA4982 LHA4983


Backing up behind a projectingobjectThe position �C is shown farther than theposition �B in the display. However, the po-sition �C is actually at the same distance asthe position �A . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position �Aif the object projects over the actual back-ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTEDCOURSE LINES

WARNING∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course linesmay be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference betweenthe predicted course line and the ac-tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-comes discharged, the predictedcourse lines may be displayed incor-rectly. If this occurs, please performthe following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lockto lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight roadfor more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turnedwith the ignition switch in the ACC po-sition, the predicted course lines maybe displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space issafe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayedon the screen �A when the shift lever ismoved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA4984 LHA4986


3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjustingthe steering wheel so that the pre-dicted course lines �B enter the park-ing space �C .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to makethe vehicle width guide lines �D parallelto the parking space �C while referringto the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the spacecompletely, move the shift lever to theP (Park) position and apply the parkingbrake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the “Display Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settingsof the RearView Monitor while the ve-hicle is moving.

LHA4987

LHA3522


HOW TO TURN ON AND OFFPREDICTED COURSE LINESTo toggle ON and OFF the predicted courselines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” keyto turn the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted courselines or center guide line while in the R (Re-verse) position, press the CAMERA button.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMLIMITATIONS

WARNINGListed below are the system limitationsfor RearView Monitor. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-nate blind spots and may not showevery object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-ner areas of the bumper cannot beviewed on the RearView Monitor be-cause of its monitoring range limita-tion. The system will not show smallobjects below the bumper, and maynot show objects close to the bumperor on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance be-cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor willappear visually opposite compared towhen viewed in the rearview and out-side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.The lines are highly affected by thenumber of occupants, fuel level, ve-hicle position, road conditions androad grade.

∙ Make sure that the tailgate is securelyclosed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled on the tailgate.

∙ When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causingwater condensation on the lens, amalfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it maymalfunction or cause damage result-ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations anddo not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremelyhigh or low, the screen may not clearlydisplay objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects onthe screen. This is due to strong re-flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearViewMonitor may differ somewhat from theactual color of objects.


∙ Objects on the monitor may not beclear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switchingbetween views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on thecamera, RearView Monitor may not dis-play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.Wipe off any wax with a clean clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaningagent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will causediscoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on thecamera �1 , the RearView Monitor may notdisplay objects clearly. Clean the cameraby wiping it with a cloth dampened with adiluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA3671



INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEWMONITOR (if so equipped)



structions for the proper use of theIntelligent Around View Monitor sys-tem could result in serious injury ordeath.

∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor isa convenience feature and is not asubstitute for proper vehicle opera-tion because it has areas where ob-jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-ners of the vehicle in particular, areareas where objects do not alwaysappear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rearviews. Always check your surround-ings to be sure that it is safe to movebefore operating the vehicle. Alwaysoperate the vehicle slowly.

∙ The driver is always responsible forsafety during parking and othermaneuvers.

CAUTIONDo not scratch the camera lens whencleaning dirt or snow from the front ofthe camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-tem is designed as an aid to the driver insituations such as slot parking or parallelparking.

The monitor displays various views of theposition of the vehicle in a split screen for-mat. Not all views are available at all times.

Available views:

∙ Front ViewAn approximately 150–degree view ofthe front of the vehicle.

∙ Rear ViewAn approximately 150–degree view ofthe rear of the vehicle.

∙ Bird’s-Eye ViewThe surrounding views of the vehiclefrom above.

∙ Front-Side ViewThe view around and ahead of the frontpassenger’s side wheel.

∙ Rear-Wide ViewAn approximately 180–degree view ofthe rear of the vehicle.

To display the multiple views, the IntelligentAround View Monitor system uses cam-eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-cle’s outside mirrors and one on the tail-gate �1 .

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEWMONITOR SYSTEM OPERATIONWith the ignition switch in the ON position,move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-sition to operate the Intelligent AroundView Monitor.

LHA3909


When the camera is first activated with thebird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if soequipped) will flash on the screen. This in-dicates that the sonar system (if soequipped) is activated. For additional infor-mation on the front and rear sonar system(if so equipped), refer to “Front and rear so-nar system” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

The screen displayed on the IntelligentAround View Monitor will automatically re-turn to the previous screen 3 minutes afterthe CAMERA button has been pressed withthe shift lever in a position other than the R(Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING∙ The distance guide lines and the ve-

hicle width lines should be used as areference only when the vehicle is on apaved, level surface. The apparentdistance viewed on the monitor maybe different than the actual distancebetween the vehicle and displayedobjects.

∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-eye view as a reference. The lines andthe bird’s-eye view are greatly af-fected by the number of occupants,cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, roadcondition and road grade.

∙ If the tires are replaced with differentsized tires, the predicted course linesand the bird’s-eye view may be dis-played incorrectly.

∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-jects viewed in the monitor are fur-ther than they appear. When drivingthe vehicle down a hill, objects viewedin the monitor are closer than theyappear.

∙ Objects in the rear view will appearvisually opposite compared to whenviewed in the monitor and outsidemirrors.

∙ Use the mirrors or actually look toproperly judge distances to otherobjects.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference betweenthe predicted course lines and the ac-tual course line.

∙ The vehicle width and predictedcourse lines are wider than the actualwidth and course.

∙ The displayed lines will appearslightly off to the right, because therearview camera is not installed in therear center of the vehicle.


Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximatevehicle width and distance to objects withreference to the vehicle body line �A aredisplayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

∙ Red line �1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line �2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line �3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line �4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)(if so equipped)


Indicate the approximate vehicle widthwhen backing up.

Predicted course lines �6

Indicate the predicted course when oper-ating the vehicle. The predicted courselines will be displayed on the monitor whenthe steering wheel is turned. The predictedcourse lines will move depending on howmuch the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel isin the straight-ahead position.



The front view will not be displayed whenthe vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the frontview and the steering wheel turns about90 degrees or less from the straight-ahead position, both the right and leftpredicted course lines �6 are displayed.When the steering wheel turns about 90degrees or more, a line is displayed onlyon the opposite side of the turn.

Front viewSAA1840

Rear viewLHA4988


Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overheadview of the vehicle, which helps confirm thevehicle position and the predicted courseto a parking space.

The vehicle icon �1 shows the position ofthe vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-tance between objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ somewhat from theactual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover�2 are indicated in black.

The non-viewable area �2 is highlighted inyellow for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. It will be shown onlythe first time after the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

WARNING∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,may be misaligned or not displayed atthe seam of the views.

∙ Objects that are above the cameracannot be displayed.

∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may bemisaligned when the camera positionalters.

∙ A line on the ground may be mis-aligned and is not seen as beingstraight at the seam of the views. Themisalignment will increase as the lineproceeds away from the vehicle.

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximatewidth and the front end of the vehicle aredisplayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line �1 shows the frontpart of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line �2 shows the ap-proximate vehicle width including the out-side mirrors.

The extensions �3 of both the front �1 andside �2 lines are shown with a green dottedline.

LHA4394 LHA2652


Rear-wide view

The rear-wide view shows a wider area onthe entire screen and allows the checkingof the blind corners on right and left sides.The rear-wide view displays an approxi-mately 180-degree area. The predictedcourse lines are not displayed when usingthe rear-wide view.

Distance guide lines

Indicates distances from the vehicle body:

∙ Red line �1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line �2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line �3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)


Indicate the vehicle width when backingup.



DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTEDAND ACTUAL DISTANCESThe displayed guidelines and their loca-tions on the ground are for approximatereference only. Objects on uphill or downhillsurfaces or projecting objects will be actu-ally located at distances different fromthose displayed in the monitor relative tothe guidelines (refer to illustrations). Whenin doubt, turn around and view the objectsas you are backing up, or park and exit thevehicle to view the positioning of objectsbehind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphillWhen backing up the vehicle up a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown closer than the actualdistance. Note that any object on the hill isfurther than it appears on the monitor.

Rear-wide viewLHA4989

LHA4981


Backing up on a steep downhillWhen backing up the vehicle down a hill,the distance guide lines and the vehiclewidth guide lines are shown farther thanthe actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on themonitor.

Backing up near a projectingobjectThe vehicle may seem to nearly clear theobject in the display. However, the vehiclemay hit the object if it projects over theactual backing up course.

LHA4982 LHA4983


Backing up behind a projectingobjectThe position �C is shown farther than theposition �B in the display. However, the po-sition �C is actually at the same distance asthe position �A . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position �Aif the object projects over the actual back-ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTEDCOURSE LINES

WARNING∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course linesmay be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference betweenthe predicted course line and the ac-tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-comes discharged, the predictedcourse lines may be displayed incor-rectly. If this occurs, please performthe following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lockto lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight roadfor more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turnedwith the ignition switch in the ACC po-sition, the predicted course lines maybe displayed incorrectly.

∙ There is the possibility that when thevehicle mirrors are extended for tow-ing, the mirrors may be shown in thebird’s-eye view and front side view.

LHA4984


1. Visually check that the parking space issafe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayedon the screen �A when the shift lever ismoved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjustingthe steering wheel so that the pre-dicted course lines �B enter the park-ing space �C .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to makethe vehicle width guide lines �D parallel

to the parking space �C while referringto the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the spacecompletely, move the shift lever to theP (Park) position and apply the parkingbrake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAYWith the ignition switch in the ON position,press the CAMERA button or move the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) position to operatethe Intelligent Around View Monitor.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-plays different split screen views depend-ing on the position of the shift lever. Pressthe CAMERA button to switch between theavailable views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,the available views are:

∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen

∙ Rear-wide view

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive)position, the available views are:

∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Front view/front-side view split screen

LHA3910 LHA3911


The display will switch from the IntelligentAround View Monitor screen when:

∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) positionand the vehicle speed increases aboveapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

∙ A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the “Display Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settingsof the Intelligent Around View Monitorwhile the vehicle is moving. Make surethe parking brake is firmly applied.

LHA3522


INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEWMONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNINGListed below are the system limitationsfor Intelligent Around View Monitor.Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-dance with these system limitationscould result in serious injury or death.

∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around ViewMonitor with the outside mirrors inthe stored position, and make surethat the tailgate is securely closedwhen operating the vehicle using theIntelligent Around View Monitor.

∙ The apparent distance between ob-jects viewed on the Intelligent AroundView Monitor differs from the actualdistance.

∙ The cameras are installed on the frontgrille, the outside mirrors and abovethe rear license plate. Do not put any-thing on the vehicle that covers thecameras.

∙ When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the cameras. Otherwise, wa-ter may enter the camera unit causingwater condensation on the lens, amalfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the cameras. They areprecision instruments. Doing so couldcause a malfunction or cause damageresulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the systemwill not show objects and the system doesnot warn of moving objects. When in thefront or rear view display, an object belowthe bumper or on the ground may not beviewed �1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tallobject near the seam �2 of the cameraviewing areas will not appear in the moni-tor.

The following are operating limitations anddo not represent a system malfunction:

∙ There may be a delay when switchingbetween views.

∙ When the temperature is extremelyhigh or low, the screen may not displayobjects clearly.

∙ When strong light directly shines on thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-cent light.

LHA3807


∙ The colors of objects on the IntelligentAround View Monitor may differ some-what from the actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around ViewMonitor may not be clear and the colorof the object may differ in a dark envi-ronment.

∙ There may be differences in sharpnessbetween each camera view of thebird’s-eye view.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth thathas been dampened with a diluted mildcleaning agent, then wipe with a drycloth. System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-ligent Around View Monitor. This will nothinder normal driving operation but it isrecommended that the system be in-spected. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on thescreen, the camera image may be receiv-ing temporary electronic disturbancesfrom surrounding devices. This will not hin-der normal driving operation but it is rec-ommended that the system be inspectedif it occurs frequently. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

LHA3591 LHA3592


SYSTEM MAINTENANCE



∙ Do not damage the cameras as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any ofthe cameras �1 , the Intelligent Around ViewMonitor may not display objects clearly.Clean the camera by wiping with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaningagent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3909



MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)(if so equipped)



structions for proper use of the Mov-ing Object Detection system could re-sult in serious injury or death.

∙ The MOD system is not a substitutefor proper vehicle operation and is notdesigned to prevent contact with ob-jects surrounding the vehicle. Whenmaneuvering, always use the outsidemirrors and rearview mirror and turnand check the surroundings to ensureit is safe to maneuver.

∙ The system is deactivated at speedsabove 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-vated at lower speeds.

∙ The MOD system is not designed todetect surrounding stationaryobjects.

The MOD system can inform the driver ofmoving objects near the vehicle whenbacking out of garages, maneuvering inparking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objectsby using image processing technology onthe image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATIONThe MOD system will turn on automaticallyunder the following conditions:

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)position.

∙ When vehicle speed decreases belowapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and thecamera screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the followingconditions when the camera view is dis-played:

∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N(Neutral) position and the vehicle isstopped, the MOD system detects mov-ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. TheMOD system will not operate if the out-side mirrors are moving in or out, in thestowed position, or if either front door isopened.

Front and bird’s-eye viewsLHA4190


∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)position and the vehicle speed is belowapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h), theMOD system detects moving objects inthe front view.

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)position and the vehicle speed is belowapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h), theMOD system detects moving objects inthe rear view. The MOD system will notoperate if the tailgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect movingobjects in the front-side view. The MODicon is not displayed on the screen when inthis view.

When the MOD system detects moving ob-jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heardand a yellow frame will be displayed on theview where the objects are detected. Whilethe MOD system continues to detect mov-ing objects, the yellow frame continues tobe displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) isbeeping, the MOD system will not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame �1 isdisplayed on each camera image (front,rear, right, left) depending on where mov-ing objects are detected.

The yellow frame �2 is displayed on eachview in the front view and rear view modes.

Rear and bird’s-eye viewsLHA4863

Rear and front-side viewsLHA4990

Rear-wide viewLHA4991


A blue MOD icon �3 is displayed in the viewwhere the MOD system is operative. A grayMOD icon is displayed in the view where theMOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MODicon �3 is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if soequipped)Some vehicles include the option to allowthe MOD system to be turned on or off.

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Press the or button on thesteering wheel and select “Settings” inthe vehicle information display.

2. Using the buttons, select “DriverAssistance” and press the OK button.

3. Select “Parking Aids”.

4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” us-ing the OK button.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNINGListed below are the system limitationsfor MOD. Failure to operate the vehiclein accordance with these system limita-tions could result in serious injury ordeath.

∙ Do not use the MOD system whentowing a trailer. The system may notfunction properly.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audiosystem volume or open vehicle win-dow) will interfere with the chimesound, and it may not be heard.

∙ The MOD system performance will belimited according to environmentalconditions and surrounding objectssuch as:

– When there is low contrast be-tween background and the movingobjects.

– When there is a blinking source oflight.

– When strong light such as anothervehicle’s headlight or sunlight ispresent.

– When camera orientation is not inits usual position, such as when amirror is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops orsnow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the movingobjects in the display is notchanged.

∙ The MOD system might detect flowingwater droplets on the camera lens,white smoke from the muffler, mov-ing shadows, etc.

∙ The MOD system may not functionproperly depending on the speed, di-rection, distance or shape of the mov-ing objects.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to theparts where the camera is installed,leaving it misaligned or bent, thesensing zone may be altered and theMOD system may not detect objectsproperly.

∙ When the temperature is extremelyhigh or low, the screen may not dis-play objects clearly. This is not amalfunction.


NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orangeif one of the following has occurred:

∙ When the system is malfunctioning.

∙ When the component temperaturereaches a high level (icon will blink).

∙ When the Rear View camera has de-tected a blockage (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminateorange, have the MOD system checked. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE



∙ Do not damage the camera as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any ofthe cameras �1 , the MOD system may notoperate properly. Clean the camera by wip-ing with a cloth dampened with a dilutedmild cleaning agent and then wiping with adry cloth.

LHA3909


Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s andpassenger’s side vents �1 , center vents �2 ,and rear passengers’ vents (if so equipped)�3 by moving the vent slide and/or ventassemblies.

WARNING∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine isrunning.

∙ Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-hicle can build up in the air condi-tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-senger compartment through thevents.

LHA3772

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (if so equipped)


∙ When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS1. Fan speed control dial / system

OFF dial / A/C (air conditioning) button2. Air flow control buttons3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C

button

4. Air recirculation button

5. Outside mirror (if so equipped) de-froster switch

6. Front windshield defrost button

LHA4127


Fan speed control dialThe fan speed control dial turns thefan on and off and controls fan speed.

Fan speed control dial — OFF modeSetting the fan speed control dial to theoff position will turn off the fan and the airrecirculation indicator light will turn on. To getfresh air in fan off mode, press the airrecirculation button to turn off the indicator.In fan off mode, the mode buttons can beselected to change the air vent distribution (ifthe air recirculation mode is off).

Air flow control buttonsThe air flow control buttons allow you toselect the air flow outlets.MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from footoutlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you toadjust the temperature of the outlet air. Tolower the temperature, turn the dial to theleft. To increase the temperature, turn thedial to the right.

Air recirculation buttonON position (Indicator light on)Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON positionwhen:

∙ driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from enteringpassenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using theair conditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off)If outside air is desired in off mode, pressthe recirculation button until the indicatorturns off.

If fogging occurs, press the frontwindshield defrost button.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position andpress the button to turn on the airconditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,press the button again.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

Outside mirror defroster (if soequipped)For additional information, refer to “Rearwindow and/or outside mirror (if soequipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATIONHeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air tothe foot outlets. Some air also flows fromthe defrost outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-tion for normal heating. The indicatorlight on the button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.


3. Turn the fan speed control dial tothe desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial tothe desired position between themiddle and the hot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the sideand center vents.

1. Press the button to the off posi-tion. The indicator light on thebutton will go off.



4. Turn the temperature control dial tothe desired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrostoutlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button.



∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from thewindows, turn the fan speed con-trol dial to the highest setting and thetemperature control to the full HOT po-sition.

∙ When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on ifthe outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passen-ger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance. Under this con-dition, the indicator light on the A/C but-ton indicator will not turn on if the userhad selected the A/C off. Turning off theair conditioning via the A/C button is notallowed In this mode. If the A/C buttonindicator was on when entering thismode, and the A/C button is selected inthis mode, the A/C button indicator willturn off, but the A/C compressor will stillbe automatically enabled. The recircula-tion button indicator will not illuminate ifthe button is pressed in this mode.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air tothe side and center vents and to the frontand rear floor outlets.

1. Press the button to the off posi-tion. The indicator light onthe button will go off.




Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogsthe windshield.





∙ When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on ifthe outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). If the air flow controlbutton is selected for more than 1 min-ute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fanspeed control dial is turned to OFF, thevehicle is shut off, or the A/C button isused to turn off the compressor even ifthe air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position.This dehumidifies the air which helpsdefog the windshield. Under this condi-tion, the indicator light on the A/C but-ton indicator will not turn on if the userhad selected A/C off. Turning off the airconditioning via the A/C button is notallowed in this mode. If the A/C buttonindicator was on when entering thismode, and the A/C button is selected inthis mode, the A/C compressor will stillbe automatically enabled. It is recom-mended that mode be turned offfor maximum defogging. The recircula-tion button can be selected in thismode to block outside odors. However,for maximum defogging in this mode, itis recommended to turn recirculationoff when possible.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield.This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position, andpress the button to activate the airconditioner. When the air conditioner is on,cooling and dehumidifying functions areadded to the heater operation.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidifythe air.

1. Press the button to the off posi-tion.



4. Press the button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial tothe desired position between themiddle and the cold position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outsidetemperature is high, press thebutton to the on position. Be sure toreturn the to the off position fornormal cooling. The indicator light onthe button will go off. You mayalso select MAX A/C for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidifythe air.

1. Press the button to the off posi-tion. The indicator light on thebutton will go off.



4. Press the button on.


Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windowsand dehumidify the air.

1. Press the front defroster button.



When the or positions are se-lected, the air conditioner automaticallyturns on if the outside temperature is morethan 36°F (2°C). The air conditioning systemwill continue to operate until the fanspeed control dial is turned to OFF, the airconditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle isshut off. If a position other than thefront defrost air flow button is selected, theA/C compressor will not turn off even if theuser had selected A/C off prior to enteringdefrost. In front defrost or footdefrost the indicator light on the A/C but-ton will not turn on if the user had selectedA/C off. Turning off the air conditioning viathe A/C button is not allowed in this mode.If the A/C button indicator was on whenentering this mode, and the A/C button isselected in this mode, the A/C button indi-cator will turn off, but the A/C compressorwill still be automatically enabled. This de-humidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to fur-ther improve the defogging performance.


Operating tips∙ Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or3 minutes with the windows open tovent hot air from the passenger com-partment. Then, close the windows.This allows the air conditioner to coolthe interior more quickly.

∙ The air conditioning system shouldbe operated for approximately10 minutes at least once a month.This helps prevent damage to thesystem due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe ventilators in hot, humid conditionsas the air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.

∙ If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. For additionalinformation, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button anddial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICKheating, cooling or defrosting. For addi-tional information on heating and cooling,refer to “Heater and air conditioner(manual)” in this section. The air recircula-tion ( ) button should always be inthe OFF position for heating and defrost-ing.


LHA4486 LHA4487


LHA4488 LHA4489


LHA4490


1. Front defroster button2. Temperature control dial (driver’s

side)/AUTO button3. Display screen4. Temperature control dial (passen-

ger’s side)/DUAL button

5. Fresh air intake button6. Air recirculation button7. A/C (air conditioner) button8. MODE (manual air flow control)

button9. Fan speed control buttons

10. ON-OFF button11. Rear window

and/or outside mirror (if soequipped) defroster switch

WARNING∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine isrunning.

∙ Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

LHA3575

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)


NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-hicle can build up in the air condi-tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-senger compartment through thevents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATIONCooling or heating (auto)This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically worksto keep a constant temperature. Air flowdistribution and fan speed are also con-trolled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.Driver and passenger temperaturescan be set independently. Press theDUAL button to activate dual climatecontrol functions. Turn the passenger’s

side temperature control dial to the leftor right to set the desired passenger’stemperature.

∙ Adjust the temperature dial to about75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution, fan speedand A/C on/off are also controlled auto-matically. The A/C button indicator willremain in the last user setting. Underthis condition, the indicator light on theA/C button indicator will not turn on ifthe user had not selected the A/C but-ton off. Turning off the air conditioningvia the A/C button is not allowed in thismode. If the A/C button indicator wason when entering this mode, and theA/C button is selected in this mode, theA/C button indicator will turn off, but theA/C compressor will still be automati-cally enabled. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Air flow control” in this sec-tion.To turn off the compressor, turn off automode, then turn the A/C on then offuntil the A/C button indicator is not lit.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe vents in hot, humid conditions asthe air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF)The air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial tothe left or the right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passengertemperatures can be set indepen-dently. Press the DUAL button to acti-vate dual climate control functions.Turn the passenger’s side temperaturecontrol dial to the left or right to set thedesired passenger’s temperature.

∙ The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwise,the system may not work properly.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.


Dehumidified defrosting ordefogging

1. Press the defroster control but-ton to turn the system on. The indicatorlight in the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outsideof the windows, press the fanspeed control button to the maximumposition.

∙ As soon as possible after the wind-shield is clean, press the AUTO button toreturn to the auto mode.

∙ When the control is activated, theair conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperaturesabove 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies theair which helps defog the windshield.Under this condition, the indicator lighton the A/C button indicator will not turnon if the user had selected A/C off priorto entering this mode. Turning off the aircondition via the A/C button is not al-lowed in this mode. If the A/C buttonindicator was on when entering thismode, and the A/C button is selected inthis mode, the A/C compressor will stillbe automatically enabled. The air recir-culation mode automatically turns off,allowing outside air to be drawn into thepassenger compartment to further im-prove the defogging performance.

Remote Engine Start withIntelligent Climate Control (if soequipped)Vehicles equipped with automatic climatecontrols and Remote Engine Start functionmay go into automatic heating or coolingmode when Remote Engine Start is acti-vated depending on outside and cabintemperatures. During this period, the cli-mate control display and buttons will beinoperable until the ignition switch is

turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-ing mode, the rear window defroster andheated steering wheel (if so equipped) maybe activated automatically.

Voice Recognition logic (if soequipped)When the climate control system is on, thefront and rear (if so equipped) fan speedsmay be automatically lowered so thatcommands are more easily recognized.Fan speed can be adjusted using the fanspeed decrease and increasebuttons, if desired.

MANUAL OPERATIONFan speed controlPress the fan speed control buttonsto manually control the fan speed.Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.

When adjusting the manual fan from automode, the outlet direction (floor,floor/defrost, vent, bi-level) will still auto-matically change. To fix the outlet to amanual mode, select the desired air flowlocation using the MODE button.


Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you toadjust the temperature of the outlet air. Tolower the temperature, turn the dial to theleft. To increase the temperature, turn thedial to the right. Temperature can be ad-justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side.

Air recirculationPress the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehiclewhen:

∙ driving on a dusty road

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from enteringpassenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using theair conditioning system.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be acti-vated when the air conditioner is inmode.

When the outside temperature exceeds70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system maydefault to air recirculation mode automati-cally to reduce overall power consumption.To exit air recirculation mode, select thefresh air intake button to enter fresh airmode.In Floor/Defrost mode, the recirculationbutton can be selected to block outsideodors. However, for maximum defogging inthis mode, it is recommended to turn recir-culation off when possible.

Fresh air intake

Press the fresh air intake button todraw outside air into the passenger com-partment.

Automatic intake air controlIn the AUTO mode, the intake air will becontrolled automatically. When the outsidetemperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the airconditioning system may default to air re-circulation mode automatically to reduceoverall power consumption. To exit air re-circulation mode, select the fresh air intakebutton to enter fresh air mode. The air re-circulation indicator will turn off, the freshair indicator will turn on.

To manually control the intake air, pressthe fresh air intake button. To returnto the automatic control mode ifthe fresh air indicator is illuminated,press and hold the fresh air intakebutton for about 2 seconds. The fresh airindicator and air recirculation indicatorlights will flash twice, and then the intake airwill be controlled automatically. To returnto the automatic control mode ifthe air recirculation icon is illumi-nated, press and hold the air recircu-lation button for about 2 seconds.The air recirculation indicatorand fresh air intake indicator lightswill flash twice and the intake air will becontrolled automatically.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol buttons to the desired position andpress the button to turn on the airconditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,press the button again.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


Air flow controlPress the MODE button to manually controlair flow and select the air outlet.

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from footoutlets.

— Air flows from defroster andfoot outlets.

To turn system offPress the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and/or outsidemirror (if so equipped) defrosterswitchFor additional information, refer to “Rearwindow and/or outside mirror (if soequipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPSThe sunload sensor (if so equipped) �1 , lo-cated on the top center of the instrumentpanel, helps the system maintain a con-stant temperature. Do not put anything onor around this sensor.

∙ When the climate system is in auto-matic operation and the engine coolanttemperature and outside air tempera-ture are low, the air flow outlet may de-fault to defroster mode for a maximumof 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not amalfunction. After the engine coolanttemperature warms up, the air flow out-let will return to foot mode and opera-tion will continue normally.

∙ When the outside and interior cabintemperatures are moderate to high, theintake setting may default to turn off airrecirculation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. You may no-tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-levelmode, or side demist vent outlets for amaximum of 15 seconds. This may oc-cur when previous climate setting wassystem off. This is not a malfunction.After the initial warm air is expelled, theintake will return to automatic control,air flow outlet will return to previous set-tings, and operation will continue nor-mally. To exit, press any climate controlbutton.

∙ Keep the windows closed while the airconditioner is in operation.

LHA4126


∙ If you feel that the air flow mode youhave selected and the outlets the air iscoming out do not match, selectthe mode.

∙ When you change the air flow mode,you may feel air flow from the feet ventsfor just a moment. This is not a mal-function.

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-signed with the environment in mind.This refrigerant does not harm theearth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricantis required when servicing your NISSAN airconditioner. Using improper refrigerants orlubricants will cause severe damage toyour air conditioner system. For additionalinformation, refer to “Air conditioner sys-tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer to service your “environmentallyfriendly” air conditioner system.

WARNINGThe air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with properequipment.

There is a USB/iPod® charging port locatedin the 2nd row on the back of the centerconsole. This port will charge compatibledevices.

NOTE:

The USB/iPod® charging port will not op-erate the display screen or the Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) (if so equipped). Onlythe USB connection port located in theconsole box will allow operation ofUSB/iPod® devices through the audiosystem.

2nd rowLHA4864

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT


The antenna cannot be shortened, but canbe removed. When you need to remove theantenna, turn the antenna rod counter-clockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antennarod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION∙ Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antennarod may break during vehicleoperation.

∙ Be sure that the antenna is removedbefore the vehicle enters an auto-matic car wash.

WARNING∙ It is unlawful in most jurisdictions for

a person to drive a motor vehiclewhich is equipped with a televisionmonitor or screen that is visible, di-rectly or indirectly, to the driver whileoperating the vehicle. In the interestof safety, the unit should never be in-stalled where it will be directly or indi-rectly visible, by the operator of themotor vehicle.

∙ If your vehicle is equipped with a wire-less rear seat audio system or anyother wireless infrared device, makesure it is powered off when operatingthe RSI system. If both systems arepowered on at the same time, the twosystems may obstruct each other,possibly creating undesirable audiointerference through the wirelessheadphones.

∙ For safety reasons when changingdiscs, it is recommended that the ve-hicle is not in motion, and that you donot allow children to unfasten safetybelts to change discs or make any ad-justments to the system. System ad-justments can be accomplished usingthe remote control, while safety beltsremain fastened.

∙ Enjoy your RSI system but rememberthat safety of all passengers remainsthe number one priority. Devices in-stalled in the USB, HDMI, or head-phone jack may protrude and create apotential eye impact hazard for un-belted passengers during a vehicleaccident. To reduce the risk of injury,use only SD cards (hidden on left sideof driver side monitor) or low-profileUSB storage devices.

ANTENNA REAR SEAT INFOTAINMENT (RSI) (ifso equipped)


CAUTION∙ Do not touch the inner pins of the

jacks on the front panel. Electrostaticdischarge may cause permanentdamage to the device.

∙ The LCD display screen is not touch-screen. Do not put pressure or addsuction cups on the screen.

∙ Caution children to avoid touching orscratching the screen, as it may be-come dirty or damaged.

∙ Be sure to run the vehicle engine whileusing the system. Using this systemwithout running the engine can resultin battery drain. To avoid the risk ofbattery drain, please remember toturn off the system when the vehicleis not in use.

WELCOMEThank you for purchasing this advancedRear Seat Infotainment (RSI) system withbuilt-in Wi-Fi and DVD player. Before oper-ating this system, read this sectionl thor-oughly and retain it for future reference.

System features∙ Twin 8-inch Color TFT-LCD Panels with

1024x600 Resolution

∙ Top-load DVD Player (Driver Side Only)

∙ Internal Wi-Fi Network

∙ Bluetooth® 4.1 Audio Streaming

∙ Miracast®/Smart View Capability

∙ SmartStream Content Sharing

∙ USB 2.0 Port, SDXC Card Input

∙ HDMI 1.4 Input with MHL 2.0 Support

∙ Exclusive Slingplayer® Application

∙ 3.5mm Stereo Headphone Output

∙ Front Panel Capacitive Touch Controls

∙ Infrared Wireless Headphones

∙ Full-Function Slimline Remote Control

∙ Monitor Screen Sharing

GETTING STARTEDTurning the monitor on or off

1. Press the button on the top of themonitor or the remote control to turnthe monitor on or off. When in use, thefront panel controls will illuminate.

2. After the monitor has been turned onand is displaying a picture, theup/down viewing angle can be ad-justed to optimize the picture quality.Press the push-button latch located onthe top of the monitor to pivot thescreen.

LHA4871


Power up tips1. After the ignition is turned on, there is a

12 second delay before themonitor (power) button is oper-able.

2. On some vehicles after the ignition isturned off, the system will continue towork for 10 minutes, or until the driver’sdoor is opened.

3. Remember to turn the monitor off andpivot the screen to the locked (latched)position when not in use.

Audio optionsWireless headphones

Each monitor includes a built-in dual chan-nel infrared transmitter for use with wire-less headphones. The wireless head-phones must be used within a line of sightfrom the transmitter as infrared signals, likevisible light, travel only in a straight line.

How to use the wireless headphones

When placing the headphones on yourhead, make sure to observe the left andright orientation. The headphones must beoriented correctly (facing forward) to re-ceive the audio signal. Pressthe (power) button on the head-

phones, then select channel “A” to listen tomonitor A, or channel “B” to listen to moni-tor B. Adjust the audio level using the vol-ume control on each headphone.

Wired headphones

There is a 3.5mm stereo headphone out-put on each monitor which can be usedwith most standard stereo headphones(wired headphones sold separately).

Bluetooth® streaming audio

To listen to audio throughout the entire ve-hicle, the system includes the ability tostream audio over a Bluetooth® connec-tion to the vehicle’s stereo system.

When monitor A is selected as the sourceto stream from, the audio output to thewireless and wired headphones will be dis-abled (only on monitor A). To use the wire-less or wired headphones with monitor A,you must turn off the Bluetooth® stream-ing feature. To enable/disable Bluetooth®streaming, navigate to the “SETTINGS”menu, or press on the remote controlduring content playback. For additional in-formation, refer to “Settings” in this section.

Notes on discs∙ To keep a disc clean, do not touch its

surface. Handle the disc by its edge.

∙ Keep your discs in their cases or sleeveswhen not in use. Also, do not subjectdisc to heat/high temperature. Avoidleaving them in a parked vehicle or on adashboard/rear tray.

∙ Do not attach labels, or use discs withsticky ink/residue. The following mal-functions may result from using suchdiscs:

LHA4873


∙ Inability to eject a disc due to a labelor sticker peeling off and jammingthe disc mechanism.

∙ Inability to read audio data correctly(i.e., playback skipping, or no play-back) due to heat shrinking of asticker or label causing a disc towarp.

∙ Before playing, clean the discs with acommercially available cleaning cloth.Wipe each disc from the center out. Donot use solvents such as benzene, thin-ner, commercially available cleaners, orantistatic spray intended for analogdiscs.

∙ Use only normal, circular discs. If youinsert irregular, non-round, shapeddiscs they may jam in the DVD player ornot play properly.

Region codingDVD players and discs are coded by region.These regional codes must match in orderfor the disc to play. The system is preset tothe region code designated for your areaby the DVD Copy Control Association. Otherregions may not be played in this system.

Supported disc types

DVD-Video: DVD contains videoDVD +/- R: DVD contains videoCD-DA: CD contains audioCD-Video: CD contains videoCD-R/RW: CD contains audio

Unsupported disc types

Super Audio CDOptical disc CD-1CD-ROMDVD-ROMDVD-RAMDualDiscDIVXMiniDisc

AVCHDHD DVDBlu-ray

Loading and playing discs

Press the (power) button to turn themonitor on. Insert the disc about halfwayinto the disc compartment slot on the driv-er’s side monitor, with the disc’s label facingthe rear of the vehicle. Do NOT insert thedisc at an angle. The disc must be insertedstraight into the player.The disc will load automatically and beginto play. Some discs may start at the rootmenu, where playback must be selected tostart a movie. Depending on the disc andplayback location on the disc, a “ ” iconmay be displayed in the upper-left cornerof the screen indicating that playback isnot possible during certain times.DVD playback will automatically play oneach monitor if there is no content alreadyplaying. You may also select “DVD” from thesource menu to begin DVD playback mode.

LHA4874


Media compatibilityFor a list of compatible media formats forthis system, refer to “Storage device for-matting” in this section.

∙ The metadata or file information ofsome audio and video files may not becorrectly displayed.

∙ It is not possible to play content that isprotected by DRM (Digital Rights Man-agement).

∙ There may be a delay before playbackbegins when using USB flash drives orSD cards with complex folder hierar-chies or many files.

∙ Some audio, video, and image files maybe incompatible with this system dueto file characteristics, file format, record-ing software used, directory structure,and/or the type of audio/video encod-ing used.

Storage device formattingThis system is compatible with severaltypes of formatting for USB flash drives andSD cards. Refer to the documentation thatcomes with your storage device for moredetails on how to format.

FAT32 - USB and SDHCGood for smaller capacity storage devices,but individual files on the drive must be<4GB. This format is good for music andimages.

EX-FAT - USB and SDXCBetter choice for larger capacity storagedevices with files that are >4GB. This formatis better for larger files such as full-lengthmovies.

NTFS - USB and SDXCBest choice for very large capacity storagedevices - with no limitations on file size. Thisformat can be used for all file sizes.


Supported FormatsFormat Extension Supported Variations/Codecs

VIDEO

ASF .wmv H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, WMVAVI .avi H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, Xvid, WMV

MP4 .mp4, .m4v H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2Matroska .mkv H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2, WMV

MPEG .mpg, .mpeg, .vob H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2

AUDIO

AAC .m4a, .aacASF .wma WMA, WMA Lossless, WMA Voice, WMA Pro

FLAC .flac FLAC 1.2.1Matroska .mka

MPEG .mp1, .mp2, .mp3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3, MPEG-2/2.5 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3OGG .oggWAV .wav

PHOTO

BMP .bmpGIF .gif

JPEG .jpg, .jpegPNG .pngTIFF .tiff, .tif

WebP .webpVideo Profiles Supported:ASF: WMV7, WMV8, WMV9; H.264:Baseline, Main, Extended, High MPEG-2 Part 2:Simple, Main, High;

MPEG-4 Part 2:Simple, Advanced Simple Profile, Xvid


Monitor A (Drivers Side) With DVDLHA4875


CONTROL DESCRIPTION1. Screen latch

Press the push-button latch located onthe top of the monitor to pivot thescreen. Remember to turn the monitor

off and pivot the screen to the locked(latched) position when not in use.

2. EjectPress this button to eject a disc.

3. SD Card SlotPlay videos, music, and images storedon most SD cards. The full-size SD cardslot is accessible on the left side of themonitor when the screen is in the openposition.

4. Monitor screen displayIncludes an 8-inch TFT Liquid CrystalDisplay with 1024 x 600 resolution.

5. Headphone output jackConnect wired headphones using a3.5mm stereo connector.

6. USB 2.0 portPlay videos, music, and images storedon most USB devices. Provides up to2 amps of output to charge most mo-bile devices.

7. HDMI portConnect an external audio/videosource using a full-size HDMI connector.Supports MHL 2.0 playback and charg-ing.

8. Front panel controlsCapacitive-touch buttons provide userinterface navigation, Select, Back, andHome functions.

Monitor B (Passenger’s Side) Without DVDLHA4876


9. Power (Monitor A)Press this button to turn the monitoron. Press again to turn the monitor off.Press and hold for 6 seconds to resetthe system (Monitor A only)

Power (Monitor B)Press this button to turn the monitoron. Press again to turn the monitor off.

10. Disc slotPlay DVDs and CDs using standard sizeDVD or CD discs.

CAUTION∙ Do not use any harsh solvents or

chemicals when cleaning the monitor.

∙ Do not use any abrasive cleaners thatmay scratch the screen. Use only alightly dampened lint free cloth towipe the screen if it is dirty.

∙ The LCD display screen is not touch-screen. Do not put pressure or addsuction cups on the screen.

∙ Caution children to avoid touching orscratching the screen, as it may be-come dirty or damaged.

∙ Place the monitor in the fully closedposition when not in use.

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATIONBefore use

Before attempting to operate your remotecontrol, turn the remote control face downand remove the battery insulator by pullingthe clear plastic tab away from the remotecontrol.

Replacing the battery

1. Turn the remote control face down. Usea coin to turn the battery covercounter-clockwise and remove it.

2. Replace the battery with a CR2032 orequivalent. Make sure that proper po-larity is observed. The positive (+) side ofthe battery should face upwards.

3. Place the cover back into position andturn it clockwise until it locks into place.

The remote control will only operate thisdevice. It is not a universal remote controland will not control other equipment.

LHA4877 LHA4878


WARNING∙ Always ensure that the battery is in-

serted in the correct direction asshown in the battery compartment.

∙ When the battery fails to function, re-place it immediately.

∙ Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren. In case the battery is acci-dentally swallowed, immediately con-sult a doctor. Also, when disposing ofused batteries, please comply withgovernmental regulations or environ-mental public institution rules thatapply in your country/area.

∙ Remove the battery if the remote con-trol is not used for a month or longer.

∙ Storage in extreme cold can weakenthe battery. Keep the remote controlstored in a cool, dry place.

REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS1. Power

Press this button to turn the monitoron. Press again to turn the monitor off.

2. Monitor APress this button to transmit the re-mote control codes and functions tooperate monitor A (Driver side).

3. Directional padPress these buttons toincrease/decrease the volume or navi-gate up/down when displaying amenu or file list.

4. HomePress this button to return to the homescreen.

5. BackPress this button to go back to the pre-vious screen.

6. Monitor BPress this button to transmit the re-mote control codes and functions tooperate monitor B (Passenger side).

7. SelectPress this button to make a selectionwhen displaying a menu or file list.

8. MenuPress this button to open the contextmenu (when available).

LHA4879


NOTE:

You must first select the desired monitor(press A or B) to control it. Example -Press A, then press Power to turn moni-tor A on/off.

WIRELESS HEADPHONEOPERATIONInstalling the batteriesBefore attempting to operate the headphones,install the batteries as described below:

1. Use a coin to remove the headphonebattery cover

2. Install two “AAA” batteries into theheadphones. Make sure that properpolarity (+ or -) is observed.

3. Reinstall headphone battery cover.

LHA4880


Headphone operationPress the power button on the head-phones to turn on and off the headphones.The red LED will illuminate when the head-phone is turned on. Set the select switch to“A” or “B” for use with the “A” monitor or “B”monitor respectively. Use the volumethumb wheel to adjust the volume level forthe headphone audio.

NOTE:

If the headphones are accidentally lefton and system is powered off, a batterysaver feature will automatically turn offthe headphones after approximately3 minutes.

CAUTION∙ Always ensure that the batteries are

inserted with the positive and nega-tive terminals in the correct directionas shown in the batterycompartment.

∙ Different types of batteries have dif-ferent characteristics. Do not mix dif-ferent types.

∙ Do not mix old and new batteries. Mix-ing old and new batteries will shortenbattery life and/or cause chemicalleaks from the old batteries.

∙ When batteries fail to function, re-place them immediately.

∙ Keep the batteries out of the reach ofchildren. In case the batteries are ac-cidentally swallowed, immediatelyconsult a doctor. Also, when disposingof used batteries, please comply withgovernmental regulations or environ-mental public institution rules thatapply in your country/area.

∙ Remove the batteries if the head-phones are not used for a month orlonger.

GENERAL OPERATIONNavigating menusWhen fully powered on, the Home screencan be accessed at any time by pressingthe button on the remote control, orthe button on the monitor.The main menu is located on the far-leftside of the screen and allows users to se-lect a source, change settings, USB fast-charge certain devices, and mirror contentplaying from the opposite monitor.

LHA4882


To the right of the main menu is a previewmenu, which gives a preview of the high-lighted option in the main menu. The pre-view menu options will change with eachselection.

Press or to scroll through theoptions in each menu. The current selec-tion is highlighted in the center of the menuwhen scrolling up and down. Pressor when an item is highlighted to se-lect the item. Press or to moveback one level in the menu.MirrorFor additional information on how to mir-ror content playing from the oppositemonitor, refer to “Mirroring content” and“Using Miracast®” in this section.

Fast-Charge (USB)For additional information, refer to “Fast-Charge (USB)” in this section

SettingsFor additional information, refer to “Set-tings” in this section.

SourcesThe following sources can be accessedfrom the main menu:

DVDPlay DVD movies and audio CDs usingstandard size DVD or CD discs.

HDMIPlay content from an external audio/videosource.

USBPlay videos, music, and images stored onmost USB devices.

SD CARDPlay videos, music, and images stored onmost SD cards.

Slingplayer®Stream content wirelessly from a Slingbox®(sold separately) to the RSI system. *Re-quires external internet connection.

Miracast®Stream content wirelessly from a Miracast-enabled device to the RSI system.

SmartStreamStream content wirelessly between mobiledevices and to the RSI system. *Requirescompatible UPnP application to be in-stalled on the mobile device. For additionalinformation, refer to “SmartStream” in thissection.

NOTE:

The top left corner of the screen includesa graphic representation that shows thenavigational path of the current menu.For example: Home > Source > DVD.

LHA4883


DVD OPERATIONVolume controlVolume level can be adjusted bypressing or any time video isplaying, or by selecting the volume icon inthe playback controls menu.

NOTE:

For hearing protection, there is a maxi-mum volume setting to limit the audiooutput of the front panel 3.5mm head-phone output. Using the directional padon the remote navigate to “SETTINGS”then “AUDIO” then “HEADPHONES” to ad-just the maximum volume. Once set, themaximum volume is limited to this set-ting.

Playing a discInsert a disc into the top slot of monitor Awith the label facing the rear of the vehicle.If the disc is supported and there is nocontent already playing, the disc will auto-matically begin playing.

When a disc is inserted, playback will auto-matically begin on both monitors A and B (ifthere is no content already playing). If a discwas previously inserted, using the direc-tional pad on the remote select “SOURCE”,then “DVD” from the Home screen to beginor resume playback.

LHA4885 LHA4886


Some DVDs may start at the root menu,where playback must be selected to start amovie. Use the remote control or frontpanel buttons to navigate through the DVDmenu and begin playback.

The system supports DVD parental con-trols that provide the ability to limit contentplayback based on the Motion Picture As-sociation of America (MPAA) ratings. Foradditional information, refer to “About pa-rental lock” in this section.

Mirroring contentTo mirror the content of the oppositemonitor, using the directional pad on theremote, select “MIRROR” from the HomeScreen. This will allow the identical contentto play on both monitors.

DVD PLAYBACK CONTROLS

During video playback, press to dis-play the playback controls. Pressor to navigate the controls.Press to select the highlighted func-

tion or option. The playback controls willdisappear after approximately 5 secondsof no activity.

LHA4888


1. Context MenuPress on the remote to open thecontext menu. The menu options willvary, depending on the source.

2. Progess BarShows elapsed time, total time, andvideo progress bar indicator.

3. VolumeSelect to display the volume level indi-cator. Press or to increaseor decrease the volume.

4. Night ModeSelect to dim the screen and reduceeye strain during operation at night.

5. PreviousSelect to go to the beginning of thechapter. Select again to go to the pre-vious chapter.

6. RewindSelect to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16xspeeds. Select to resume play-back.

7. StopSelect to stop DVD playback and returnto the menu.

8. Play/PauseSelect once to pause DVD playback.Select again to resume DVD playback.

9. Fast ForwardSelect to fast forward at 2x, 4x, 8x, and16x speeds. Select to resumeplayback.

10. NextSelect to go to the next chapter.

11. RepeatSelect once to repeat the entire DVD.Select again to repeat the currentlyplaying chapter one time.

12. EjectSelect to eject the disc.

Context menuPress on the remote to open the con-text menu during DVD playback. The con-text menu provides options to adjust thedisplay settings, audio settings, subtitlesettings, and multicast (on/off). Pressto select or toggle the highlighted item onthe menu. Press to exit the contextmenu.

Display settingsBrightness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Contrast is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.

LHA4889


Sharpness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Aspect Ratio is adjustable between Pan &Scan, Letter Box, Widescreen, and Default.

Audio settingsThe Audio settings allow you to set thedefault audio language for DVD playback. Ifthe selected language is included on theDVD, the selected audio will be heard in thatlanguage.

Preferred language

Preferred Language is selectable betweenEnglish, French, Spanish, Chinese (Simpli-fied), Chinese (Traditional), Dutch, Portu-guese, Italian, Korean, Russian, Arabic, andDefault. The preferred language must beincluded on DVD in order for it to be dis-played. Refer to the DVD jacket for moreinformation.

Language switch

Language Switch provides the ability to se-lect between various audio streams (lan-guages) included on a DVD. Audio streamsmust be included on the DVD to be heard.

Subtitle settingsThe Subtitle settings allow you to set thedefault subtitle language for DVD playback.If the selected subtitle language is includedon the DVD, the selected subtitle audio willbe displayed during movie playback.

Subtitle switch

Subtitle Switch (Off/On) allows the subtitlesto be displayed during DVD playback.

Preferred Language

Preferred Language is selectable betweenEnglish, French, Spanish, Chinese (Simpli-fied), Chinese (Traditional), Dutch, Portu-guese, Italian, Korean, Russian, Arabic, andDefault. The preferred language must beincluded on DVD in order for it to be dis-played. Refer to the DVD jacket for moreinformation.

Language Switch

Language Switch provides the ability to se-lect between the various subtitles includedon a DVD. Subtitles must be included on theDVD to be seen during DVD playback.

MulticastMulticast (Off/On) provides the ability towatch a DVD over the built-in Wi-Fi networkusing an application installed on a mobiledevice. When turned on, the DVD contentwill be "cast" over the network to allow us-ers with multiple mobile devices to enjoythe same movie. *Requires application tobe installed on the mobile device.

LHA4890


BluetoothSelecting “BLUETOOTH” allows theBluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, au-dio source selection, and lip-sync adjust-ments. For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming and Lip-Sync ad-justment” in this section.

CD OPERATIONLHA4891


CD PLAYBACK CONTROLSDuring audio playback the controls are dis-played at all times.


2. Progress BarShows elapsed time, total time, andprogress bar indicator.



5. PreviousSelect to go to the beginning of thetrack. Select again to go to the previoustrack.

6. RewindSelect to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16xspeeds. Select to resume playback.

7. StopSelect to stop CD playback.

8. Play/PauseSelect once to pause CD playback. Se-lect again to resume CD playback.


10. NextSelect to go to the next track.

11. RepeatSelect once to repeat the entire CD. Se-lect again to repeat the currently play-ing track.

12. EjectSelect to eject the disc.

HDMI/MHL CONNECTIONHDMI connectionDisplay content from an external source con-nected to the system using the HDMI portlocated on the front of monitor A. A standardHDMI cable is required (sold separately).

To access the HDMI source, using the direc-tional pad on the remote, select “SOURCE”from the Home Screen and navigate toHDMI in the menu. When HDMI is high-lighted, a preview of the HDMI input will bedisplayed in the preview screen.

Press to return to the source menu.

LHA4892


NOTE:

HDMI connected devices are indepen-dent and must be controlled directlyfrom the source device.

MHL connectionThe system also allows mobile devicessupporting Mobile High-Definition Link(MHL) to be connected. An MHL-to-HDMIcable is required (sold separately).

Mobile High-Definition Link (MHL) is an in-dustry standard mobile audio/ video inter-face that allows connection of smart-phones, tablets, and other portableconsumer electronics devices to the sys-tem. MHL transports high-quality uncom-pressed audio and video from a mobilesource device to the system and at thesame time provides power to recharge thedevice.

NOTE:

MHL connected devices are independentand must be controlled directly from thesource device.

USB operationInsert a USB device into the USB port lo-cated on the front of monitor A. Using thedirectional pad on the remote, select“SOURCE” from the Home Screen and navi-gate to “USB” in the menu. When USB ishighlighted, music, video and photo iconswill appear in the preview menu to theright. The front panel USB port provides upto 2 amps of output to charge most mobiledevices. Please note this system does notsupport USB data transfer or audio/ videoplayback from mobile devices.

NOTE:

When inserting a USB storage devicewith a large library of content, there maybe a delay before the content is acces-sible.

LHA4893


Fast-Charge (USB)Fast-Charge allows you to charge certainUSB devices faster than normal. To enable,using the directional pad on the remote,select “FAST-CHARGE” when highlighted inthe main menu. The USB icon will display agreen lightning bolt when active.

NOTE:

Enabling the Fast-Charge mode disablesthe USB port from reading data or con-tent from USB devices. When selectingUSB as the source, the Fast-Charge fea-ture is automatically disabled.

USB/SD CARD OPERATIONSD card operationInsert a full-size SD card into the SD cardslot located on the left side monitor A. Us-ing the directional pad on the remote, se-lect “SOURCE” from the Home Screen andnavigate to “SD CARD” in the menu. WhenSD Card is highlighted, music, video andphoto icons will appear in the previewmenu to the right.

Basic navigationUSB and SD card are characterized bythree different categories which are videos,

music, and photos. Each media type willshow a preview of the available content.After selecting a media type, navigate thecontent, and select the desired file orphoto. When a media item is highlighted,the preview image is enlarged and sur-rounded by a white border. If available, theitem’s metadata (video title, filename, orphoto name) will be displayed in the infor-mation bar at the bottom of the screen.

Context menuPress on the remote while navigatingcontent to open the context menu. Thecontext menu provides options to adjustthe page view, sorting, and searching. Theoptions will vary, depending on the content.Press to select or toggle the high-lighted item on the menu. Press toexit the context menu.

Page view — music and videosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “PAGE VIEW” to change between Listor Grid. List provides an alphanumeric textlisting of all content, whereas Grid providesan alphanumeric thumbnail graphic viewof the content.

LHA4894 LHA4899


Page view — photosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “PAGE VIEW” to change between Grid,Overview, Slideshow, or Full Screen. Gridprovides a large thumbnail graphic view,whereas Overview provides a smallthumbnail graphic view of the content.Slideshow will play photos in sequence andFull Screen fills the entire screen.

SearchSearch provides an easy way to find andplay content by name. Using the directionalpad on the remote, select “SEARCH” to dis-play the on-screen keyboard. Use the di-rectional pad to navigate the keyboard andenter the first few characters of the file-name. Once the desired file is displayed,press to hide the keyboard.Press to begin playback.

Sorting — videosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “SORTING” to select between Title,Rating, Year, Filename, or Genre.

Sorting — musicUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “SORTING” to select between Artist,Album, Year, Filename, Song, or Genre.

Sorting — photosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “SORTING” to select between Date orFilename.LHA4896 LHA4897


USB/SD card video playbackcontrols

During video playback, press to dis-play the playback controls. Pressor to navigate the controls.

Press to select the highlighted func-tion or option. The playback controls willdisappear after approximately 5 secondsof no activity.


2. Progress BarShows elapsed time, total time andvideo progress bar indicator.



5. PreviousSelect to go to the beginning of thechapter. Select again to go to the pre-vious chapter.

6. RewindSelect to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16xspeeds. Select to resume play-back.

7. StopSelect to stop DVD playback and returnto the menu.

LHA4898


8. Play/PauseSelect once to pause DVD playback.Select again to resume DVD playback.


10. NextSelect to go to the next chapter.

11. RepeatSelect once to repeat the entire DVD.Select again to repeat the currentlyplaying chapter one time.

Playing videosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “VIDEOS” to navigate the content.When a media item is highlighted in Gridmode, the preview image is enlarged andsurrounded by a white border. The videotitle will be displayed in the information barat the bottom of the screen. Press tobegin playback. When choosing a videothat has previously been started, a "Re-sume" option is available.

Context menuPress on the remote to open the con-text menu during playback. The contextmenu provides options to adjust the dis-play settings, aspect settings, andBluetooth® settings. Press to selector toggle the highlighted item on themenu. Press to exit the context menu.

Display settingsBrightness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Contrast is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Sharpness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Aspect is adjustable between Preserve,Crop, and Stretch.

Bluetooth® settingsSelecting “BLUETOOTH” allows theBluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, au-dio source selection, and lip-sync adjust-ments. For additional information, refer to“Lip-Sync adjustments” in this section.

LHA4899


Playing musicNavigating through a music library is iden-tical to navigating through the video library.The default sorting option for music is Art-ist. Selecting an artist will then sort by Al-bum and will display all available albums bythat artist. There is also an option to PlayALL albums from the selected artist.

Select an album to display all songs in thealbum. Press or to navigate thesongs. Press to begin playback.

During playback, press to select theNow Playing screen. The Now Playingscreen includes the following controls: Pre-vious Song, Next Song, Rewind, Fast-Forward, Play/Pause, Shuffle, Repeat, Vol-ume Control, and Night mode.Press to return to the Playlist screen.The audio will continue to play while navi-gating the playlist screen. The system willreturn to the Now Playing screen after ap-proximately 15 seconds of no activity.

Navigating photosTo view photos, using the directional padon the remote navigate to “SOURCE” then“USB” or “SD CARD” then “PHOTOS” from thehome screen. Storage device must be con-nected to display to read media. Use thedirectional pad to highlight the photo thenpress to view.Highlight the vertical arrows on menu toaccess the page selector feature to quicklyscan photos.

Press to highlight additional optionsincluding Sorting, Page View, Set As Back-ground, and Search.

LHA4920 LHA4901 LHA4902


Sorting lets you arrange the photos by file-name or date.

Page View allows the user to view photos inFullscreen, Grid, Overview, or Slideshow.

Set As Background sets the selected photoas the home screen background.

Search prompts the user to input a file-name or date to find a photo.

SLINGPLAYER®About Slingplayer®A Slingbox® (sold separately) connects toyour home network and sits between yourcable or set-top box and your TV. Whenaccessed remotely, your Slingbox® slingsyour content to the RSI system. To useSlingplayer®, an external internet connec-tion is required. For additional information,refer to “Using Wi-Fi” in this section to en-able Client Mode in the Wi-Fi Settings andallow the system to connect to a Wi-Fihotspot.

Using Slingplayer®Using the directional pad on the remote,select “SOURCE” from the Home Screenand navigate to “SLINGPLAYER” in themenu. The first use of Slingplayer® willprompt you for login credentials. Use theremote control to navigate the on-screenkeyboard and enter the e-mail addressand password associated with your Sling-player® account.

LHA4903


Slingplayer® optionsOnce logged in, the main Slingplayer®menu page is displayed with 3 options:

1. Select “DIRECTORY” to watch live televi-sion from a Slingbox®.

2. Select “SETTINGS” to change the set-tings of the Slingplayer® application.

3. Select “HELP” to display information onhow to properly use the Slingplayer®application.

Connect to a live video streamPress to access the navigationalmenu that will display two sets of MenuControl Bars. The upper Menu Control Bardisplays types of controls. Press toselect the desired type of control.Press to hide the menus and returnto the live stream.

Slingplayer® control options include:

∙ Main

∙ DVR

∙ Directional Pad

∙ Number

∙ Miscellaneous

LHA4904 LHA4905


Accessing the program guidePress to display the upper and lowerMenu Control Bar for Slingplayer®. By de-fault, the "Main" icon on the upper MenuControl Bar is highlighted, showing the"Main" menu options in the lower MenuControl Bar. Press or to navi-gate to the lower options and select"GUIDE". This will launch the ProgramGuide. Once the guide has loaded, use thedirectional pad and press to selectthe desired channel or program.Press multiple times or to exit.

Exiting Slingplayer®There are two ways to exit the Slingplayer®application. Press or while onthe main screen to return to the mainmenu. When exiting the application, you willbe prompted to confirm: "Are you sure youwant to exit Slingplayer? There will be nodata usage once exited". Select “Yes” to re-turn to the Home Screen or select “No” toreturn to the stream.

Connection qualityThe quality of a mobile network connec-tion, whether it’s Wi-Fi or a mobile hotspotcan vary, due to network conditions. Con-nection speed and bandwidth can fluctu-ate, creating conditions that aren’t optimalfor smooth streaming.

Slingbox® compatibilityThe following legacy Slingbox® devices arenot supported: Slingbox PRO, Slingbox AV,Slingbox TUNER, Slingbox Classic.

Visit www.slingbox.com for more informa-tion on Slingbox or where to purchase.LHA4907 LHA4906


MIRACAST®About Miracast®Miracast® is a dedicated wireless connec-tion technology that allows contentstreaming between a mobile device andthe RSI system. The connection is madewithout cables or a network connection. Itprovides the ability to “cast” (display) con-tent, such as images or videos from themobile device to the RSI system. There is noneed for an external internet connectionand the ability to connect is insideMiracast-certified devices.

Using Miracast®Using the directional pad on the remoteselect “SOURCE” from the Home Screenand navigate to “MIRACAST” in the menu."Ready to Connect" will be displayed. En-able Screen Mirroring on the mobile deviceand look for "RSI-Miracast" in the list of pos-sible devices to connect to. Note that Mira-cast® may be labeled differently, depend-ing on the mobile device and its operatingsystem. If Miracast® is not available, look forSmart View or Screen Mirroring in the set-tings menu of your mobile device. Remem-ber to end your Miracast® connectionwhen finished to avoid draining the batteryof your mobile device.

This screen must be active to be able toconnect your mobile device to the monitor.

Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Mira-cast® certified devices.

USING THE MOBILE APPLICATIONON YOUR MOBILE DEVICEDownload the free ”VOXX-RSI” mobile appli-cation on your mobile device from AppleiTunes or Google Play store. A full version ofthe RSI Owner’s Manual is also includedwithin the mobile application.

WARNINGTHIS MOBILE APP IS NOT FOR DRIVERUSE

To reduce risk of a crash which can re-sult in death or serious injury, alwaysdrive carefully and in accordance withtraffic laws. The driver should not usethe mobile app while the vehicle is inmotion. Mobile app use may only be ex-ercised by the driver after you havestopped your vehicle in an appropriatelocation permitted by law. The mobileapp is specifically designed to be usedby passengers other than the driver,provided it does not interfere with driv-ing, and does not distract the driver’sattention to the road.

LHA4908


SMARTSTREAMAbout SmartStreamSmartStream is a wireless connectiontechnology that allows content streamingbetween a mobile device and the RSI sys-tem and between mobile devices. Contentis streamed over the built-in Wi-Fi networkusing an application installed on a mobiledevice. There is no need for an externalinternet connection.

Using SmartStreamBefore using the SmartStream feature, acompatible UPnP application is required tobe downloaded and installed on your mo-bile device. To stream content from a mo-bile device, you must first connect it to theRSI network.

Connecting a mobile device tothe RSI network:

1. Using the directional pad on the re-mote, select “SOURCE” from the HomeScreen and then select “SMART-STREAM” in the menu. A device connec-tion screen will be displayed on themonitor.

2. Navigate to the “Wi-Fi” settings menu ofthe mobile device and establish a con-nection to the network named “RSI-WiFi”.

3. When prompted, enter the networkpassword to join the RSI-WiFi network.Select the Show Password check box inthe Wi-Fi Settings menu to display thecurrent password. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Using Wi-Fi” in this sec-tion.

NOTE:

Access Point must be selected to use theSmartStream feature. For additional in-formation, refer to “Using Wi-Fi” in thissection.

LHA4909


Steaming content from a mobiledevice:

1. Once connected, launch the applica-tion, and select SmartStream on themobile device.

2. Choose the desired monitor to streamto by selecting Monitor A or Monitor B.Note: To stream content from a mobiledevice the monitor must be set toSmartStream in the source menu.

3. Select the desired source content fromthe list of available devices. Contentcan be browsed from all devices thatare connected to the RSI Wi-Fi networkand have a compatible UPnP applica-tion installed.

4. After selecting a content source, navi-gate through the folders, and selectthe desired file to stream to the moni-tor. Once the file is selected, it will beginstreaming to the monitor that was se-lected in step 2 above.

5. Playback controls are available fromthe Now Playing screen in the UPnPapplication and from the monitor.Press to display the playbackcontrols on the monitor.

NOTE:

∙ Content protected with DRM (DigitalRights Management) cannot bestreamed using the SmartStreamfeature.

∙ A wired connection (HDMI or MHL) isrequired to stream protected contentfrom a mobile device to the RSI system.For additional information, refer to“HDMI/MHL connection” in this section.

SETTINGSThe following settings can be accessedfrom the main menu:

Wi-FiChange the SSID (network name), changethe password of the network, and togglebetween Client Mode or Access Point.

Read BackA text-to-speech aid that enables the sys-tem to read text items displayed on thescreen. This feature guides the userthrough operating the RSI system.

LHA4910 LHA4911


DisplayAdjust Brightness, Contrast, and Sharp-ness settings.

AudioSelect the monitor to use for Bluetooth®audio streaming and set the maximumvolume level when using wired head-phones.

AdvancedChange the language of the GUI (GraphicUser Interface), reset the RSI system, andupdate the software.

CustomizeChange the background image of thehome screen using content from an SDcard or USB storage device.

ParentalSet or change the password to limit DVDcontent playback using parental controlbased on the Motion Picture Association ofAmerica (MPAA) ratings.

BluetoothControl Bluetooth® audio streaming(On/Off) and select from the available list ofpaired devices.

Using Wi-FiAccess PointAccess Point is used when connectingother mobile devices to the RSI’s built-ininternal network. This mode allows the RSIsystem to connect to devices "inside" thevehicle, using an optional UPnP applicationinstalled on a mobile device.

To change the SSID, navigate the keyboardand enter the desired network name. Se-lect Enter when complete. The default SSIDname is RSI-WiFi.

To change the network password, navigatethe keyboard and enter the desired nu-meric password. Select Enter when com-plete. Select the Show Password check boxto display the current password. SelectSave to save the SSID and password.

Client ModeClient Mode is used when connecting theRSI system to an external network or to theinternet using a mobile hotspot. This modeallows the RSI system to connect "outside"the vehicle.

Enable Client mode by highlighting the Sta-tus switch. The switch will turn green whenon. The RSI system will begin searching foravailable wireless networks and displaythem below. Navigate to the desired net-work and press to select it. Enter thepassword (if necessary) to complete theconnection. The system will automaticallyconnect to the last connected network un-til Client Mode is disabled.

NOTE:

Client mode will use data from the exter-nal Wi-Fi connection. Use with care asadditional data is consumed when usingmobile device data plans.

LHA4912


Using Read Back*Enable the Read Back feature by highlight-ing the Status switch. The switch will turngreen when on. Highlight the Save buttonand press to enable Read Back. Whenenabled, the RSI system will read the text ofmenu items displayed on the screen, pro-viding audible guidance on how to use thesystem. A blue bar will also appear at thetop of each screen indicating the ReadBack feature is enabled.

Speech VolumeSpeech Volume can be adjusted to matchthe media volume (spoken text volume isthe same volume level as the content be-ing played). To reduce the Speech Volumeto be lower than the volume level contentbeing played, set it to 75%, 50%, or 25% ofthe media volume.Speech RateSpeech Rate can be adjusted betweenNormal, Fast, or Slow. This setting controlshow fast the spoken text is pronounced.

*Complies with FCC/Accessibility rule 21stCentury Communications and Video Ac-cessibility Act (CVAA).

Display settingsBrightnessBrightness is a measurement of theamount of light the monitor produces. Fordisplaying movies, a brighter luminancerating is desirable. Select between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default (High).

ContrastContrast is a ratio of difference of the moni-tor’s ability to produce bright whites anddark blacks. Select between Low, Medium,High, and Default (High).

LHA4913 LHA4914


SharpnessSharpness is edge contrast that is visiblealong edges of content. Decreasing thesharpness will create a softer image. In-creasing the sharpness will affect the con-trast only along/near edges of the imagewhile leaving smooth areas of the imagealone. Select between Low, Medium, High,and Default (Low).

Audio settingsHeadphonesFor hearing protection, there is a maximumvolume setting to limit the audio output ofthe front panel 3.5mm headphone output.Select the desired maximum volume from0 ~ 100 and select Save to store the value.

Bluetooth SourceWhen Bluetooth® is enabled and a connec-tion is established to the vehicle’s stereosystem, choose the monitor to be used asthe source to stream audio from. SelectMonitor A to stream audio from the Driverside monitor or select Monitor B to stream

audio from the Passenger side monitor. Se-lect OK to confirm and store the desiredmonitor.

NOTE:

∙ When monitor A is selected as thesource to stream from, the audio out-put to the wireless and wired head-phones will be disabled (only onmonitor A).

LHA4915 LHA4916


∙ To use the wireless or wired head-phones with monitor A, you must turnoff the Bluetooth® streaming feature.For additional information, refer to“Bluetooth® streaming” in this sec-tion.

Advanced settingsLanguageThe system language used for the GUI(Graphic User Interface) can be changed toany of the following languages English,Spanish, French, Arabic, Simplified Chinese,Traditional Chinese, and Hebrew. Tochange the language, highlight and selectthe current language and a drop-down listwill appear containing the available lan-guages. Choose the desired language andselect Save to display the confirmation dia-log box. Select Yes to confirm and rebootthe RSI system.

ResetA master reset will return the RSI systemsettings to the factory defaults. Any useroptions and customization will be lost andreset back to factory default settings. Toreset the system, select Yes when the dia-log confirmation box appears.

UpdateDisplays the current software version infor-mation. Select Update to begin a softwareupdate (reserved for future use).

LHA4917


Customize settingsBackgroundCustomize the RSI system by changing thebackground image of the main menuscreen on each monitor. Select a source toload the image from. Options include USB,SD card, or Local (internal memory).

Select a source then navigate the contentand select the new background image.Choose the desired image and display theconfirmation dialog box. Select Yes to con-firm. Press to view the new back-ground image.

NOTE:

∙ Each monitor can have its own back-ground image.

∙ The Local source stores the 10 mostrecent background images.

∙ To restore the default backgroundimage, perform a factory reset. Foradditional information, refer to “Ad-vanced settings” in this section.

Bluetooth® streamingTo access “BLUETOOTH” from the homescreen use the directional pad on the re-mote and navigate to “SETTINGS” then“BLUETOOTH”. Status button indicates if theBluetooth® is enabled when green or dis-abled when red. Highlight and pressto enable or disable Bluetooth®.Once enabled, the RSI will automaticallysearch for available devices in pairingmode. Using the directional pad on the re-mote, select "Device name" then “Connect”to pair. Input the PIN from connecting de-vice (if prompted). Device name will display"Connected" once paired properly. Select

LHA4918 LHA4919


“OK” to confirm changes and close the win-dow. To unpair a Bluetooth® device, selectDevice name then Unpair.

If the device is not listed, select RefreshSymbol and the device will appear in Avail-able device list. If device does not appear,double check that the device is in pairingmode (refer to the device’s manual for in-structions).

Bluetooth® equipped vehicles can streamaudio from the display through vehicle’ssound system once paired. For additionalinformation, refer to the separateNissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Lip-Sync adjustmentLip-Sync adjustments can be accessed bypressing on the remote, then select-ing “BLUETOOTH”. Highlight the numericalvalue and press . Use the directionalpad to synchronize video and audio play-back due to small delay inherent in someBluetooth® devices. Press to setvalue. Highlight save and press to exit.To select which Monitor will streamBluetooth®, using the directional pad onthe remote select “SETTINGS: then “AUDIO”then “BLUETOOTH” from the home screen.Highlight “MONITOR A” or “MONITOR B” and

press . Selecting Monitor A or B tostream Bluetooth® can also be achieved bypressing while video is playing.Press then “BLUETOOTH”, then “SE-LECT”. Highlight “MONITOR A”, “OFF”, or“MONITOR B”. Highlight “SAVE” andpress to set configuration and closethe window.

LHA4920


About parental lockSome DVDs may have a parental ratinglevel assigned to the entire disc or to cer-tain scenes/chapters on the disc. ParentalLock allows the playback limitation level tobe set. This prohibits the playing discs thatare not suitable for children or have alter-native scenes. The rating levels range from1 to 8. They are country dependent, but ingeneral they are defined as follows:

1 KID SAFE:Kids material; recommended children andviewers of all ages.

2 G:General Audience; recommended for allages.

3 PG:Parental Guidance suggested.

4 PG-13:Unsuitable for children under age 13.

5/6 PGR/R:Parental Guidance/Restricted content notsuitable for children under the age of 17.

7 NC-17:No children under age 17.

8 Adult:Mature content; should be viewed only byan adult due to graphic sexual material,violence, or language.

Once a rating level is set, DVDs that arerated above that level will not play unless a4-digit password is entered and higher-level rating is chosen.

Changing parental lockTo set the parental lock using the direc-tional pad on the remote, select “SETTINGS”then ‘PARENTAL” from the home screen.Choose password with directional pad andpress to enter, press again toconfirm your password. Once the pass-word is selected, the parental rating menuwill appear to select highest playable DVDrating from 1 – 8.

LHA4921 LHA4922


For example, to set the ratings limit for PGand below, select “RATINGS” then “3” usingthe directional pad and press , basedon the rating levels. For additional informa-tion, refer to “About parental lock” in thissection.

To change password, select “SETTINGS”then “PARENTAL” from the home screen.Enter the current password, select “PASS-WORD” then “MODIFY” to set new password,press once to enter, and select againto confirm. To exit “PARENTAL” menupress .

To remove the parental lock password, se-lect “SETTINGS” then “PARENTAL” from thehome screen. Enter the current password.Select “PASSWORD” then “REMOVE”,press to enter, and select again toconfirm. To exit Parental menu press .

TROUBLESHOOTINGSymptom Remedy

Monitor does not power onVerify the vehicle is in the ON or ACC position.Verify the battery is installed correctly in the remote control.Verify the in-line fuse protection is good. Refer to the RSI system installation instructions for vehicle-specific fuse location.

Monitor front panel controlsflash red

For further diagnosis, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

System frozen - will not re-spond

Soft reset the system by pressing and holding the power button on the top of the driver side monitor for 5 seconds.Hard reset the system by turning the ignition off, then back on.

Disc will not play

Insert the disc with label side facing the rear of the vehicle.Check if the disc is defective by trying another disc.Check the type of disc being played. This unit only plays DVD (Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R, DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD,CD-R, and CD-RW.The unit and the disc are coded by region. If the region codes don’t match, the DVD can’t be played.

Disc plays, but stops inter-mittently

The disc may be dirty and need cleaning.Condensation may have formed inside the unit. Remove the disc and allow unit to dry out.The disc may be scratched too badly to play.

No pictureCheck that the signal source is connected.Check the menu source setting. Match your monitor mode with the source correctly.

Distorted picture Check the disc for fingerprints and clean with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.


Symptom Remedy

Cannot advance through aDVD movie

You cannot advance through the opening credits and warning information that appears at the beginning of DVDs because thedisc is programmed to prohibit these actions.Some discs may not allow this function. Try another disc.

No sound or distortedsound

Make sure that the external media device is connected properly, and all cables are securely inserted into the appropriate jacks.Verify that the batteries in the headphones are fresh.If you are using the wireless headphones, make sure you turn on the power and select the correct monitor (A or B).Verify the volume is turned up on headphones and the system.Verify nothing is blocking the path between the monitor IR sensor and headphones.When placing the headphones on your head, make sure to observe the Left and Right orientation. The headphones must be ori-ented correctly (facing forward) to receive the audio signal.

Monitor feels warm When the monitor is in use for a long period of time, the surface will be warm. This is normal.Player does not respond toall commands during play-back

The DVD may not permit some commands. Refer to the specific instructions included with the DVD for more information.

A Parental Setting messageis displayed, prohibitingmovie playback

Enter the 4-digit Parental Password using the remote and then press . For additional information, refer to “Changing paren-tal lock” in this section.

Cannot connect mobile de-vice to the internal RSI Wi-Finetwork

Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device.Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode.Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, refer to “Using Wi-Fi” in this section.

Cannot connect RSI systemto an external Wi-Fi network

Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, referto “Using Wi-Fi” in this section.

Cannot establish aBluetooth® connection

Check to make sure Bluetooth® is enabled on the RSI system. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming” in thissection.

Cannot establish a Mira-cast® connection to the RSIsystem

Check to make sure mobile device supports Miracast®. Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Miracast® certified devices.Check to make sure Miracast® is enabled on the mobile device.Select Miracast® source from the RSI main menu.


Symptom Remedy

Cannot play certain filesfrom USB or SD cards

Audio/video files embedded with DRM are not compatible.Some USB storage devices and SD cards may not be compatible. Replace the external storage device (USB, SD).Due to ongoing technological advancements, some USB flash drives and SD cards may be incompatible with this system.

Cannot connect to externalSingbox®

Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. For additional information, refer to “Using W-Fi” in this section.Check network upload speed from your home (or wherever the Singbox® is located).Confirm hotspot or Wi-Fi download speed/connection quality.Check that your Singbox® is properly set up.

Cannot share content froma mobile device to the RSIsystem

A compatible UPnP app is required to be installed on the mobile device.Audio/video files embedded with DRM cannot be streamed to the RSI system.

Cannot share content be-tween mobile devices usingthe internal Wi-Fi network

Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device.Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode. For additional information, refer to “Using W-Fi” in this section.


SPECIFICATIONS

LCD Backlight Type LEDDisplay Type 8.0 inch (Diagonal) a-Si TFT Active Matrix, 1024x3(RGB) x 600 resolution

Supported Disc Types DVD (Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R, DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD, CD-R, CD-RWFrequency Response 3.5mm Audio Output: 200Hz ~ 16kHz +/- 6dB

HDMI Support Version 1.4b, HDCP 2.1 CompliantMHL Support Version 2.0, 900mA Maximum Charging Output

Wireless Audio 2-Channel Stereo Headphone Operation, (Typical Infrared Reception/Range: 0.9m; 80°, 1.8m; 50°)

Wi-Fi Network 802.11b/g/n, TX/RX Frequency: 2412 MHz - 2484 MHz, Antenna 1: 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n HT20, 802.11n HT40, MIMO Antenna 1+2: 802.11n HT20

Wi-Fi Modulation 802.11b: DSSS (DBPSK / DQPSK / CCK), 802.11g/n: OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM)Bluetooth® Support Version 4.1

Bluetooth® BR/EDR TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 79, Bluetooth BR (1Mbps): GFSK Modulation, Bluetooth EDR (2Mbps): π/4-DQPSKModulation, Bluetooth EDR (3Mbps): 8-DPSK Modulation

Bluetooth® LE TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 40, Carrier Frequency of Each Channel:, (37 hopping + 3 Advertising channel),Type of Modulation: Bluetooth LE: GFSK

USB Support Version 1.1, Version 2.0 High Speed, 10 watt (2 Amp) Maximum Charging OutputSD Card Support SD, SDHC, SDXC


COMPLIANCE INFORMATIONFCC NoticeThis device complies with Part 15 of FCCRules and Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference, including in-terference that may cause undesired op-eration of this device.

This transmitter must not be co-located oroperated in conjunction with any other an-tenna or transmitter. The Bluetooth® an-tenna cannot be removed (or replaced) byuser.

Alteration or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.

This equipment has been tested and foundto comply with the limits for a Class B digi-tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCCRules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful in-terference in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and can radi-ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-stalled and used in accordance with theinstructions, may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communications. However,there is no guarantee that interference willnot occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception, whichcan be determined by turning the equip-ment off and on, the user is encouraged totry to correct the interference by one ormore of the following measures:

∙ Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

∙ Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

∙ Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

∙ Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/ TV technician for help.

Bluetooth®The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned by theBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by Voxx Automotive Corporation isunder license. Other trademarks and tradenames are those of their respective own-ers.

DVD Video PlaybackThis item incorporates copy protectiontechnology that is protected by U.S. pat-ents and other intellectual property rightsof Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineeringand disassembly are prohibited.

LHA4926


AACAAC is short for Advanced Audio Codingand refers to an audio compression tech-nology standard used with MPEG-2 andMPEG-4. Several applications can be usedto encode AAC files, but file formats andextensions differ depending on the appli-cation which is used to encode.

FLACCopyright © 2000-2009 Josh CoalsonCopyright © 2011-2013 Xiph.Org FoundationRedistribution and use in source and bi-nary forms, with or without modification,are permitted provided that the followingconditions are met:Redistributions of source code must retainthe above copyright notice, this list of con-ditions and the following disclaimer.Redistributions in binary form must repro-duce the above copyright notice, this list ofconditions and the following disclaimer inthe documentation and/or other materi-als provided with the distribution.Neither the name of the Xiph.org Founda-tion nor the names of its contributors maybe used to endorse or promote productsderived from this software without specificprior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPY-RIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “ASIS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRAN-TIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BELIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUEN-TIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-ITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING INANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITYOF SUCH DAMAGE.

MP3Supply of this product only conveys a li-cense for private, non-commercial use anddoes not convey a license nor imply anyright to use this product in any commercial(i.e. revenuegenerating) real time broad-casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/orany other media), broadcasting/streamingvia internet, intranets and/or other net-works or in other electronic content distri-bution systems, such as pay-audio oraudio-on-demand applications. An inde-pendent license for such use is required.For details, please visithttp://www.mp3licensing.com.

WMA/WMVWindows Media is either a registered trade-mark or trademark of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and/orother countries. This product includestechnology owned by MicrosoftCorporation and cannot be used or distrib-uted without a license from Microsoft Li-censing, Inc.

SD/SDHC/SDXCSD, SDHC and SDXC Logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of SD-3C LLC inthe United States, other countries or both.


HDMIThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-DefinitionMultimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logoare trademarks or registered trademarksof HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United Statesand other countries.

MHLMHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are trademarks or regis-tered trademarks of MHL, LLC in the UnitedStates and other countries.

Dolby DigitalThis product will down-mix Dolby Digitalsignals internally and the sound will be out-put in stereo. Manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

European Waste Electrical andElectronic Equipment (WEEE)NoticeIn accordance with Directive 2012/19/EU ofthe European Parliament on waste electri-cal and electronic equipment (WEEE):

The symbol above indicates that separatecollection of electrical and electronicequipment is required. When this producthas reached the end of its serviceable life, itcannot be disposed of as unsorted munici-pal waste. It must be collected and treatedseparately. It has been determined by theEuropean Parliament that there are poten-tial negative effects on the environmentand human health as a result of the pres-ence of hazardous substances in electricaland electronic equipment. It is the users‘responsibility to utilize the available collec-tion system to ensure WEEE is properlytreated.

LHA4923 LHA4924 LHA4925


All other trademarks and their respectivelogos cited herein are the property of theirrespective owners.

When installing a CB, ham radio or carphone in your vehicle, be sure to observethe following precautions; otherwise, thenew equipment may adversely affect theengine control system and other electronicparts.

WARNING∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibitthe use of cellular phones whiledriving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended.Exercise extreme caution at all timesso full attention may be given to ve-hicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while talkingon the phone, pull off the road to asafe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic controlmodules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not routethe antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-waveratio as recommended by themanufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-12Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13NISSAN Intelligent Key® batterydischarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Starting the engine (gasoline engine only) . . . . . . 5-15

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-16Starting the engine (diesel only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Engine protection mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Automatic transmission (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-23

BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-26BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-33RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34How to enable/disable the RCTAsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Using 4–Wheel Drive (4WD) (if so equipped). . . . . . 5-45Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system. . . . . . . . .5-58Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . 5-61Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . 5-63System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64How to enable/disable the sonarsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-70

WARNING∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from slidingor shifting. Do not place cargo higherthan the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-gerous. It can cause unconsciousnessor death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with allwindows fully open, and have the ve-hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-gine running for any extended lengthof time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)closed while driving, otherwise ex-haust gases could be drawn into thepassenger compartment. If you mustdrive with one of these open, followthese precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the liftgate or thebody, follow the manufacturer’s rec-ommendation to prevent carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body shouldbe inspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumesare entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system,underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

NOTE:

If the vehicle engine experiences exces-sive fuel consumption or produces ex-cessive smoke it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

THREE-WAY CATALYST (if soequipped)The three-way catalyst is an emission con-trol device installed in the exhaust system.Exhaust gases in the three-way catalystare burned at high temperatures to helpreduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

WARNING∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-mals or flammable materials awayfrom the exhaust systemcomponents.

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s abilityto help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions are de-tected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warmingit up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, and it isthe driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-rect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumi-nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illu-minated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunc-tion indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, includ-ing the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

Starting and driving 5-3

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-erly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSdoes not monitor the tire pressure ofthe spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system maynot detect a sudden drop in tire pres-sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light doesnot automatically turn off when the tirepressure is adjusted. After your tires areinflated to the recommended pressure,the vehicle must be driven at speedsabove 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the low tire pressurewarning light. Use a tire pressure gaugeto check the tire pressure.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warn-ing appears in the vehicle informationdisplay when the low tire pressurewarning light is illuminated and low tirepressure is detected. The “Tire PressureLow – Add Air” warning turns off whenthe low tire pressure warning light turnsoff.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warn-ing does not appear if the low tire pres-sure warning light illuminates to indi-cate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls dependingon the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-eration and the outside temperature.Do not reduce the tire pressure afterdriving because the tire pressure risesafter driving. Low outside temperaturecan lower the temperature of the airinside the tire which can cause a lowertire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light toilluminate. If the warning light illumi-nates, check the tire pressure for all fourtires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information labelis located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tirepressure warning light” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section and “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.




∙ If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-ing with under-inflated tires may per-manently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury.Check the tire pressure for all fourtires. Adjust the tire pressure to therecommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light off. If you have a flattire, replace it with a spare tire as soonas possible. (For additional informa-tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case ofemergency” section for changing aflat tire.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, when aspare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute.Have your tires replaced and/or TPMSsystem reset as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

CAUTIONDo not place metalized film or anymetal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-dows. This may cause poor reception ofthe signals from the tire pressure sen-sors, and the TPMS will not functionproperly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-porarily interfere with the operation of theTPMS and cause the low tire pressurewarning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-lar radio frequencies are near the ve-hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) ora DC/AC converter is being used in ornear the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light mayilluminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheeland tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and theID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified byNISSAN.


FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


For Canada:

This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

WARNINGAfter rotating the tires, do not use theEasy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tirepressure. Instead use a gauge to adjustthe tires to the correct pressure in ac-cordance with Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert providesvisual and audible signals outside the ve-hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-ommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place theshift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-sition. Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure isreached, the horn beeps once and thehazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

∙ If the tire is over-inflated more thanapproximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the hornbeeps and the hazard indicatorsflash three times. To correct the pres-sure, push the core of the valve stemon the tire briefly to release pressure.When the pressure reaches the des-ignated pressure, the horn beepsonce.

∙ If the hazard indicator does not flashwithin approximately 15 seconds af-ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert isnot operating.

∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire Alert under the following con-ditions:

– If there is interference from an exter-nal device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflationdevice is not sufficient to inflate thetire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS.5-6 Starting and driving

– There is a malfunction in the horn orhazard indicators.

– The identification code of the tirepressure sensor is not registered tothe system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sen-sor is low.

∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-erate due to TPMS interference, movethe vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backwardor forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use atire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other types ofvehicles.

They have higher ground clearance thanpassenger cars to make them capable ofperforming in a variety of on-pavementand off-road applications. This gives thema higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-hicles. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allow-ing you to anticipate problems. However,they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional 2-WheelDrive vehicles any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to perform satis-factorily under off-road conditions. If at allpossible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result inloss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll-over crash, an unbelted person is signifi-cantly more likely to die than a personwearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Drivingsafety precautions” in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNINGFailure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in lossof control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or suddensteering maneuvers, because these drivingpractices could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control couldresult in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,particularly if the loss of control causesthe vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid drivingwhen tired. Never drive when under the in-fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs whichmay cause drowsiness). Always wear yourseat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section of this manual, and also in-struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,an unbelted or improperly belted personis significantly more likely to be injuredor killed than a person properly wearinga seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERYWhile driving, the right side or left sidewheels may unintentionally leave the roadsurface. If this occurs, maintain control ofthe vehicle by following the procedure be-low. Please note that this procedure is onlya general guide. The vehicle must be drivenas appropriate based on the conditions ofthe vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.


2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release theaccelerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer thevehicle to follow the road while vehiclespeed is reduced. Do not attempt todrive the vehicle back onto the roadsurface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turnthe steering wheel until both tires re-turn to the road surface. When all tiresare on the road surface, steer the ve-hicle to stay in the appropriate drivinglane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-turn the vehicle to the road surfacebased on vehicle, road or traffic con-ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to astop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSRapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” canoccur if the tire is punctured or is damageddue to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid airpressure loss can also be caused by drivingon under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-dling and stability of the vehicle, especiallyat highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss bymaintaining the correct air pressure andvisually inspecting the tires for wear anddamage. For additional information, referto “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly losesair pressure or “blows-out” while driving,maintain control of the vehicle by followingthe procedure below. Please note that thisprocedure is only a general guide. The ve-hicle must be driven as appropriate basedon the conditions of the vehicle, road andtraffic.

WARNINGThe following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pres-sure. Losing control of the vehicle maycause a collision and result in personalinjury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pullsin the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the acceleratorpedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release theaccelerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safelocation off the road and away fromtraffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-ally stop the vehicle.


6. Turn on the hazard warning flashersand contact a roadside emergencyservice to change the tire. For addi-tional information, refer to “Changing aflat tire” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNINGNever drive under the influence of alco-hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstreamreduces coordination, delays reactiontime and impairs judgement. Drivingafter drinking alcohol increases thelikelihood of being involved in an acci-dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-tionally, if you are injured in an accident,alcohol can increase the severity of theinjury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-ever, you must choose not to drive underthe influence of alcohol. Every year thou-sands of people are injured or killed inalcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-cal laws vary on what is considered to belegally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and mostpeople underestimate the effects of alco-hol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’tdrive if your ability to operate your vehicle isimpaired by alcohol, drugs, or some otherphysical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONSYour NISSAN is designed for both normaland off-road use. However, avoid driving indeep water or mud as your NISSAN ismainly designed for leisure use, unlike aconventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2-Wheel Drive models areless capable than 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)models for rough road driving and extrica-tion when stuck in deep snow or mud, orthe like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING∙ Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up orstraight down the slopes. Off-road ve-hicles can tip over sideways muchmore easily than they can forward orbackward.

∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve-hicle. If you drive up them, you maystall. If you drive down them, you maynot be able to control your speed. Ifyou drive across them, you may rollover.

∙ Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.


∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could causean accident.

∙ If your engine stalls or you cannotmake it to the top of a steep hill, neverattempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear andapply brakes to control your speed.

∙ Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat andfade, resulting in loss of control andan accident. Apply brakes lightly anduse a low gear to control your speed.

∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrownaround when driving over rough ter-rain. Properly secure all cargo so it willnot be thrown forward and cause in-jury to you or your passengers.

∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo areaas far forward and as low as possible.Do not equip the vehicle with tireslarger than specified in this manual.This could cause your vehicle to rollover.

∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengershave their seat belts fastened.

∙ Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher cen-ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

∙ Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could resultin serious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WDequipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-mometer (such as the dynamometersused by some states for emissionstesting) or similar equipment even ifthe other two wheels are raised off theground. Make sure you inform test fa-cility personnel that your vehicle isequipped with 4WD before it is placedon a dynamometer. Using the wrongtest equipment may result in drive-train damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in seri-ous vehicle damage or personalinjury.

∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at highspeeds. Your NISSAN 4WD vehicle hasa higher center of gravity than a pas-senger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as passenger cars. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly couldresult in loss of control and/or a roll-over accident.


∙ Always use tires of the same type,size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), and tread pattern onall four wheels. Install tire chains onthe rear wheels when driving on slip-pery roads and drive carefully.

∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. Foradditional information, refer to “Wetbrakes” in this section.

∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

∙ Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent mainte-nance may be required. For additionalinformation, refer to “Maintenanceschedules” in the “Maintenance andschedules” section of this manual.

WARNINGDo not operate the push-button igni-tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-cept in an emergency. (The engine willstop when the ignition switch is pushedthree consecutive times in quick suc-cession or the ignition switch is pushedand held for more than 2 seconds.) If theengine stops while the vehicle is beingdriven, this could lead to a crash andserious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed withoutdepressing the brake pedal, the ignitionswitch position will illuminate as follows:

Push center:

∙ Once to change to ACC.

∙ Two times to change to ON.

∙ Three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically re-turn to the LOCK position when any door iseither opened or closed with the switch inthe OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that theignition switch position cannot be placedin the OFF position until the shift lever ismoved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushedtoward the OFF position, proceed as fol-lows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignitionswitch position will change to the ONposition.

3. Push the ignition switch again to theOFF position.

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


The shift lever can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the brake pedal isdepressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the push-button ignition switch cannotbe moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-tion are displayed in the meter. For addi-tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-mation display warnings and indicators” inthe “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

OPERATING RANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only beused when the Intelligent Key is within thespecified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almostdischarged or strong radio waves are pres-ent near the operating location, the Intelli-gent Key system’s operating range be-comes narrower and may not functionproperly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even some-one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,to push the ignition switch to start the en-gine.

The operating range of the engine startfunction is inside of the vehicle �1 .

∙ The luggage area is not included in theoperating range, but the Intelligent Keymay function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on theinstrument panel or inside the glovebox, storage bin or door pocket, the In-telligent Key may not function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near thedoor or window outside the vehicle, theIntelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONSLOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked inthis position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when itis pushed to the ACC position while carry-ing the Intelligent Key.

LSD2456


The ignition switch will lock when any dooris opened or closed with the ignitionswitched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-ries, such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that willplace the ignition switch in the OFF positionafter a period of time under the followingconditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

∙ The hazard lamps are off.

∙ The turn signals are off.

The battery saver feature will be canceled ifany of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P(Park) position.

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

∙ The hazard lamps are turned on.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that willplace the ignition switch in the OFF posi-tion, if the vehicle is not running, after sometime under the following conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

∙ The hazard lamps are off.

∙ The turn signals are off.

The battery saver feature will be canceled ifany of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P(Park) position.

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

∙ The hazard lamps are turned on.

∙ The turn signals are turned on.

CAUTIONDo not leave the vehicle with the igni-tion switch in the ACC or ON positionwhen the engine is not running for anextended period. This can discharge thebattery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF positionwhen the engine is turned off using theignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFFTo shut off the engine in an emergencysituation while driving, perform the follow-ing procedure:

∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch threeconsecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-onds, or

∙ Push and hold the ignition switch formore than 2 seconds.


NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®BATTERY DISCHARGEIf the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®is discharged, or environmental conditionsinterfere with the Intelligent Key operation,start the engine according to the followingprocedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-tion.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime willsound.)

After step 3 is performed, when theignition switch is pushed without de-pressing the brake pedal, the ignitionswitch position will change to the ONposition.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress-ing the brake pedal within 10 secondsafter the chime sounds. The engine willstart.

NOTE:

∙ When the ignition switch is pushed tothe ON position or the engine isstarted by the above procedure, theIntelligent Key battery discharge in-dicator appears in the vehicle infor-mation display even when the Intelli-gent Key is inside the vehicle. This isnot a malfunction. To turn off the In-telligent Key battery discharge indi-cator, touch the ignition switch withthe Intelligent Key again.

∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis-charge indicator appears, replace thebattery as soon as possible. For addi-tional information, refer to “Batteryreplacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding thedevice (which may have caused the in-terference) separate from the regis-tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.

SSD0860


∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,coolant, brake fluid, Diesel Exhaust Fluid(Diesel only) and windshield-washerfluid as frequently as possible, or at leastwhenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights areclean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-ance and condition. Also check tires forproper inflation.

∙ Check that all doors are closed.

∙ Position seat and adjust headrestraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lightswhen the ignition switch is placed in theON position. For additional information,refer to “Warning lights, indicator lightsand audible reminders” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of thismanual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.The starter is designed not to oper-ate unless the shift lever is in either P(Park) or N (Neutral).

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition. Depress the brake pedal andpush the ignition switch to start theengine.

To start the engine immediately, pushand release the ignition switch whiledepressing the brake pedal with theignition switch in any position.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start inextremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the acceleratorpedal a little (approximately 1/3 to thefloor) and while holding, crank the en-gine. Release the accelerator pedalwhen the engine starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-cause it is flooded, depress the accel-erator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it. Push the ignition switchto the ON position to start crankingthe engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stopcranking by pushing the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. Aftercranking the engine, release the ac-celerator pedal. Crank the enginewith your foot off the acceleratorpedal by depressing the brake pedaland pushing the ignition switch tostart the engine. If the engine starts,but fails to run, repeat the above pro-cedure.

CAUTIONDo not operate the starter for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start, push the ignition switchto the OFF position and wait 10 secondsbefore cranking again, otherwise thestarter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least30 seconds after starting. Do not racethe engine while warming it up. Drive ata moderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather. In coldweather, keep the engine running for aminimum of 2 to 3 minutes beforeshutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of timemay make the vehicle more difficult tostart.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE (gasolineengine only)


5. To stop the engine, move the shift leverto the P (Park) position and push theignition switch to the OFF position.

In preparation for the next engine start, theengine may have a slightly delayed shutoffafter placing the ignition switch in the OFFposition, depending on the driving condi-tions.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situationsthat can lead to potential battery dis-charge and potential no-start conditionssuch as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularlyand/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if soequipped)Vehicles started with the Remote EngineStart require the ignition switch to beplaced in the ON position before the shiftlever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-tion. To place the ignition switch in the ONposition, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is onyou.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ONposition.


For additional information on starting yourdiesel engine, refer to the Titan Diesel Own-er’s Manual.

STARTING THE ENGINE (diesel only)


ENGINE PROTECTION MODEThe engine has an engine protection modeto reduce the chance of damage if thecoolant temperature becomes too high(for example, when climbing steep gradesin high temperatures with heavy loads,such as when towing a trailer). When theengine temperature reaches a certainlevel:

∙ The engine coolant temperature gaugewill move toward the H position.

∙ Engine power may be reduced.

∙ The air conditioning cooling functionmay be automatically turned off for ashort time (the blower will continue tooperate).

Engine power and, under some conditions,vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speedcan be controlled with the acceleratorpedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate atthe desired speed. The transmission willdownshift or upshift as it reaches pre-scribed shift points. You can also shiftmanually.

As driving conditions change and enginecoolant temperature is reduced, vehiclespeed can be increased using the accel-

erator pedal, and the air conditioning cool-ing function will automatically be turnedback on.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) mayalso come on if the engine coolant tem-perature is not reduced or the air condi-tioning cooling function does not turn backon. If only it remains on, you do not need tohave your vehicle towed, but have it in-spected soon. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Foradditional information, refer to “Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

WARNINGOverheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase the chanceof a collision. Be especially careful whendriving. If the vehicle cannot maintain asafe driving speed, pull to the side of theroad in a safe area. Allow the engine tocool and return to normal operation. Foradditional information, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

CAUTIONRunning the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)

WARNING∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shiftingis completed. Failure to do so couldcause you to lose control and have anaccident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forwardor reverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-versing. This could cause an accidentor damage the transmission.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


∙ Except in an emergency, do not shiftto the N (Neutral) position while driv-ing. Coasting with the transmission inthe N (Neutral) position may cause se-rious damage to the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

CAUTIONTo avoid possible damage to your ve-hicle, when stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal. Thefoot brake should be used for thispurpose.

The A/T in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power andsmooth operation.

The recommended operating proceduresfor this transmission are shown on the fol-lowing pages. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance and driv-ing enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

WARNING∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shiftingis completed. Failure to do so couldcause you to lose control and have anaccident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forwardor reverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-versing. This could cause an accidentor damage the transmission.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shiftto the N (Neutral) position while driv-ing. Coasting with the transmission inthe N (Neutral) position may cause se-rious damage to the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

CAUTIONTo avoid possible damage to your ve-hicle, when stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal. Thefoot brake should be used for thispurpose.

1. After starting the engine, fully depressthe foot brake pedal before moving theshift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand move the shift lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then graduallystart the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designedso the foot brake pedal MUST be de-pressed before shifting from P (Park) toany drive position while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignitionswitch is placed in the LOCK or OFF posi-tion.


To move the shift lever:

: Shift while depressing the brakepedal

: Shift without depressing the brakepedal

ShiftingAfter starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and move the shift lever out ofthe P (Park) position.

WARNINGApply the parking brake if the shift leveris in any position while the engine is notrunning. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal in-jury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF orACC position for any reason while the ve-hicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) posi-tion, the ignition switch cannot be placed inthe LOCK position. Move the shift lever tothe P (Park) position, then the ignitionswitch can be placed in the LOCK position.

P (Park)

CAUTIONTo prevent transmission damage, usethe P (Park) position only when the ve-hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position whenthe vehicle is parked or when starting theengine. Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped.

The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift lever from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on ahill, apply the parking brake first, then movethe shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTIONTo prevent transmission damage, usethe R (Reverse) position only when thevehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before selecting the R (Reverse)position. The brake pedal must be de-pressed to move the shift lever from P(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position toR (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to N (Neutral) andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicle ismoving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

LSD2468


Manual shift modeWhen the manual shift mode switch ispushed while driving, the transmission en-ters the manual shift mode. Shift rangescan be selected manually.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range isdisplayed on the position indicator in themeter. After pushing the manual shiftmode switch, the position indicator variesdepending on the gear position and ve-hicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6←→ M7* ←→ D

*If so equipped

M7 (Seventh) (if so equipped)

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.

M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6←→ M7

M7 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.

M6 (Sixth)


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

M6 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter

M5 (Fifth)


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5


M4 (Fourth)

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4


M3 (Third)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.


M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3


M2 (Second)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.


M1 ←→ M2


LSD2457


M1 (First)

Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-ing on steep downhill grades.

M1 will be displayed on the position indica-tor on the meter.

∙ Remember not to drive at high speedsfor extended periods of time in lowerthan M4 range. This reduces fueleconomy.

When shifting up

Push the shift switch to the + (up) side.(Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down

Push the shift switch to the � (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

∙ The transmission will automaticallydownshift the gears. (For example, if youselect the 3rd range, the transmissionwill shift down between the 3rd and 1stgears.)

∙ Pushing the shift switch rapidly will shiftthe ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode

Press and hold the +(UP) button to returnthe transmission to the normal drivingmode.

∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission may not shift to the selectedgear immediately because of vehiclespeed. The transmission will upshiftor downshift when vehicle speedmatches the programmed transmis-sion shift points. This helps maintaindriving performance and reduces thechance of vehicle damage or loss ofcontrol.

∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission will not upshift to a highergear than is manually selected. Whenthe vehicle speed decreases, thetransmission automatically shiftsdown and shifts to 1st gear before thevehicle comes to a stop.

Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the shift levermay not be moved from the P (Park) posi-tion even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, release the shiftlock. The shift lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, for models without theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System, thesteering wheel will be locked unless theignition switch is placed in the ON position.This allows the vehicle to be moved if thebattery is discharged.

LSD2594


To push the shift lock release, complete thefollowing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.


3. Remove the shift lock release cover. If ascrewdriver is used to remove thecover, it should be wrapped in a protec-tive cloth to prevent damage to thecover and surrounding plastic.

4. Insert a small object or finger in theshift lock release slot and push.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)position while holding the shift lock re-lease.

6. Now the vehicle may be moved to thedesired location.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P(Park), have the automatic transmissionsystem checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

WARNINGIf the shift lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is de-pressed, the stop lights may not work.Malfunctioning stop lights could causean accident injuring yourself andothers.

Accelerator downshift— in D (Drive) position —For passing or hill climbing, depress theaccelerator pedal to the floor. This shiftsthe transmission down into a lower gear,depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, pleasenote that the transmission will be locked inany of the forward gears according to thecondition.

If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheelspinning and subsequent hard braking,the fail-safe system may be activated.This will occur even if all electrical cir-cuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and wait for 3 seconds. Thenplace the ignition switch back in the ONposition. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does notreturn to its normal operating condition,have the transmission checked and re-paired, if necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.


WARNING∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fullyengaged.


To engage: Firmly depress the parkingbrake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-sition.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedaland it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-ing light goes out.

WARNINGFailure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the BSWsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.

∙ The BSW system is not a replacementfor proper driving procedures and isnot designed to prevent contact withvehicles or objects. When changinglanes, always use the side and rearmirrors and turn and look in the direc-tion your vehicle will move to ensure itis safe to change lanes. Never relysolely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver ofother vehicles in adjacent lanes whenchanging lanes.

LSD0158

PARKING BRAKE BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if soequipped)


The BSW system uses radar sensors �1installed near the rear bumper to detectother vehicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles oneither side of your vehicle within the detec-tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-tion zone starts from the outside mirror ofyour vehicle and extends approximately10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, andapproximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

LSD2619Detection zone

SSD1030


1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATIONThe BSW system operates above approxi-mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in thedetection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal isthen activated, the system chimes (twice)and the side BSW/RCTA indicator lightflashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator lightcontinues to flash until the detected ve-hicle leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-nates for a few seconds when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-cator light is adjusted automatically de-pending on the brightness of the ambientlight.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zoneafter the driver activates the turn signal,then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator lightflashes and no chime sounds. For addi-tional information, refer to “BSW drivingsituations” in this section.

LSD2605


HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THEBSW SYSTEMWhen the BSW system is enabled in thevehicle information display, the system canbe turned off temporarily by pushing thewarning systems switch. For additional in-formation, refer to “Warning systemsswitch” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the BSW system:

1. Press the button until “Settings”displays in the vehicle information dis-play. Use the button to select“Driver Assistance” and press ENTER.Select “Driving Aids” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press theENTER button.

NOTE:

∙ When enabling/disabling the system,the system will retain current set-tings even if the engine is restarted.

∙ When the BSW system is turned on,the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in thevehicle information display illumi-nates.

LSD2607


BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNINGListed below are the system limitationsfor the BSW system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.

∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve-hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensors may not be able todetect and activate BSW when certainobjects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, lowheight vehicles, or high groundclearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detec-tion zone when you acceleratefrom a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacentlane at a speed approximately thesame as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly frombehind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through thedetection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehiclesin a row, the vehicles after the firstvehicle may not be detected if theyare traveling close together.

∙ The radar sensor’s detection zone isdesigned based on a standard lanewidth. When driving in a wider lane,the radar sensors may not detect ve-hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensorsmay detect vehicles driving two lanesaway.

∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-nore most stationary objects; how-ever, objects such as guardrails, walls,foliage and parked vehicles may oc-casionally be detected. This is a nor-mal operation condition.

∙ The following conditions may reducethe ability of the radar to detect othervehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up onthe vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (includingtransparent material), install accesso-ries or apply additional paint near theradar sensors. These conditions mayreduce the ability of the radar to de-tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audiosystem volume, open vehicle window)will interfere with the chime sound,and it may not be heard.


BSW DRIVING SITUATIONSIndicatoronIndicatoroffIndicatorflashing

Another vehicle approachingfrom behindIllustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-tection zone from behind in an adjacentlane.

Illustration 2: If the driver activates theturn signal when another vehicle is in thedetection zone, then the system chimes(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙ The radar sensors may not detect ve-hicles which are approaching rapidlyfrom behind.

∙ If the driver activates the turn signalbefore a vehicle enters the detectionzone, the side indicator light will flashbut no chime will sound when theother vehicle is detected.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behindLSD2299

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behindLSD2300


Overtaking another vehicleIllustration 3: The side indicator light illu-minates if you overtake a vehicle and thatvehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates theturn signal while another vehicle is in thedetection zone, then the system chimes(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙ When overtaking several vehicles in arow, the vehicles after the first vehiclemay not be detected if they are trav-eling close together.

∙ The radar sensors may not detectslower moving vehicles if they arepassed quickly.


Illustration 3 – Overtaking anothervehicle

LSD2302Illustration 4 – Overtaking another

vehicle

LSD2303


Entering from the sideIllustration 5: The side indicator light illu-minates if a vehicle enters the detectionzone from either side.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates theturn signal while another vehicle is in thedetection zone, then the system chimes(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:


∙ The radar sensors may not detect avehicle which is traveling at about thesame speed as your vehicle when itenters the detection zone.

Illustration 5 – Entering from the sideLSD2305

Illustration 6 – Entering from the sideLSD2308


SYSTEM TEMPORARILYUNAVAILABLEWhen radar blockage is detected, the sys-tem will be deactivated automatically. The“Side Radar Obstruction” warning messagewill appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator(white) will blink �A in the vehicle informa-tion display.

The system is not available until the condi-tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-tion may also be caused by objects such asice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-sors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, theRCTA system (if so equipped) will alsostop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,the system will resume automatically.

LSD2608


MalfunctionIf the BSW system malfunctions, it will turnoff automatically. The system malfunctionwarning message with the BSW/RCTA indi-cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in-formation display.

NOTE:


Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place thevehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-sage continues to appear, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe two radar sensors �1 for the BSW andRCTA systems are located near the rearbumper. Always keep the area near the ra-dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be causedby objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructingthe area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-ent material), install accessories or applyadditional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area aroundthe radar sensors. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer if the area aroundthe radar sensors is damaged due to acollision.

Radio frequency statementFor USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.

LSD2619


For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canadalicence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operationis subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Droit applicable: Canada 310

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNRd’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitationest autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire debrouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptibled’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwattsWARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the RCTAsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.

∙ The RCTA system is not a replacementfor proper driving procedures and isnot designed to prevent contact withvehicles or objects. When backing outof a parking space, always use theside and rear mirrors and turn andlook in the direction your vehicle willmove. Never rely solely on the RCTAsystem.

The RCTA system will assist you whenbacking out from a parking space. Whenthe vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-signed to detect other vehicles approach-ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If thesystem detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)(if so equipped)


1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATIONThe RCTA system can help alert the driverof an approaching vehicle when the driveris backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) andthe vehicle speed is less than approxi-mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system isoperational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehiclefrom the side, the system chimes a sound(single beep) and the side BSW/RCTA indi-cator light on the side of the vehicle is ap-proaching from flashes.

LSD2605


The RCTA system uses radar sensors �1installed on both sides near the rear bum-per to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors �1 can detect an ap-proaching vehicle from up to approxi-mately 66 ft (20 m) away.

LSD2216 LSD2619


HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THERCTA SYSTEMWhen the RCTA system is enabled in thevehicle information display, the system canbe turned off temporarily by pushing theFront and rear sonar system OFF switch.For additional information, refer to “Frontand rear sonar system OFF switch” in the“Instruments and controls” section of thismanual.

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the RCTA system:

1. Press the button until “Settings”displays in the vehicle information dis-play. Use the button to select“Driver Assistance” and press ENTER.Select “Driving Aids” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Blind Spot (BSW)” and press theENTER button.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system,the system setting will be retained evenif the engine is restarted.

LSD2607


RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNINGListed below are the system limitationsfor the RCTA system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.

∙ Always check surroundings and turnto check what is behind you beforebacking up. The radar sensors detectapproaching (moving) vehicles. Theradar sensors cannot detect everyobject such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,animals or child-operated toyvehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speedsgreater than approximately19 mph (30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speedslower than approximately 5 mph(8 km/h)

∙ The radar sensors may not detect ap-proaching vehicles in certainsituations:

– Illustration �A : When a vehicleparked next to you obstructs thebeam of the radar sensor.

LSD3195


– Illustration �B : When the vehicle isparked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration �C : When the vehicle isparked on inclined ground.

– Illustration �D : When an approach-ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’sparking lot aisle.

– Illustration �E : When the angleformed by your vehicle and ap-proaching vehicle is small.

∙ The following conditions may reducethe ability of the radar to detect othervehicles:– Severe weather– Road spray– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (includingtransparent material), install accesso-ries or apply additional paint near theradar sensors. These conditions mayreduce the ability of the radar to de-tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio systemvolume, open vehicle window) will in-terfere with the chime sound, and itmay not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach-ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-site direction (Illustration 2), a chime maynot be sounded by the RCTA system af-ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1LSD2043

Illustration 2LSD2044


SYSTEM TEMPORARILYUNAVAILABLEWhen radar blockage is detected, the sys-tem will be deactivated automatically. The“Side Radar Obstruction” warning messagewill appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator(white) will blink �A in the vehicle informa-tion display.

The systems are not available until theconditions no longer exist.



NOTE:


Action to takeWhen the above conditions no longer exist,the system will resume automatically.

LSD2608


MalfunctionWhen the RCTA system malfunctions, it willturn off automatically. The system mal-function warning message with theBSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear inthe vehicle information display.

NOTE:


Action to takeStop the vehicle in a safe location, place thevehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-sage continues to appear, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe two radar sensors �1 for the BSW andRCTA systems are located near the rearbumper. Always keep the area near the ra-dar sensors clean.



Check for and remove objects obstructingthe area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-ent material), install accessories or applyadditional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area aroundthe radar sensors. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer if the area aroundthe radar sensors is damaged due to acollision.

Radio frequency statementFor USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.

LSD2619


For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canadalicence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operationis subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Droit applicable: Canada 310

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNRd’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareilsradio exempts de licence. L’exploitation estautorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire debrouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptibled’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-tions, it cancels automatically. The(green) indicator illuminates in the ve-hicle information display then blinks towarn the driver.

∙ If the (green) indicator blinks, pushthe ON/OFF switch off and have thesystem checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ The (green) indicator may blinkwhen the ON/OFF switch is pushed ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-erly set the cruise control system, usethe following procedures.

WARNINGDo not use the cruise control when driv-ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that variesin speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

LSD2464

CRUISE CONTROL


CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-out keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON/OFF switch on. The (white) indi-cator in the vehicle information display willilluminate.To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. The(green) indicator in the vehicle informationdisplay will illuminate. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintainsthe set speed.

∙ To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steephills. If this happens, drive without thecruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the indi-cator in the vehicle information displaygoes out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the indicatorgoes out.

∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. Theindicator in the vehicle information dis-play goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-celed and the indicator in the vehicleinformation display goes out if:

∙ You depress the brake pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SETswitch. The preset speed is deletedfrom memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the COAST/SETswitch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RESswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed increases by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, pushthe COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST/SETswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed decreases by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push andrelease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehiclereturns to the last set cruising speed whenthe vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).


CAUTIONDuring the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to ob-tain maximum engine performanceand ensure the future reliability andeconomy of your new vehicle. Failure tofollow these recommendations may re-sult in shortened engine life and re-duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-stant speed, either fast or slow, and donot run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-sible.

∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle orother parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel EfficientDriving Tips to help you achieve the mostfuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and BrakePedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator andbrake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-muting and coast whenever pos-sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate andminimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with trafficlights allows you to reduce your num-ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-mize red light stops and improve fuelefficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at HigherVehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is moreefficient to open windows to cool thevehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is moreefficient to use A/C to cool the vehicledue to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabinwhen the A/C is on reduces coolingload.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and notexceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (wherelegally allowed) can improve fuel effi-ciency due to reduced aerodynamicdrag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distancebehind other vehicles reduces un-necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipatechanges in speed permits reducedbraking and smooth accelerationchanges.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to roadconditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highwaydriving helps maintain a steadyspeed.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS


∙ Cruise control is particularly effectivein providing fuel savings when drivingon flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system todetermine the best route to savetime.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safefor stops exceeding 30–60 secondssaves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers touse special lanes to maintain cruis-ing speed through the toll and avoidstopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impactto fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than30 seconds of idling at start-up toeffectively circulate the engine oil be-fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-ating temperature more quicklywhile driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parkingarea or in the shade whenever pos-sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, openingthe windows will help to reduce theinside temperature faster, resulting inreduced demand on your A/C sys-tem.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduledmaintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correctpressure. Low tire pressure increasestire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

∙ For vehicles equipped with , use4H or 4L position only when necessary.4-Wheel Drive operation lowers fueleconomy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engineoil. For additional information, refer to“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tions” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


WARNING∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could resultin serious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WDequipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-mometer (such as the dynamometersused by some states for emissionstesting) or similar equipment even ifthe other two wheels are raised off theground. Make sure you inform test fa-cility personnel that your vehicle isequipped with 4WD before it is placedon a dynamometer. Using the wrongtest equipment may result in drive-train damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in seri-ous vehicle damage or personalinjury.

CAUTION∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or

4LO position on dry hard surfaceroads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in4H or 4LO may cause unnecessarynoise, tire wear and increased fuelconsumption.

If the 4WD vehicle information displaywarning message turns on when youare driving on dry hard surface roads:

– In the 4H position, shift the 4WDshift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position, stop the ve-hicle, move the shift lever to the N(Neutral) position with the brakepedal depressed, and shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

∙ If the vehicle information displaywarning message is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if soequipped)


TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESThe part time 4WD system provides 3 posi-tions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can selectthe desired drive mode according to thedriving conditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD shift switchposition Wheels driven

IndicatorUse conditions 4WD shift procedure4WD shift Transfer 4LO posi-

tion2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, pavedroads (Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> 4HThe 4WD shift indicator will indicate that thetransfer shift position is engaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFTLEVER TO THE N (NEUTRAL) POSITION INTHIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERA-TION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

4HFour wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or

snow-covered roads

N (Neutral)

*1May blink

N (Neutral) disengages theautomatic transmission(A/T) mechanical parkinglock, which will allow the ve-hicle to roll. Do not leave thetransfer shift position in N(Neutral).*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. With the brake pedal depressed, move

the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.3. With the brake pedal depressed, de-

press and turn the 4WD shift switch to4LO or 4H.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGEBETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UN-LESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VE-HICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL ANDMOVED THE SHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL). *3

4LO

Four wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximumpower and traction is re-quired (for example, on steepgrades or rocky, sandy,muddy roads)


*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the 4LO indicator stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedureis completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady,the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the N (Neutral) position.- If the 4WD vehicle information display warning message illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case tothe correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by placing the ignition switch in the OFF position.


- Check that the 4WD vehicle information display warning message turns off. If the warning message in the vehicle information displaystays on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to the desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be in the ON position and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift totake place and for the 4WD shift and 4LO position indicators to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicatorswill be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turnon when 4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is usedto select either 2WD or 4WD depending onthe driving conditions. There are threetypes of drive modes available: 2WD, 4H and4LO.The 4WD shift switch electronically controlsthe transfer case operation. Rotate theswitch to move between each mode: 2WD,4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicleMUST be stationary, move the shift leverto N (Neutral), and depress the brakepedal. The switch must be pushed andturned to select 4LO.

WARNING∙ When parking, apply the parking

brake before stopping the engine andmake sure that the 4WD shift indica-tor is on and the Automatic Transmis-sion Park (ATP) warning light goes off.Otherwise, the vehicle could unex-pectedly move even if the A/T is in theP (Park) position.

∙ The 4LO indicator must stop blinkingand remain illuminated or turn off be-fore shifting the transmission intogear. If the shift lever is shifted fromthe N (Neutral) position to any othergear when the 4LO indicator is blink-ing, the vehicle may moveunexpectedly.

CAUTION∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

∙ The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumptionand higher oil temperatures, andcould damage drivetrain compo-nents. Speeds over 62 mph(100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended.

∙ The 4LO position provides maximumpower and traction. Avoid raising ve-hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-mum speed is approximately 31 mph(50 km/h).

∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switchwhen making a turn or reversing.

∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD and 4H) while driving onsteep downhill grades. Use the enginebrake and low A/T gears (M1 or M2) forengine braking.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD and 4H) with the rearwheels spinning.

∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving ondry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO maycause unnecessary noise and tirewear. NISSAN recommends driving inthe 2WD position under theseconditions.

∙ The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at lowambient temperatures and the trans-fer 4LO position indicator may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while youcan change the 4WD transfer case be-tween 4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

∙ Drive carefully according to the roadsurface conditions.


When the vehicle is stuck,

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

∙ Place stones or wooden blocks underthe tires to free the vehicle.

∙ Use the Electronic locking rear differen-tial (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Foradditional information, refer to “Elec-tronic locking rear differential (E-lock)system” in this section.

∙ If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock thevehicle back and forth between reverseand drive gears.

∙ If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under thetires. Then try the recovery proceduresabove. Tire chains may be effective.

CAUTION∙ Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires

will sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

∙ Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations∙ Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending ondriving conditions.

∙ If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the 4H or 4LO, youmay feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.

∙ You may hear some noise as the sys-tem shifts or engages. This is not ab-normal.

CAUTION∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switchwhen making a turn or reversing.

∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switchwhile driving on steep downhillgrades. Use the engine brake and lowautomatic transmission gears (M1 orM2) for engine braking.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

∙ Before placing the 4WD shift switch inthe 4H position from 2WD, ensure thevehicle speed is less than 62 mph(100 km/h). Failure to do so can dam-age the 4WD system.

∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD2463


4WD shift indicatorThe 4WD shift indicator is located in thevehicle information display.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shiftindicator will illuminate the position se-lected by the 4WD shift switch.

∙ The 4WD shift indicator may come onwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator willstay on.

∙ If the 4WD vehicle information displaywarning message comes on, the 4WDindicator goes out.

CAUTION∙ If the 4WD shift indicator indication

changes to 2WD when the 4WD shiftswitch is shifted to the 4H position atlow ambient temperatures, the 2WDmode may be being engaged due tomalfunctioning drive system. If the in-dicator does not return to normal andthe 4WD vehicle information displaywarning message comes on, have thesystem checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

LSD2328


Warning messageWarning message Warning message comes on when:

Vehicle information display

4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual

There is a malfunction in the 4–Wheel Drive system

FRT & RR tire size difference: See Owner’s Manual The difference in wheel rotation is large

CAUTION∙ If the warning message comes on

during operation or rapidly afterstopping the vehicle for a while, haveyour vehicle checked as soon as pos-sible. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warn-ing message turns on.

∙ When the warning message comeson, the 2WD mode may be engagedeven if the 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Beespecially careful when driving. If cor-responding parts are malfunctioning,the 4WD mode will not be engagedeven if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.

∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or4LO position on dry hard surfaceroads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in4H or 4LO may cause unnecessarynoise, tire wear and increased fuelconsumption.

If the 4WD warning message turns onwhen you are driving on dry hard sur-face roads:


– In the 4H position, shift the 4WDshift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position, stop the ve-hicle, move the automatic trans-mission shift lever to the N (Neu-tral) position with the brake pedaldepressed, and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning message is still on afterthe above operation, have your ve-hicle checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

∙ The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warningmessage on.

The E-Lock system can provide additionaltraction and should only be used when avehicle has become or is becoming stuck.This system operates by electronically“locking” the two rear drive wheels to-gether, allowing them to turn at the samespeed. The system is used when it is notpossible to free a stuck vehicle even whenusing the 4LO position (4-Wheel Drive ve-hicles).When added traction is required, activatethe E-Lock system by pushing the switchon. For additional information, refer to“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual. Once thesystem fully engages, the indicator light inthe instrument panel will remain on. Whenthe system is activated, both rear wheelswill engage, providing added traction.

The rear wheels may momentarily slip ormove to engage the system, and the sys-tem will only engage up to approximately4 mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, thesystem should be turned off and drivingresumed.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is dis-abled and the ABS warning light illumi-nates when the E-Lock system is on.

WARNING∙ Never leave the E-Lock system on

when driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehiclemay result in the rear wheels slippingand result in an accident and personalinjury. After using the E-Lock systemto free the vehicle, turn the system off.

∙ Use the E-Lock system only in anemergency when it is not possible tofree a stuck vehicle even when using4LO. Never use the E-Lock system on aslippery road surface such as snow orice surface. Using the E-Lock systemwhen driving in these road conditionsmay cause unexpected movement ofthe vehicle during engine braking, ac-celerating or turning, which may re-sult in an accident and serious per-sonal injury.

∙ Observe the above warnings. Other-wise, loss of normal steering controlmay result. This may result in an acci-dent and serious personal injury.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


CAUTION∙ After using the E-Lock system, or during

normal driving, turn the switch off to pre-vent possible damage to the drivetraincomponents from extended use.

∙ Avoid quick starts while the E-Lock sys-tem is in operation. Otherwise, the drive-train components could be damaged.

∙ When the E-Lock system is in opera-tion, turning the vehicle becomes dif-ficult. This can be dangerous, espe-cially at high speeds. Doing so coulddamage the drivetrain components.

∙ Do not operate the E-Lock systemwhen the vehicle is turning or whenone side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,the drivetrain components could bedamaged.

∙ The E-Lock system operates onlywhen the engine is running.

∙ In 4H mode, the E-Lock system doesnot operate when the E-Lock systemswitch is turned to the ON position. (TheE-Lock system indicator light will flash.)

∙ Observe the above cautions. Other-wise, loss of normal steering controlmay result.

When the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion, the ECO management display ap-pears.

�1 Previous 5 times (History)

�2 Current fuel economy

�3 Best fuel economy

The result of ECO evaluation is displayed30 seconds after the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position and the vehicle isdriven at least 1/3 miles (500 meters).

�1 The average fuel economy for the pre-vious 5 times will be displayed.

�2 The average fuel economy since thelast reset will be displayed.

�3 The best fuel economy of the past his-tory will be displayed.

The ECO Drive Report can be set to be ONor OFF.

LSD2472

ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)


WARNING∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away andresult in an accident. Make sure theshift lever has been pushed as far for-ward as it can go and cannot bemoved without depressing the footbrake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels asillustrated.

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB �A :

Turn the wheels into the curb andmove the vehicle forward until the curbside wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB �B :

Turn the wheels away from the curband move the vehicle back until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB �C :

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move awayfrom the center of the road if it moves.


The power assisted steering uses a hy-draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-sist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,you will still have control of the vehicle.However, much greater steering effort isneeded, especially in sharp turns and atlow speeds.

WARNINGIf the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONSUsing the brakesAvoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will overheat the brakes,wear out the brake pads faster, and reducegas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to preventthe brakes from overheating, reduce speedand downshift to a lower gear before goingdown a slope or long grade. Overheatedbrakes may reduce braking performanceand could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-celerating could cause the wheels toskid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the power as-sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-ing will be harder.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet. Asa result, your braking distance will be lon-ger and the vehicle may pull to one sideduring braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brakepedal to heat up the brakes. Do this untilthe brakes return to normal. Avoid drivingthe vehicle at high speeds until the brakesfunction correctly.

Parking brake break-inBreak in the parking brake shoes wheneverthe stopping effect of the parking brake isweakened or whenever the parking brakeshoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,in order to assure the best braking perfor-mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicleservice manual. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can help maintain ve-hicle control during braking on slip-pery surfaces. Remember that stop-ping distances on slippery surfaceswill be longer than on normal sur-faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintaina safe distance from the vehicle infront of you. Ultimately, the driver isresponsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size andtype as specified on the Tire andLoading Information label. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Tireand Loading Information label” inthe “Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheelsdo not lock during hard braking or whenbraking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheeland varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding.By preventing each wheel from locking, thesystem helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swervingand spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.Depress the brake pedal with firm steadypressure, but do not pump the brakes. TheAnti-lock Braking System will operate toprevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.


WARNINGDo not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test featureThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you startthe engine and move the vehicle at a lowspeed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noiseand/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.This is normal and does not indicate a mal-function. If the computer senses a mal-function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-nates the ABS warning light on theinstrument panel. The brake system thenoperates normally, but without anti-lockassistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates duringthe self-test or while driving, have the ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operationThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 -10 km/h). The speed varies according toroad conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actuatorrapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-sure. This action is similar to pumping thebrakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-tion in the brake pedal and hear a noisefrom under the hood or feel a vibrationfrom the actuator when it is operating. Thisis normal and indicates that the ABS is op-erating properly. However, the pulsationmay indicate that road conditions are haz-ardous and extra care is required whiledriving.

BRAKE ASSISTWhen the force applied to the brake pedalexceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist isactivated generating greater braking forcethan a conventional brake booster evenwith light pedal force.

WARNINGThe Brake Assist is only an aid to assistbraking operation and is not a collisionwarning or avoidance device. It is thedriver’s responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely and be in control of the vehicle atall times.


∙ The ABLS system uses automatic brak-ing to transfer power from a slippingdrive wheel to the wheel on the sameaxle with more traction. The ABLS sys-tem applies braking to the slippingwheel, which helps redirect power tothe other wheel.

∙ On 4–Wheel Drive (4WD) models theABLS system operates in both 4H and4LO modes. If 4WD mode is engaged,the ABLS system operates for bothdrive axles. On 2–Wheel Drive vehicles,the ABLS system operates on the driveaxle only.

∙ The ABLS system is always on. In someconditions, the system may automati-cally turn the ABLS system off. If the sys-tem is automatically turned off, normalbrake function will continue. ABLS willfunction even when the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system is turned off.

∙ The ABLS system does not operate ifboth wheels on a drive axle are slipping.

WARNING∙ The ABLS system helps provide in-

creased traction, but will not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering op-eration or by careless driving or dan-gerous driving practices. Reduce ve-hicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slip-pery surfaces. Always drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN approved for your vehicleor are extremely deteriorated, theABLS system may not operate prop-erly. This could adversely affect ve-hicle handling performance, and theslip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the ABLS sys-tem may not operate properly and theslip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones are used,the ABLS system may not operateproperly and the slip indicator lightmay illuminate.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)SYSTEM


The VDC system uses various sensors tomonitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.Under certain driving conditions, the VDCsystem helps to perform the followingfunctions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reducewheel slip on one slipping drive wheelso power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engineoutput to reduce drive wheel slip basedon vehicle speed (traction control func-tion).

∙ If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into4LO the indicator light will comeon and the VDC system will be turnedoff. For additional information, refer to“Using 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)” in this sec-tion.

∙ Controls brake pressure at individualwheels and engine output to help thedriver maintain control of the vehicle inthe following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-low the steered path despite in-creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin dueto certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver tomaintain control of the vehicle, but it can-not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, theindicator light in the instrument panelflashes so note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the systemmay determine some action is requiredto help keep the vehicle on the steeredpath.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise or vibration fromunder the hood. This is normal and indi-cates that the VDC system is workingproperly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to theroad conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,the indicator light will come on in theinstrument panel. The VDC system auto-matically turns off when these indicatorlights are off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off theVDC system. The indicator light illu-minates to indicate the VDC system is off.When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn offthe system, the VDC system still operatesto prevent one drive wheel from slipping bytransferring power to a non-slipping drivewheel. The indicator light flashes ifthis occurs. All other VDC functions are offand the indicator light will not flash.The VDC system is automatically reset toON when the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-ture that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle for-ward or in reverse at a slow speed. Whenthe self-test occurs, you may hear a clunknoise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and is not an indica-tion of a malfunction.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


WARNING∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speed andbe especially careful when driving andcornering on slippery surfaces and al-ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deteriorated,the VDC system may not operateproperly. This could adversely affectvehicle handling performance, andthe indicator light may flash orthe indicator light mayilluminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly andthe indicator light mayilluminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the indi-cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate. Do not drive on thesetypes of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones are used,the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTIONDuring braking while driving through turns,the system optimizes the distribution offorce to each of the front and rear wheelsdepending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speed andbe especially careful when driving andcornering on slippery surfaces and al-ways drive carefully.


∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deteriorated,the VDC system may not operateproperly. This could adversely affectvehicle handling performance, andthe indicator light may flash orthe indicator light mayilluminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC systemmay not operate properly andthe indicator light mayilluminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the indi-cator light may illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate. Do not drive on thesetypes of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones are used,the VDC system may not operateproperly and the indicator lightmay flash or the indicator lightmay illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

WARNING∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehiclespeed when driving on steep downhillgrades. Always drive carefully and at-tentively when using the hill descentcontrol system and decelerate the ve-hicle speed by depressing the brakepedal if necessary. Be especially care-ful when driving on frozen, muddy orextremely steep downhill roads. Fail-ure to control vehicle speed may re-sult in a loss of control of the vehicleand possible serious injury or death.

∙ The hill descent control may not con-trol the vehicle speed on a hill underall load or road conditions. Always beprepared to depress the brake pedalto control vehicle speed. Failure to doso may result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

The hill descent control system can only beactivated when the 4H or 4LO position isengaged.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


The hill descent control system helpsmaintain vehicle speed when driving under15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhillgrades. Hill descent control is useful whenengine braking alone cannot control ve-hicle speed. Hill descent control applies thevehicle brakes to control vehicle speed al-lowing the driver to concentrate on steer-ing while reducing the burden of brake andaccelerator operation.

If the hill descent control system ON indica-tor light is blinking, the hill descent controlis engaged; however, the hill descent con-trol will not control the vehicle speed.

∙ Once the system is activated, the indi-cator light will remain on in the instru-ment panel. For additional information,refer to “Hill descent control system ONindicator light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

∙ You may hear a noise from under thehood or feel a vibration from the actua-tor when it is operating. This indicatesthat the hill descent control system isworking properly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-pressed while the hill descent control sys-tem is on, the system will stop operatingtemporarily. As soon as the accelerator orbrake pedal is released, the hill descentcontrol system begins to function again ifthe hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descendingsteep downhill grades, the hill descent con-trol switch should be ON and the shift leverin M1 (First) for engine braking. For addi-tional information, refer to “Hill descentcontrol switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

WARNING∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle frommoving backward on a hill. Alwaysdrive carefully and attentively. De-press the brake pedal when the ve-hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-pecially careful when stopped on a hillon frozen or muddy roads. Failure toprevent the vehicle from rolling back-wards may result in a loss of control ofthe vehicle and possible serious injuryor death.

∙ The hill start assist system is not de-signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-still on a hill. Depress the brake pedalwhen the vehicle is stopped on asteep hill. Failure to do so may causethe vehicle to roll backwards and mayresult in a collision or serious personalinjury.

∙ The hill start assist may not preventthe vehicle from rolling backwards ona hill under all load or road conditions.Always be prepared to depress thebrake pedal to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling backwards. Failure to doso may result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM


When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hillstart assist system automatically keepsthe brakes applied. This helps prevents thevehicle from rolling backward in the time ittakes the driver to release the brake pedaland apply the accelerator when the vehicleis stopped on a hill.Hill start assist will operate automaticallyunder the following conditions:

∙ The shift lever is shifted to a forward orreverse gear.

∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on ahill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to rollback and hill start assist will stop operatingcompletely.

Hill start assist will not operate when theshift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P(Park) or on a flat and level road. Whenthe indicator light illuminates in themeter, the hill start assist system will notoperate.

The front and rear sonar system sounds atone to inform the driver of obstacles nearthe bumper.

When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonarview will automatically appear in the meter.

WARNING∙ The front and rear sonar system is a

convenience but it is not a substitutefor proper parking.

∙ The driver is always responsible forsafety during parking and other ma-neuvers. Always look around andcheck that it is safe to do so beforeparking.

∙ Read and understand the limitationsof the front and rear sonar system ascontained in this section. The colors ofthe corner sonar indicator and thedistance guide lines in the front/rearview indicate different distances tothe object.

∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonicsources such as an automatic carwash, a truck’s compressed-airbrakes or a pneumatic drill may affectthe function of the system; this mayinclude reduced performance or afalse activation.

∙ This function is designed as an aid tothe driver in detecting large station-ary objects to help avoid damagingthe vehicle.

LSD2465

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


∙ The system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.Always move slowly. The system willnot detect small objects below thebumper, and may not detect objectsclose to the bumper or on the ground.

∙ The system may not detect the fol-lowing objects: fluffy objects such assnow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.;thin objects such as rope, wire andchain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to thebumper fascia, leaving it misaligned orbent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement of ob-stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window)will interfere with the tone and it maynot be heard.

∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located onthe bumper fascia) free from snow, iceand large accumulations of dirt. Donot clean the sensors with sharp ob-jects. If the sensors are covered, theaccuracy of the sonar function will bediminished.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe system informs with a visual and au-dible alert of front obstacles when the shiftlever is in the D (Drive) position and bothfront and rear obstacles when the shift le-ver is in the R (Reverse) position.Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor RR SensorRange Sound Display Sound Display

P x † x †R o o o oN x † x †D o o x †

o – Display/Beep when detect† – Display on camera viewx – No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-onds when an obstacle is detected by onlythe corner sensor and the distance doesnot change. The tone will stop when theobstacle gets away from the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator(green) appears and blinks and the tonesounds intermittently. When the vehiclemoves closer to the object, the color of theindicator turns yellow and the rate of theblinking increases. When the vehicle is veryclose to the object, the indicator stopsblinking and turns red, and the tonesounds continuously.


When the corner of the vehicle movescloser to an object, the corner sonar indi-cator �A appears.

The system indicators �A will appear whenthe vehicle moves closer to an object.

LSD2466 LSD2467


HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THESONAR SYSTEMThe system is automatically activatedwhen the ignition is in the ON position andthe shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the sonar system:

1. Push the Front and rear sonar systemOFF switch (the orange light will go out)to turn the system off.

2. To turn the system back on, push theswitch (the orange light will illuminate)and the system will be enabled. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Front andrear sonar system OFF switch” and “Ve-hicle information display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of thismanual.

NOTE:

The system will automatically be turnedon when the engine is restarted.

LSD2660


SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNINGListed below are the system limitationsfor the sonar system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.

∙ The driver is always responsible forsafety during parking and other ma-neuvers. Always turn and look backbefore backing up. The sonar systemis not a substitute for properprocedures.

∙ Read and understand the limitationsof the sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather mayaffect the function of the sonar sys-tem; this may include reduced perfor-mance or a false activation.

∙ This system is not designed to pre-vent contact with small or movingobjects.

∙ The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in detecting large station-ary objects to help avoid damagingthe vehicle. The system will not detectsmall objects below the bumper, andmay not detect objects close to thebumper or on the ground.

∙ The system is deactivated at speedsabove 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-vated at lower speeds.

∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonicsources such as an automatic carwash, a truck’s compressed-airbrakes or a pneumatic drill may affectthe function of the system; this mayinclude reduced performance or afalse activation.

∙ The system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.Always move slowly. The system willnot detect small objects below thebumper or on the ground.

∙ The system may not detect the fol-lowing objects: fluffy objects such assnow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.;thin objects such as rope, wire andchain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

∙ The system may not detect objects atspeeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) andmay not detect certain angular ormoving objects.

∙ The system is deactivated at speedsabove 6 mph (10 km/h) and is reacti-vated at lower speeds.


SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe sonar sensors �1 are located on thefront and rear bumpers. Always keep thearea near the sonar sensors clean.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be causedby objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-structing the sonar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructingthe area around the sonar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-ent material), install accessories or applyadditional paint near the sonar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area aroundthe sonar sensors. It is recommended thatyou consult a NISSAN dealer if the areaaround the sonar sensors is damaged dueto a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer through the key hole. If the lockbecomes frozen, heat the key before in-serting it into the key hole or use the re-mote keyless entry key fob.

ANTIFREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),check the antifreeze to assure proper win-ter protection. For additional information,refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, thebattery fluid may freeze and damage thebattery. To maintain maximum efficiency,the battery should be checked regularly.For additional information, refer to “Battery”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

LSD2471

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


DRAINING OF COOLANT WATERIf the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-ing the engine block. Refill before operatingthe vehicle. For additional information, referto “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performanceof these tires will be substantially re-duced in snowy and icy conditions. Ifyou operate your vehicle on snowy oricy roads, NISSAN recommends the useof MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRESon all four wheels. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tiretype, size, speed rating and availabilityinformation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some U.S. states and Canadian prov-inces prohibit their use. Check local,state and provincial laws before install-ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additionalinformation, refer to “Tire chains” in the“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENTIt is recommended that the following itemsbe carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-move ice and snow from the windowsand wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed underthe jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” un-der these conditions. Try to avoid driv-ing on wet ice until the road is saltedor sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive withcaution. Accelerate and slow downwith care. If accelerating or down-shifting too fast, the drive wheels willlose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.


∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake while onthe ice, and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

∙ Do not use the cruise control (if soequipped) on slippery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)Engine block heaters are used to assistwith cold temperature starting.

∙ Engine block heaters should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 0°F(-17°C) or lower.

∙ Engine block heaters run continuouslywhile plugged into the correct voltageelectrical outlet.

WARNING∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-prongedextension cord rated for at least 10 A.Plug the extension cord into a GroundFault Interrupt (GFI) protected,grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure touse the proper extension cord or agrounded outlet can result in a fire orelectrical shock and cause seriouspersonal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engineblock heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord intoa grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a GroundFault Interrupt (GFI) protected,grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must beplugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-pending on outside temperatures, toproperly warm the engine coolant. Usean appropriate timer to turn the engineblock heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug andproperly store the cord to keep it awayfrom moving parts.


NOTE:

When using the engine block heater (if soequipped) on an Applied Vehicle (engineblock heater is plugged in):

∙ Vehicle should be parked on a levelsurface.Or

∙ If a level surface is not available, thevehicle should be parked with thefront of the truck lower than the rear(nose down).

CAUTIONUse of the engine block heater whenparked with the front of the vehiclehigher than the rear (5 degrees or more)may cause the engine block heater tobecome damaged and/or inoperative.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Vehicle recovery(freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-ers while moving on the highway un-less unusual circumstances force youto drive so slowly that your vehiclemight become a hazard to othertraffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignitionswitch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the useof the hazard warning flasher switchwhile driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergencysituation while driving, perform the follow-ing procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignitionswitch three consecutive times in lessthan 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignitionswitch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-tors tire pressure of all tires except thespare. When the low tire pressure warninglight is lit on vehicles equipped with a tripcomputer (if so equipped), and the TirePressure Low — Add Air warning appears inthe vehicle information display (if soequipped), one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated. If equipped, thesystem also displays pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screenby sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is be-ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMSwill activate and warn you of it by the lowtire pressure warning light. This system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-tional information, refer to “Warning lights,indicator lights and audible reminders” inthe “Instruments and controls” section and“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” inthe “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.



∙ If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pull offthe road to a safe location and stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-ing with under-inflated tires may per-manently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury.Check the tire pressure for all fourtires. Adjust the tire pressure to therecommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label to turn the low tire pres-sure warning light OFF. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flator the TPMS may be malfunctioning. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible, If no tireis flat and all tires are properly in-flated, have the vehicle checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS willnot function and the low tire pressurewarning light will flash for approxi-mately one minute. The light will re-main on after one minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor these services.


∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIf you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow:

Stopping the vehicle1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Move the shift lever to P(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other trafficand to signal professional road assis-tance personnel that you need assis-tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the shift lever isshifted into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming trafficis close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-fessional road assistance.

A. Tire stoppersB. Flat Tire

Blocking wheelsPlace tire stoppers, supplied with jack, atboth the front and back of the wheel diago-nally opposite the flat tire to prevent thevehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNINGBe sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

LCE2142


Getting the spare tire and tools(Crew and King Cab® models)

1. Fold up the right rear bench seat. Foradditional information, refer to “Foldingthe rear bench seat up” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section of this manual.

2. Remove the tire stopper bag �A .

3. Release the straps �B .

4. Collapse the jack to remove it from thestorage location. Loosen the jack withyour fingers until the jack is free.

5. Remove the jack and tool kit.

6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod.Find the oval-shaped opening abovethe license plate, slightly to the left ofthe middle (driver’s side). Pass theT-shaped end of the jack rod throughthe opening and direct it toward thespare tire winch, located directly abovethe spare tire.

CAUTIONDo not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

LCE2374 WCE0150


7. Fit the square end of the jack rod intothe square hole of the wheel nutwrench to form a handle.

8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rodinto the T-shaped opening of the tirewinch. Apply pressure to keep the jackrod engaged in the spare tire winchand turn the jack rod counterclockwiseto lower the spare tire.

9. Once the spare tire is completely low-ered, reach under the vehicle, guide theretainer chain through the center ofthe tire and carefully slide the tire fromunder the rear of the vehicle.

10. Securely store the flat tire beneath thevehicle, from where the full size sparewas removed. To reinstall the wheel, re-move the center cap (if so equipped)and insert the retainer chain throughthe wheel. Be sure the rubber spacer (ifso equipped) is centered on the wheelbefore lifting. Use the assembled jack-ing rod to slowly rotate the winch clock-wise to raise the wheel to the vehicle.

11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reversesteps 1 through 5.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years andreplace as necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

CAUTION∙ Be sure to center the spare tire sus-

pending plate on the wheel and thenlift the spare tire.

∙ Failure to use the spacer may allowthe chain to get stuck on the wheelnut holes.

Getting the spare tire and tools(Single Cab models)

1. Move the front passenger seat to ac-cess the tools. For additional informa-tion about seat functions, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety–Seats, seat beltsand supplemental restraint system”section of this manual.

WCE0151


2. Remove the lid from the tool storagecompartment.

3. Release the straps �A .

4. Remove the tire stopper bag �B .

5. Remove the tool kit and jack �C .






LCE2280 WCE0150 WCE0151




NOTE:





Getting the spare tire and tools(King Cab® models not equippedwith rear seat)

1. Open the passenger side rear door andremove the lid from the tool storagecompartment.

2. Release the straps �A .

3. Remove the tire stopper bag �B .

4. Lift the storage cover �C to access thejack.

5. Remove the tool kit and jack.

LCE2327 LCE2328









NOTE:





WCE0150 WCE0151


Removing bolt-on wheel caps (ifso equipped)

CAUTIONDo not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so couldresult in personal injury.

The wheel cap �1 is only attached with thewheel nuts and is separate from the wheel�2 .

To remove the wheel cap, remove thewheel nuts after the jack is securely sup-porting the vehicle and the tire clears theground.

For additional information, refer to “Jackingup vehicle and removing the damaged tire”in this section.

Take care not to scratch the wheel cap orwheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removingthe damaged tire (all models)

WARNING∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicle onother vehicles. The jack is designedfor lifting only your vehicle during atire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle forjack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)off the ground. It may cause the ve-hicle to move.

LCE2367


Always refer to the illustration for the cor-rect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following in-structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or twoturns by turning counterclockwise withthe wheel nut wrench. Do not removethe wheel nuts until the tire is off theground.

2. Place the jack directly under thejack-up point as illustrated so the topof the jack contacts the vehicle at thejack-up point. Align the jack head underthe arrow stamped on the side of theframe or rear as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

WCE0152


3. Install the assembled jack rod into thejack as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jacklever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicleuntil the tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-move the tire.

Installing the spare tireThe spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. For additional information, refer to“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on andtighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tightenwheel nuts alternately and evenly in thesequence illustrated (�1 ,�2 ,�3 ,�4 ,�5 ,�6 )until they are tight.

LCE0087

WCE0063


4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence illus-trated (�1 ,�2 ,�3 ,�4 ,�5 ,�6 ). Lower thevehicle completely.

WARNING∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause thenuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.


Non-XD models:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

XD models:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightenedto specification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication inter-val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for 3 hours or more or driven lessthan 1 mi. (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display (if so equipped)of the tire pressure information mayshow higher pressure than the COLD tirepressure after the vehicle has beendriven more than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This isbecause the tire pressure increases asthe tire temperature rises. This does notindicate a system malfunction.

5. Securely store the tools and jackingequipment in the vehicle. For additionalinformation, refer to the “Getting thespare tire and tools (Crew and KingCab® models),” “Getting the spare tireand tools (Single Cab models)” or “Get-ting the spare tire and tools (King Cab®models not equipped with rear seat)” inthis section.

WARNING∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properlysecured after use. Such items can be-come dangerous projectiles in an ac-cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. For additional information,refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.


To start your engine with a booster battery,the instructions and precautions belowmust be followed.

WARNING∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resultingin severe injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is acorrosive sulfuric acid solution whichcan cause severe burns. If the fluidshould come into contact with any-thing, immediately flush the con-tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eye protec-tors (for example, goggles or indus-trial safety spectacles) and removerings, metal bands, or any other jew-elry. Do not lean over the batterywhen jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and causeserious injury.

∙ Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING


WARNINGAlways follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damageto the charging system and cause per-sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle, position the two vehicles to bringtheir batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles totouch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shiftlever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-sary electrical systems (lights, heater,air conditioner, etc.).


4. Ensure the vent caps are level andtight.

5. Connect the jumper cables in the se-quence illustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

CAUTION∙ Always connect positive (�) to posi-

tive (�) and negative (�) to bodyground (for example, strut mountingbolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not tothe battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that the cableclamps do not contact any othermetal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicleand let it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the boostervehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start theengine of the vehicle being jumpstarted.

CAUTIONDo not keep the starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If the enginedoes not start right away, place the ig-nition switch in the OFF position andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

8. After starting the engine, carefully dis-connect the negative cable and thenthe positive cable.

LCE2223


Do not attempt to start the engine bypushing.

CAUTION∙ Automatic transmission models can-

not be push-started or tow-started.Attempting to do so may cause trans-mission damage.

∙ Three way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushingsince the three way catalyst may bedamaged.

∙ Never try to start the vehicle by tow-ing it; when the engine starts, the for-ward surge could cause the vehicle tocollide with the tow vehicle.

WARNING∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant res-ervoir cap is removed, pressurized hotwater will spurt out, possibly causingserious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated byan extremely high temperature gaugereading), or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc. take thefollowing steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-ply the parking brake and move theshift lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air condi-tioner temperature control to maxi-mum hot and fan control to highspeed.

3. If engine overheating is caused byclimbing a long hill on a hot day, run theengine at a fast idle (approximately1,500 rpm) until the temperature gaugeindication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listenfor steam or coolant escaping from theradiator before opening the hood. Ifsteam or coolant is escaping, turn offthe engine. Do not open the hood fur-ther until no steam or coolant can beseen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNINGIf steam or water is coming from theengine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damageor looseness. Also check if the coolingfan is running. The radiator hoses andradiator should not leak water. If cool-ant is leaking, the water pump belt ismissing or loose, or the cooling fandoes not run, stop the engine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


WARNINGBe careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts orthe engine cooling fan. The engine cool-ing fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check thecoolant level in the engine coolant res-ervoir tank with the engine running. Addcoolant to the engine coolant reservoirtank if necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictionaland local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipmentcould damage your vehicle. Towing in-structions are available from a NISSANdealer. Local service operators are gener-ally familiar with the applicable laws andprocedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damageto your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It isadvisable to have the service operatorcarefully read the following precautions:

WARNING∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after ithas been lifted by a tow truck.

∙ If your vehicle has front recoveryhooks as original factory equipment,do not remove or modify them. If itwas not equipped with front recoveryhooks, do not install them. Either ac-tion could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system resulting ininjury or death.

CAUTION∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering systemand powertrain are in working condi-tion. If any of these conditions apply,dollies or a flatbed tow truck must beused.

∙ Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For additional information, refer to "Flattowing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) vehicle" or"Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) ve-hicle" in the "Technical and consumer infor-mation" section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends towing your vehiclebased upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-tional information, refer to the diagrams inthis section to ensure that your vehicle isproperly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) modelswith automatic transmissionNISSAN recommends that towing dolliesbe used when towing your vehicle or placethe vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTIONNever tow 4WD models equipped withan automatic transmission with any ofthe wheels on the ground as this maycause serious and expensive damageto the transfer case and transmission.

LCE2141


Two-Wheel Drive models withautomatic transmissionNISSAN recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels off theground or place the vehicle on a flatbedtruck as illustrated.

CAUTION∙ Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damageto the transmission. If it is necessaryto tow the vehicle with the frontwheels raised always use towing dol-lies under the rear wheels.

∙ When towing automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by plac-ing the ignition switch in the LOCKposition. This may cause damageto the lock mechanism (for modelswith a steering lock mechanism).

When towing long distances or speeds inexcess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove thepropeller shaft before towing to preventdamage to the transmission. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer foradditional information.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing astuck vehicle)There are two options to recover a stuckvehicle: pulling and rocking. For additionalinformation regarding these options,please refer to the following sections.

LCE2311


Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNINGTo avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing serviceto recover the vehicle if you have anyquestions regarding the recoveryprocedure.

∙ Attach recovery devices only to mainstructural members of the vehicle orthe recovery hooks (if so equipped).

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs totow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designedfor vehicle recovery and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery devicestraight out from the front of the ve-hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do nottouch any part of the vehicle exceptthe attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use a tow strap or other device de-signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system.

2. Activate the Electronic Locking RearDifferential (E-Lock) system (if soequipped). For additional information,refer to “Electronic Locking Rear Differ-ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Startingand driving” section of this manual.

3. Make sure the area in front and behindthe vehicle is clear of obstructions.

4. Turn the steering wheel right and left toclear an area around the front tires.

5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-verse) and D (Drive).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph(55 km/h) or above 12 mph (20 km/h)if the E–Lock system (if so equipped)is engaged.

6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after afew tries, contact a professional towingservice to remove the vehicle.


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Environmental factors influence therate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance ofyour vehicle, it is important to take propercare of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, birddroppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park ina shady area or protect the vehicle with abody cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing thebody cover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap orgeneral purpose dishwashing liquid mixedwith clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-pecially brushless ones, use someacid for cleaning. The acid may reactwith some plastic vehicle compo-nents, causing them to crack. Thiscould affect their appearance, andalso could cause them not to functionproperly. Always check with your carwash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical de-tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot,as the surface may becomewater-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty ofclean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.Take care that the drain holes in the loweredge of the door are open. Spray waterunder the body and in the wheel wells toloosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry thevehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.Polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosingthe proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thoroughwashing. Follow the instructions sup-plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as possiblefrom the surface of the paint to avoid last-ing damage or staining. Special cleaningproducts are available at a NISSAN dealeror any automotive accessory store. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these products.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, itis necessary to clean the underbody regu-larly in order to prevent dirt and salt frombuilding up and causing the acceleration ofcorrosion on the underbody and suspen-sion. Before the winter period and again inthe spring, the underseal must be checkedand, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-mal for glass to become coated with a filmafter the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easilyremove this film.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the inside of the win-dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,abrasive cleaners or chlorine-baseddisinfectant cleaners. They could dam-age the electrical conductors, radio an-tenna elements or rear window de-froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if soequipped)Wash the wheels regularly with a spongedampened in a mild soap solution, espe-cially during winter months in areas whereroad salt is used. If not removed, road saltcan discolor the wheels.

CAUTIONFollow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same asambient temperature.

∙ Do not use chrome cleaner on anywheel. Doing so can damage thechrome-like coating on the wheel.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes afterthe cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with anon-abrasive chrome polish to maintainthe finish.

CAUTIONDo not use chrome cleaner on anywheel. Doing so can damage thechrome-like coating on the wheel.

Appearance and care 7-3

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use oftire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply acoating to the tires to help reduce discolor-ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-ing and form a compound. This compoundmay come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. Thecoating on the tire dissolves more easilythan with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be diffi-cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing iscompletely removed from the tiretread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufac-turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats using avacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipethe vinyl and leather surfaces (if soequipped) with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe cleanwith a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required inorder to maintain the appearance of theleather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read themanufacturer’s recommendations. Somefabric protectors contain chemicals thatmay stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water toclean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNINGDo not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifi-cation sensor (if so equipped). This canalso affect the operation of the air bagsystem and result in serious personalinjury.

CAUTION∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasiveand damaging to leather surfacesand should be removed promptly. Donot use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,detergents or ammonia-based clean-ers as they may damage the leather’snatural finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unlessrecommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERSMost air fresheners use a solvent thatcould affect the vehicle interior. If you usean air freshener, take the following precau-tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can causepermanent discoloration when theycontact vehicle interior surfaces. Placethe air freshener in a location that al-lows it to hang free and not contact aninterior surface.

CLEANING INTERIOR


∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clipon the vents. These products can causeimmediate damage and discolorationwhen spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-er’s instructions before using the air fresh-eners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNINGTo avoid potential pedal interference thatmay result in a collision, injury or death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-other floor mat in the driver front po-sition or install them upside down orbackwards.

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-cifically designed for use in your ve-hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in thefloorwell using the floor mat position-ing hook. For additional information,refer to "Floor mat installation" in thissection.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats tomake sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,check the floor mats to make surethey are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet andmake it easier to clean the interior. Matsshould be maintained with regular clean-ing and replaced if they become exces-sively worn.

Floor mat installationYour vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-sitioning hook(s). The number and shape ofthe floor mat positioning hooks for eachseating position varies depending on thevehicle.

LAI2087


When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,follow the installation instructions providedwith the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, theshift lever in P (Park) position and withthe parking brake fully applied, positionthe floor mat in the floorwell so that thefloor mat grommet holes are alignedwith the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into thehook(s) and ensure that the floor mat isproperly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-fere with pedal operation. With the igni-tion still in the OFF position, the shiftlever in the P (Park) position and withthe parking brake applied, fully applyand release all pedals. The floor matmust not interfere with pedal opera-tion or prevent the pedal from return-ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for details about installing the floormats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of thefloor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely in the shade before using them. Foradditional information, refer to “Seat beltmaintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”section of this manual.

WARNINGDo not allow wet seat belts to roll up inthe retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seatbelts, since these materials may se-verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Positioning hooksLAI2088


MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSIONMost vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panelsections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSIONMoistureAccumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially those ar-eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollutionexists and road salt is used.

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate ofcorrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt inthe air in coastal areas, or heavy road saltuse accelerates the corrosion process.Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often tokeep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumula-tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulationof sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash withwater as soon as possible.

CAUTION∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-ment by washing it out with a hose.Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner orbroom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic com-ponents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor panand fenders.

In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION


8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Fuel filter (CUMMINS 5.0L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Fuel filter replacement (stage 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Fuel filter replacement (stage 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Draining water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Fuel system priming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Automatic regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

6-speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)(diesel engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-117-speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)(gasoline engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Variable voltage control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 8-18Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Spark plugs (gasoline engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Daytime Running Light (DRL)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

When performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injury toyourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-lowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the ve-hicle from moving. Move the shift le-ver to P (Park)

∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in theOFF or LOCK position when perform-ing any parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans,belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jew-elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

∙ The automatic engine cooling fan (if soequipped) may come on at any timewithout warning, even if the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position and theengine is not running. To avoid injury,always disconnect the negative bat-tery cable before working near the fan.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-gine models are under high pressureeven when the engine is off, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for service of the fuel filter orfuel lines.

CAUTION∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-tery or any transistorized componentwhile the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instruc-tions regarding only those items which arerelatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is alsoavailable. For additional information, referto “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, andcould affect warranty coverage. If in doubtabout any servicing, it is recommendedthat you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

VK56VD engine (non-XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse box3. Engine oil dipstick4. Power steering fluid reservoir5. Engine oil filler cap6. Brake fluid reservoir7. Air cleaner8. Fuse/Fusible link box9. Drive belt location10. Radiator cap11. Battery12. Engine coolant reservoir

LDI3292


Do-it-yourself 8-3

VK56VD engine (XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse box3. Engine oil dipstick4. Power steering fluid reservoir5. Engine oil filler cap6. Brake fluid reservoir7. Air cleaner8. Fuse/Fusible link box9. Engine coolant reservoir10. Drive belt location11. Battery12. Radiator capFor additional information on the Cum-mins 5.0L engine, refer to the Titan DieselOwner’s Manual.

LDI3293

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water toprovide year-round antifreeze and coolantprotection. The antifreeze solution con-tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-tional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. For additional informa-tion on precautions, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “Incase of emergency” section of thismanual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, it is recommended thatyou use only a Genuine NISSAN radia-tor cap.

CAUTION∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additivesmay clog the cooling system andcause damage to the engine, trans-mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, it isrecommended that you use only Genu-ine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-lent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-dilutedto provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37° C). If additional freeze protectionis needed due to weather where youoperate your vehicle, add GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant(blue) concentrate following the direc-tions on the container. If an equivalentcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) isused, follow the coolant manufactur-er’s instructions to maintain minimumantifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C).The use of other types of coolant solu-tions other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent may damage the enginecooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)or 7 years. Mixing any other type ofcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),including Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water may reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. For additional information, referto the "Maintenance and schedules"section of this manual.

For additional information on the Cum-mins 5.0L engine cooling system, refer tothe Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoirwhen the engine is cold. If the coolantlevel is below the MIN level �B , add coolantto the MAX level �A . If the reservoir is empty,check the coolant level in the radiatorwhen the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAXlevel �A .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixingany other type of coolant or the use ofnon-distilled water may reduce the life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Maintenanceand schedules” section of this manual.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

For additional information on the locationof the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-gine compartment check locations” in thissection.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the enginecoolant. The service procedure can befound in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine over-heating.

WARNING∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when theengine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator or enginecoolant reservoir cap when the en-gine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escap-ing from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

VK56VD engine (non-XD model)LDI3295

VK56VD engine (XD model)LDI2823

8-6 Do-it-yourself

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-erly. Check your local regulations.

For additional information on changing theCummins 5.0L engine coolant, refer to theTitan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until itreaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than15 minutes for the oil to drain backinto the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between the H(High) and L (Low) marks �B . This is thenormal operating oil level range. If theoil level is below the L (Low) mark �A ,remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-ommended oil through the opening.Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the sever-ity of operating conditions.

VK56VD engineLDI2956


ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTIONOil level should be checked regularly.Operating the engine with an insuffi-cient amount of oil can damage the en-gine, and such damage is not coveredby warranty.

For additional information on checking theCummins 5.0L engine oil level, refer to theTitan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and



3. Turn the engine off and wait more than15 minutes.

4. Remove the oil filler cap �A by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Place a large drain pan under the drainplug �B .

6. Remove the drain plug �B with awrench by turning it counterclockwiseand completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, removeand replace it at this time. For addi-tional information, refer to “Changingengine oil filter” in this section.

∙ Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

∙ Check your local regulations.


8-8 Do-it-yourself

WARNING∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skincancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTIONBe careful not to burn yourself. The en-gine oil may be hot.

7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and anew washer. Securely tighten the drainplug with a wrench. Do not use exces-sive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

8. Refill engine with recommended oilthrough the oil filler opening, then in-stall the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drainand refill capacity, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-ties” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity dependson the oil temperature and drain time.Use these specifications for referenceonly. Always use the dipstick to deter-mine when the proper amount of oil isin the engine.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakagearound the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-rect as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than15 minutes. Check the oil level with thedipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

For additional information on changing theCummins 5.0L engine oil, refer to the TitanDiesel Owner’s Manual.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and



3. Remove bolts �A and skid plate.

Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)LDI3005

Do-it-yourself 8-9

4. Place a large drain pan under the oilfilter �B .

5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise.Then remove the oil filter by turning itby hand.


6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surfacewith a clean rag.

CAUTIONBe sure to remove any old gasket mate-rial remaining on the sealing surface ofthe engine. Failure to do so could lead toan oil leak and engine damage.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-tance is felt, then tighten an additional2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:13 ft-lb (18 N·m)

9. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Install skid plate in reverse order of re-moval.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than15 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-gine oil if necessary.

Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)LDI2875

Skid plate (Type C) (if so equipped)LDI2876


8-10 Do-it-yourself

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage1)For additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage2)For additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

DRAINING WATERFor additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

FUEL SYSTEM PRIMINGFor additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual.


AUTOMATIC REGENERATIONFor additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

When checking or replacement is required,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN Matic K ATF. Do not mix withother fluids.

∙ Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-mission fluid in this transmission.Damage caused by the use of fluidsother than as recommended is notcovered under NISSAN’s New VehicleLimited Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent toGenuine NISSAN Matic K ATF may alsodamage the transmission. Damagecaused by the use of fluids other thanas recommended is not covered un-der NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluidis also described on caution labels locatedin the engine compartment.

FUEL FILTER (CUMMINS 5.0L) DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) 6-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) (dieselengine only)

Do-it-yourself 8-11

When checking or replacement is required,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix withother fluids.

∙ Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-mission fluid in this transmission.Damage caused by the use of fluidsother than as recommended is notcovered under NISSAN’s New VehicleLimited Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent toGenuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may alsodamage the transmission. Damagecaused by the use of fluids other thanas recommended is not covered un-der NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluidis also described on caution labels locatedin the engine compartment.

Check the power steering fluid level whenthe engine is stopped.

The fluid level should be between the COLDMAX line and the COLD MIN line on thepower steering fluid reservoir at cold fluidtemperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C) or atthe HOT MAX line on the power steeringfluid reservoir at hot fluid temperatures of122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C).

If the fluid is cold and is at or below theCOLD MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF-IIor equivalent to the COLD MAX line. If thefluid is hot and below the HOT MAX line, addGenuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to theHOT MAX line. Remove the cap and fillthrough the opening.

CAUTION∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.

∙ Do not reuse power steering fluid.

∙ Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

LDI3077

7-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)(gasoline engine only)

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

8-12 Do-it-yourself

WARNING∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect thevehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and shouldbe stored carefully in marked contain-ers out of reach of children.

CAUTIONDo not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluidis spilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If thebrake fluid is below the MIN line �B , thebrake warning light will illuminate. Addbrake fluid up to the MAX line �A . For addi-tional information on recommended typeof brake fluid, refer to “Recommendedfluids/lubricants and capacities" in the“Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,the brake system should be thoroughlychecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIRFill the windshield-washer fluid reservoirperiodically. Add windshield-washer fluidwhen the “Low Washer Fluid” warning mes-sage shows on the vehicle information dis-play.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,lift the cap off the reservoir and pour thewindshield-washer fluid into the reservoiropening.

LDI3088 LDI2879

BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-13

Add a washer solvent to the washer forbetter cleaning. In the winter season, add awindshield washer antifreeze. Follow themanufacturer’s instructions for the mix-ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently whendriving conditions require an increasedamount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSANWindshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to thepaint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluidreservoir with washer fluid concen-trates at full strength. Some methylalcohol based washer fluid concen-trates may permanently stain thegrille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrateswith water to the manufacturer’s rec-ommended levels before pouring thefluid into the windshield-washer fluidreservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix thewasher fluid concentrate and water.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

Caution symbols for batteryWARNING

�1 No smoking, No exposed flames, NoSparks

Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by thebattery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

�2 Shield eyes Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion orbattery acid.

�3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

�4 Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

�5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

�6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness orinjury.

∙ If the battery is labeled "do not open" it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery’s performance.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

∙ Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 2 minutes before disconnecting the battery.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-15

NOTE:


1. Installation or extended use of elec-tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.


WARNING∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-drogen gas generated by the batteryis explosive. Explosive gases cancause blindness or injury. Do not allowbattery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-furic acid can cause blindness or in-jury. After touching a battery or bat-tery cap, do not touch or rub youreyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. Ifthe acid contacts your eyes, skin orclothing, immediately flush with wa-ter for at least 15 minutes and seekmedical attention.

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluidin the battery is low. Low battery fluidcan cause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectionand remove all jewelry.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands afterhandling.

∙ This vehicle uses a special battery. Ifthe 12-volt battery needs to be re-placed, use a 12-volt battery of thesame design.


∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

1. Remove the vent cap(s) with a screw-driver as shown. Use a cloth to protectthe battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only dis-tilled water to bring the level up to thebottom of the filler opening. Do notoverfill. Reinstall the vent cap(s).

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)WDI0224

WDI0529

Do-it-yourself 8-17

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.

The Type B battery is not equipped withremovable vent caps.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jumpstarting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-tion of this manual. If the engine does notstart by jump starting, the battery mayhave to be replaced. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

CAUTION∙ Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variablevoltage control system. This system mea-sures the amount of electrical dischargefrom the battery and controls voltage gen-erated by the generator.

The current sensor is located near the bat-tery along the negative battery cable. If youadd electrical accessories to your vehicle,be sure to ground them to a suitable bodyground such as the frame or engine blockarea.

Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)LDI3229 LDI2132

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL (if soequipped)

8-18 Do-it-yourself

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley2. Automatic belt tensioner pulley3. Water pump pulley4. Cooling fan pulley5. Air conditioner compressor pulley6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator pulley

WARNINGBe sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position before servicing drivebelt. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. Ifthe belt is in poor condition or is loose,have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly forcondition and tension in accordancewith the maintenance schedule. Foradditional information, refer to the"Maintenance and schedules" sectionof this manual.

For additional information on the Cum-mins 5.0L engine drive belt, refer to the Ti-tan Diesel Owner’s Manual. REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugsIt is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped spark plugs as frequently as con-ventional type spark plugs because theylast much longer. Follow the maintenancelog shown in the “Maintenance and sched-ules” section of this manual. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning orregapping.

∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

VK56VD engineWDI0661 LDI2972

DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS (gasoline engineonly)

Do-it-yourself 8-19

WARNINGBe sure the engine and ignition switchare off and that the parking brake isengaged securely.

CAUTIONBe sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrectsocket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

WARNING∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops theflame if the engine backfires. If it isn’tthere, and the engine backfires, youcould be burned. Do not drive with theair cleaner removed, and be carefulwhen working on the engine with theair cleaner removed.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine withthe air cleaner removed. Doing socould result in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner,push the tabs and pull the cover upward.

The viscous paper type filter elementshould not be cleaned and reused. Replacethe air filter according to the maintenancelog shown in the “Maintenance and sched-ules” section of this manual.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the insideof the air cleaner housing and the coverwith a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter,make sure the air cleaner cover is seatedin the housing and latch the tabs.


AIR CLEANER

8-20 Do-it-yourself

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entryof airborne dust and pollen particles andreduces some objectionable outsideodors. The filter is located behind the glovebox. For additional information on changeintervals, refer to “Gasoline standard main-tenance" or "Diesel standard mainte-nance" in the "Maintenance and sched-ules" section of this manual.


CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield-washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other mate-rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-tergent. Then rinse the blades with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades.

CAUTIONWorn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

REPLACINGReplace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

2. Push and hold the release tab �A , andthen move the wiper blade down �Bthe wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto thewiper arm until it clicks into place.

LDI2725

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

CAUTION∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged whenthe hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contactthe glass; otherwise the arms may bedamaged from wind pressure.

Be careful not to let anything get into thewasher nozzle �D . This may cause cloggingor improper windshield–washer operation.If something gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin �C .

If the brakes do not operate properly, havethe brakes checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-vice.

Self-adjusting brakesYour vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-plied.

WARNINGHave your brake system checked if thebrake pedal height does not return tonormal. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicatorsThe disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, a high pitchedscraping or screeching sound will be heardwhen the vehicle is in motion. The noise willbe heard whether or not the brake pedal isdepressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

LDI2710

BRAKES

8-22 Do-it-yourself

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops is nor-mal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information onthe appropriate maintenance schedule re-garding brake inspections, refer to "Gaso-line standard maintenance" or "Dieselstandard maintenance" in the "Mainte-nance and schedules" section of thismanual.

Two types of fuses are used. Type �A and�B are used in the fuse boxes in the enginecompartment. Type �B is used in the pas-senger compartment fuse box.

Type �B fuses are provided as spare fuses.They are stored in the passenger compart-ment fuse box.

Type �A fuses can be installed in the enginecompartment and passenger compart-ment fuse boxes.

If a type �A fuse is used to replace a type �Bfuse, the type �A fuse will not be level withthe fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.This will not affect the performance of thefuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in thefuse box securely.

Type �B fuses cannot be used to replacetype �A fuses.

LDI0455 LDI0457

FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-23

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNINGNever use a fuse of higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or electronic controlunits or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not comeon, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and theheadlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushingthe tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.The fuse puller is located in the centerof the fuse block in the passengercompartment.

5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anew fuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-trical system checked and repaired. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


VK56VD engine (non-XD model)LDI3073

VK56VD engine (XD model)LDI3074

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition, checkthe fusible links. If any of these fusible linksare melted, replace with only GenuineNISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNINGNever use a fuse of higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or electronic controlunits or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and theheadlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the glove box.

Cummins 5.0L engineLDI2882

LDI2826 LDI0456

Do-it-yourself 8-25

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-placed.

5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller�A .

6. If the fuse is open �B , replace it with anequivalent good fuse �C .

7. Push the fuse box cover to install.

If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

LDI2883 LDI2884 LDI2760

8-26 Do-it-yourself

CAUTIONBe careful not to allow children to swal-low the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key asfollows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from theIntelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver �Ainto the slit �B of the corner and twist itto separate the upper part from thelower part. Place a cloth over thescrewdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-27

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 orequivalent.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit andelectric terminals as doing so couldcause a malfunction.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-ing the battery across the contactpoints will seriously deplete the stor-age capacity.

∙ Make sure that the + side faces thebottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with�C and �D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the op-eration.

If you need assistance with replacement, itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

Note:


For Canada:This device complies with IndustryCanada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device must ac-cept any interference, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

LDI2637

8-28 Do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTSFor additional information on headlightbulb replacement, refer to the instructionsoutlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlightbulb (if so equipped)The headlight is a semi-sealed beam typewhich uses a replaceable headlight (halo-gen) bulb. Because the headlight assemblymust be removed from the vehicle for bulbreplacement, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-

ing the bulb. When aiming adjustmentis necessary, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for along period of time. Dust, moisture,smoke, etc. entering the headlightbody may affect bulb performance.Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly just before a replacementbulb is installed.

∙ Only touch the base when handlingthe bulb. Never touch the glass enve-lope. Touching the glass could signifi-cantly affect bulb life and/or head-light performance.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses the fog. This is not a malfunction. Iflarge drops of water collect inside the lens,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for servicing.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb(if so equipped)If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-quired, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)For additional information on fog light bulbreplacement, refer to the instructions out-lined in this section.

LIGHTS

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed as shown in thechart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the foglight for a long period of time as dust,moisture and smoke may enter thefog light body and affect the perfor-mance of the fog light.

NOTE:

The fog light is accessible in front of thefront tire and behind the bumper.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) batterycable.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector.

4. Rotate the bulb �A counterclockwiseand remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of thefog light assembly. Do not shake or ro-tate the bulb when removing it. Do nottouch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL) (ifso equipped)For additional information on the DRL bulbreplacement, refer to the instructions out-lined in this section.

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)LDI2924

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Replacing the daytime runninglight bulb (Canada only)

NOTE:

The daytime running light is accessiblein front of the front tire and behind thebumper.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) batterycable.

3. Disconnect the daytime running lightbulb connector.

4. Rotate the daytime running light bulb�A counterclockwise and remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of thefog light assembly. Do not shake or ro-tate the bulb when removing it. Do nottouch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Fog light assembly (Type A)(if so equipped) (Canada only)

LDI2925Daytime running light (if so equipped)

(Canada only)

LDI2954

Do-it-yourself 8-31

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTSItem Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*Low (Halogen) 55 H11High (Halogen) 60 HB3Turn/Park 28/8 7444NASide marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*Low — —High (Halogen) 60 HB3Daytime running/Park — —Turn 28/8 7444NASide marker 5 W5W

Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)(Canada only)

Fog 35 H8Daytime running 13 P13W

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) 55 H11Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —Puddle light (if so equipped)* — —Rear combination light (Type A) (if soequipped)*

Stop 16 PW16WBackup (reversing) 18 921Turn/Tail 27/7 3057K

Rear combination light (Type B) (if soequipped)*

Stop — —Backup (reversing) 18 921Turn/Tail 27/7 3057KCargo (tailgate) (if so equipped) 18 921

High-mounted stop light*Stop — —Cargo (roof) — —

Under rail bed light (if so equipped)* — —License plate light* — —Map light (if so equipped)* 8 —Room light (if so equipped)* 8 —Footwell light (if so equipped)* 3.4 158Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* — —Glove box light (if so equipped)* 1.4 —

* Always check with the Parts Departmentat a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts infor-mation.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for assistance.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

1. Headlight assembly2. Map light (if so equipped)3. Room light (if so equipped)4. Door mirror turn signal light

(if so equipped)5. Puddle light (if so equipped)6. Fog light (if so equipped)7. High-mount stop light8. Under rail bed light (if so equipped)9. License plate light10. Rear combination light

LDI2890

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D.When replacing a bulb, first remove thelens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installation

NOTE:

Rear combination light (Type B) (if soequipped) bulb replacement procedureis shown. Rear combination light (Type A)(if so equipped) bulb replacement proce-dure is similar.To replace the rear combination light bulbsperform the following procedure:

1. Remove the two fasteners �A and pullthe rear combination light away fromthe vehicle.

2. Remove harness connector and rotatestop light bulb �B counterclockwise toremove. Replace bulb if necessary.

3. Rotate reverse light bulb socket �Ccounterclockwise to remove. Replacebulb if necessary.

4. Rotate cargo (tailgate) light bulb socket�D (if so equipped) counterclockwise toremove. Replace bulb if necessary.

5. Rotate turn/tail light bulb socket �Ecounterclockwise to remove. Replacebulb if necessary.

Reverse steps to install bulbs and rearcombination light.

WDI0263

Rear combination lightLDI2951

Rear combination lightLDI2952

8-34 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” inthe “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

TIRE PRESSURETire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

WARNINGRadio waves could adversely af-fect electric medical equipment.Those who use a pacemakershould contact the electric medi-cal equipment manufacturer forthe possible influences beforeuse.

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS).It monitors tire pressure of all fourtires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit andthe “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”warning appears in the vehicle infor-mation display, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displayspressure of all tires (except the spare

tire) on the display screen by send-ing a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this systemmay not detect a sudden drop in tirepressure (for example a flat tire whiledriving).For additional information, refer to“Warning lights, indicator lights andaudible reminders” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section, “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section,and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressures (includingthe spare) often and always prior tolong distance trips. The recom-mended tire pressure specificationsare shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label or the Tire andLoading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tireand Loading Information label is af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.Tire pressures should be checkedregularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air overtime.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other ob-jects or if the vehicle strikes acurb while parking.

The tire pressures should bechecked when the tires are cold. Thetires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alertprovides visual and audible signalsoutside the vehicle for inflating tiresto the recommended COLD tirepressure. For additional information,refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill TireAlert” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-35

Incorrect tire pressure, includingunder inflation, may adversely af-fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause anaccident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weightcapacity is indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.Do not load your vehicle beyondthis capacity. Overloading yourvehicle may result in reducedtire life, unsafe operating condi-tions due to premature tire fail-ure, or unfavorable handlingcharacteristics and could alsolead to a serious accident. Load-ing beyond the specified capac-ity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressuregauge to ensure that the tirepressures are at the specifiedlevel.


8-36 Do-it-yourself

Tire and Loading Informationlabel

�1 Seating capacity: The maximumnumber of occupants that canbe seated in the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: For additionalinformation, refer to “Vehicleloading information” in the“Technical and consumer infor-mation” section of this manual.

�3 Original tire size: The size of thetires originally installed on thevehicle at the factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate thetires to this pressure when thetires are cold. Tires are consid-ered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)at moderate speeds. The rec-ommended cold tire inflation isset by the manufacturer to pro-vide the best balance of tirewear, vehicle handling, driveabil-ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-cle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” inthis section.

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI2926

Do-it-yourself 8-37

Checking tire pressure1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gaugesquarely onto the valve stem. Donot press too hard or force thevalve stem sideways, or air willescape. If the hissing sound of airescaping from the tire is heardwhile checking the pressure, re-position the gauge to eliminatethis leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to thespecification shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the coreof the valve stem briefly with thetip of the gauge stem to releasepressure. Recheck the pressureand add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.Size Cold Tire Inflation

PressureFront OriginalTire:265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psiLT245/75R17 450 kPa, 65 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 450 kPa, 65 psi


Rear OriginalTire:265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psiLT245/75R17 500 kPa, 73 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 480 kPa, 70 psi

Spare Tire: Full size

LDI0393

8-38 Do-it-yourself

TIRE LABELINGFederal law requires tire manufac-turers to place standardized infor-mation on the sidewall of all tires.This information identifies and de-scribes the fundamental character-istics of the tire and also provides theTire Identification Number (TIN) forsafety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

�1 Tire size (example: LT215/65R1595H)

1. LT: The “LT” indicates the tire isdesigned for light truck vehicles(not all tires have this informa-tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in milli-meters of the tire from sidewalledge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): Thisnumber, known as the aspectratio, gives the tire’s ratio ofheight to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameterin inches.

ExampleWDI0394

ExampleLDI2043

Do-it-yourself 8-39

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):This number is the tire’s load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port. You may not find this infor-mation on all tires because it isnot required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You shouldnot drive the vehicle faster thanthe tire speed rating.

�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)for a new tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-partment Of Transportation”.The symbol can be placedabove, below or to the left orright of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.For example, the numbers 3103means the 31st week of 2003. Ifthese numbers are missing thenlook on the other sidewall of thetire.

ExampleLDI2786

8-40 Do-it-yourself

�3 Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-ers.

�4 Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure.

�5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle, al-ways use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requiresan inner tube (“tube type”) or not(“tubeless”).

�7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown if the tirehas radial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or brand name isshown.Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms thatare defined throughout this section,Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or modelname molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding onthe other sidewall of the tire, or (2)the outward facing sidewall of anasymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that must always face out-ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with informationabout tire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factoryequipped tires, and may not matchthe potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximumspeed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could affectthe proper operation of the low tirepressure warning system.


Do-it-yourself 8-41

All season tiresNISSAN specifies All Season tires on somemodels to provide good performance allyear, including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All Season tires are identified by ALLSEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.Snow tires have better snow traction thanAll Season tires and may be more appropri-ate in some areas.

Summer tiresNISSAN specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowyor icy conditions, NISSAN recommends theuse of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on allfour wheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load rat-ing to the original equipment tires. If you donot, it can adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-ings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be thesame size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibittheir use. Check local, state and provinciallaws before installing studded tires. Skidand traction capabilities of studded snowtires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorerthan that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When installingtire chains, make sure they are the propersize for the tires on your vehicle and areinstalled according to the chain manufac-turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of awinter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are de-termined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recommendedby the tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damageto the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingtire chains. In addition, drive at a reducedspeed. Otherwise, your vehicle may bedamaged and/or vehicle handling andperformance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Drivingwith chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving onclear paved roads.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRESTire rotationNISSAN recommends rotating thetires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”in the “In case of emergency” sectionof this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.


Non-XD models:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

XD models:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times.It is recommended that wheel nutsbe tightened to specification ateach tire rotation interval.

WARNING∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


∙ After rotating the tires, do notuse the Easy-Fill Tire Alert to ad-just the tire pressure. Insteaduse a gauge to adjust the tiresto the correct pressure in accor-dance with Tire and Loading In-formation label.

CAUTIONTo ensure proper operation of theEasy-Fill Tire Alert system after atire rotation, re-set and registerthe sensor to their new installedlocations. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

WDI0258

Do-it-yourself 8-43

Tire wear and damage1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,bulging or objects caught in thetread. If excessive wear, cracks,bulging or deep cuts are found,the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not beobvious. Replace the tires asnecessary to prevent tire failureand possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the sparetire may result in serious per-sonal injury. If it is necessary torepair the spare tire, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


Replacing wheels and tiresWhen replacing a tire, use the same size,tread design, speed rating and load carry-ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec-ommended types and sizes are shown in“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tiresof different brands, construction(bias, bias-belted or radial), or treadpatterns can adversely affect the ride,braking, handling, Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tirechain clearance, speedometer cali-bration, headlight aim and bumperheight. Some of these effects maylead to accidents and could result inserious personal injury.

WDI0259

8-44 Do-it-yourself

∙ If your vehicle was originallyequipped with four tires that were thesame size and you are only replacingtwo of the four tires, install the newtires on the rear axle. Placing new tireson the front axle may cause loss ofvehicle control in some driving condi-tions and cause an accident and per-sonal injury.

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimen-sion. Wheels of a different off-setcould cause premature tire wear, de-grade vehicle handling characteris-tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-terference with the brake discs. Suchinterference can lead to decreasedbraking efficiency and/or early brakepad/shoe wear. For additional infor-mation on wheel-off set dimensions,refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tire pres-sure warning light will flash for ap-proximately 1 minute. The light will re-main on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.


∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged ifit is not handled correctly. Be carefulwhen handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, theID registration may be required. Con-tact a NISSAN dealer for IDregistration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is notspecified by NISSAN. The valve stemcap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps arecorrectly fitted. Otherwise the valvemay be clogged up with dirt andcause a malfunction or loss ofpressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires couldhave structural damage and could failwithout warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is notrecommended.


Four-wheel drive models

CAUTIONAlways use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-beltedor radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and maydamage the transmission, transfer caseand differential gears.

Do-it-yourself 8-45

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-mended that all four tires be replaced withtires of the same size, brand, constructionand tread pattern. The tire pressure andwheel alignment should also be checkedand corrected as necessary. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

∙ For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Care of wheels∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels whenthe wheel is changed or the undersideof the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dentsor corrosion. Such damage may causeloss of pressure or poor seal at the tirebead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt inareas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire)When replacing a wheel without the TPMSsuch as the spare tire, the TPMS will notfunction.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a fullsize spare that is a different size or brandthan the tires originally installed on the ve-hicle. This full size spare tire is intended fortemporary use only and should be re-placed at the first opportunity.

Observe the following precautions if theFULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tiremust be used. Otherwise, your vehiclecould be damaged or involved in an acci-dent:

WARNING∙ The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire

should be used for emergency useonly. It should be replaced with thestandard tire at the first opportunityto avoid possible tire or differentialdamage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving. The vehicle driving perfor-mance may be affected when drivingon wet or snow covered roads.

∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare is installed, the following sys-tems may not work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)System

8-46 Do-it-yourself

∙ Periodically check the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure.Always keep the TEMPORARY FULLSIZE inflated to the pressure specifi-cation shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

∙ With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE sparetire installed do not drive the vehicleat speeds faster than 50 mph(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire should be used on the frontwheels and the original tire used onthe rear wheels. Use tire chains onlyon the drive wheels.

∙ Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire on other vehicles.

∙ Do not use 4WD when the TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed

∙ Do not use more than one TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the sametime.

CAUTION∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may causedamage to the vehicle.

Do-it-yourself 8-47

MEMO

8-48 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Explanation of general maintenanceitems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Additional maintenance items forsevere operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Oil change monitor (diesel engine only) . . . . . . . 9-7

Gasoline standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Gasoline maintenance under severeoperating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Diesel standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . 9-13Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Diesel maintenance under severe operatingconditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Oil change monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your vehi-cle’s good mechanical condition, as well asit’s emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make surethat the scheduled maintenance, as well asgeneral maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receivesproper maintenance. You are a vital link inthe maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCEGeneral maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation. They are essentialfor proper vehicle operation. It is your re-sponsibility to perform these maintenanceprocedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checksrequires minimal mechanical skill and onlya few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be doneby you, a qualified technician or, if you pre-fer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEThe maintenance items listed in this sec-tion are required to be serviced at regularintervals. However under severe drivingconditions, additional or more frequentmaintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICEIf maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and corrected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-cialists who are kept up-to-date with thelatest service information through techni-cal bulletins, service tips and in-dealershiptraining programs. They are completelyqualified to work on NISSAN vehicles be-fore they work on your vehicle rather thanafter they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-er’s service department performs excellentservice to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle — in a reliable andeconomical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smells, be sure tocheck for the cause or have it checkedpromptly. In addition, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer if you thinkthat repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMSAdditional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Doors and engine hood: Check that thedoors and engine hood operate properly.Also ensure that all latches lock securely.Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollersand links if necessary. Make sure that thesecondary latch keeps the hood fromopening when the primary latch is re-leased.

When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights, stoplights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and otherlights are all operating properly and in-stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts aremissing, and check for any loose wheelnuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in alltires, including the spare, to the pressurespecified. Check carefully for damage, cutsor excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components: Replace theTPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve coreand cap when the tires are replaced due towear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-hicle should pull to either side while drivingon a straight and level road, or if you detectuneven or abnormal tire wear, there maybe a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-way speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield at leastevery six months for cracks or other dam-age. Have a damaged windshield repairedby a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure thepedal does not bind or require uneven ef-fort. Keep the floor mat away from thepedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) posi-tion mechanism: On a fairly steep hillcheck that your vehicle is held securelywith the shift lever in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smoothoperation. If the brake pedal suddenly goesdown further than normal, the pedal feelsspongy or the vehicle seems to take longerto stop, have your vehicle checked imme-diately. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brakeoperation regularly. The vehicle should besecurely held on a fairly steep hill with onlythe parking brake applied. If the parkingbrake needs adjustment, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls suchas seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., toensure they operate smoothly and alllatches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints/headrestsmove up and down smoothly and the locks(if so equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (for example, buckles, anchors,adjusters and retractors) operate properlyand smoothly, and are installed securely.Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering system, such as excessive free-play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operatingproperly.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Checkthat the wipers and washer operate prop-erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properlyand in sufficient quantity when operatingthe heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (for example, eachtime you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* (for serviceable batteries):Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluidshould be at the bottom of the filler open-ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-tures or under severe conditions requirefrequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:


1. Installation or extended use of elec-tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.


Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MIN and MAX lineson the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drivebelts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level surface withthe engine off. Wait more than 10 minutesfor the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,cracks, deterioration and damage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as necessary.For additional information, refer to “Exhaustgas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after thevehicle has been parked for a while. Waterdripping from the air conditioner after useis normal. If you should notice any leaks or iffuel fumes are evident, check for the causeand have it corrected immediately.


Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold, withthe engine off. Check the lines for properattachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects,leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to control dust. Itis very important to remove these sub-stances from the underbody, otherwiserust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuellines and exhaust system. At the end ofwinter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in thoseareas where mud and dirt may have accu-mulated. For additional information, referto the “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided togive you a better understanding of thescheduled maintenance items that shouldbe regularly checked or replaced. Themaintenance schedule indicates at whichmileage/time intervals each item requiresservice.

Items marked with “*” are recommendedby NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.You are not required to perform mainte-nance on these items in order to maintainthe warranties which come with yourNISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-tervals are required.

When applicable, additional informationcan be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.

NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the useof non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-ing systems and strongly advises againstperforming these services on a NISSANproduct. Many of the aftermarket flushingsystems use non-OEM approved chemi-cals or solvents, the use of which has notbeen validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMMAINTENANCE:Drive Belts*: Check engine drive belts forwear, fraying or cracking and for propertension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine Air Filter: Replace at specified in-tervals. When driving for prolonged periodsin dusty conditions, check/replace the filtermore frequently.

Engine Coolant*: Replace coolant at thespecified interval. When adding or replac-ing coolant, be sure to use only GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)or equivalent with the proper mixture. (Foradditional information on the proper mix-ture for your area, refer to Engine coolingsystem” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual or the Titan Diesel Owner’sManual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant orthe use of non-distilled water may reducethe recommended service interval of thecoolant.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE ITEMS


Engine Oil and Oil Filter: Replace engineoil and oil filter at the specified intervals. Forrecommended oil grade and viscosity referto “Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

Engine Valve Clearance* (gasoline en-gine only): Inspect only if valve noise in-creases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.

Evaporative Emissions Control VaporLines* (gasoline engine only): Check va-por lines for leaks or looseness. Tightenconnections or replace parts as necessary.

Fuel Filter (diesel engine only): Replacethe fuel filter and drain the water at thespecified intervals.

Fuel Lines*: Check the fuel hoses, pipingand connections for leaks, looseness, ordeterioration. Tighten connections or re-place parts as necessary.

CHASSIS AND BODYMAINTENANCE:Brake Lines and Cables: Visually inspectfor proper installation. Check for chafing,cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.Replace any deteriorated or damagedparts immediately.

Brake Pads and Rotors: Check for wear,deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace anydeteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

Exhaust System: Visually inspect the ex-haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as necessary.

In-Cabin Microfilter: Replace at specifiedintervals. When driving for prolonged peri-ods in dusty conditions, replace the filtermore frequently.

Propeller Shaft(s): Check for damage,looseness, and grease leakage.(4WD/AWD/RWD).

Steering Gear and Linkage, Axle and Sus-pension Parts, Drive Shaft Boots: Checkfor damage, looseness, and leakage of oilor grease. Under severe driving conditions,inspect more frequently.

Tire Rotation: Tires should be rotated ev-ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to theinstructions under “General maintenance”in this section. When rotating tires, checkfor damage and uneven wear. Replace ifnecessary.

Transmission Fluid/Oil, Differential Oil,Transfer Case Oil: Visually inspect for signsof leakage at specified intervals.

Replace automatic transmission fluid atspecified intervals. (For diesel engine models)

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-topcarrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:

∙ Replace the differential oil every20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

∙ Replace the automatic transmission fluidever 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or24 months. (For gasoline engine models)

Off-Road Maintenance: Check the follow-ing items frequently whenever you driveoff-road through deep sand, mud or water:

∙ Brake pads and rotors

∙ Brake lines and hoses

∙ Differential, transmission and transfercase oil

∙ Steering linkage

∙ Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts

∙ Engine air filter

∙ Clutch housing drain (4WD only)


To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-nance schedules that may be used, de-pending upon the conditions in which youusually drive. These schedules containboth distance and time intervals, up to120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. Formost people, the odometer reading will in-dicate when service is needed. However, ifyou drive very little, your vehicle should beserviced at the regular time intervalsshown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance atthe same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMSFOR SEVERE OPERATINGCONDITIONSAdditional maintenance items for severeoperating conditions should be per-formed on vehicles that are driven underespecially demanding conditions. Addi-tional maintenance items should be per-formed if you primarily operate your vehicleunder the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 milesin normal temperatures or less than10 miles in freezing temperatures.

∙ Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather orlow speed driving for long distances.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions or on rough,muddy or salt-spread roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, or using a camper orcar-top carrier.

OIL CHANGE MONITOR (dieselengine only)This vehicle is equipped with oil changemonitor. It calculates engine oil and filterchange interval base on driving conditions.Driving in severe conditions will shorten theengine oil and filter change interval. Whenthe Engine Oil – Service Due Now warningappears in the vehicle information display,the engine oil and filter need to be replaced.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, bothstandard and severe maintenance itemsshould be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


The following tables show the standardmaintenance schedule. Depending uponweather and atmospheric conditions,varying road surfaces, individual drivinghabits and vehicle usage, additional ormore frequent maintenance may be re-quired. Maintenance beyond the last pe-riod on the tables requires similar main-tenance.EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONPerform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first.miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL5

(8)6

10(16)12

15(24)18

20(32)24

25(40)30

30(48)36

35(56)42

40(64)48

45(72)54

50(80)60

55(88)66

60(96)72

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R REngine oil R R R R R R R R R R R REngine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R REngine coolant See NOTE (4)(5)EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*Fuel lines I* I* I*Fuel filter See NOTE (3)Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (6)

GASOLINE STANDARDMAINTENANCE




Months


(104)78

70(112)84

75(120)90

80(128)96

85(136)102

90(144)108

95(152)114

100(160)120

105(168)126

110(176)132

115(184)138

120(192)144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R REngine oil R R R R R R R R R R R REngine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R REngine coolant See NOTE (4)(5)EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*Fuel lines I* I* I*Fuel filter See NOTE (3)Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000)Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (6)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts iffound damaged.(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles(120,000 km) or 60 months.(5) It is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixtureratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled watermay reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.(6) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not performsuch maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items andintervals are required.


CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,



Months


(8)6

10(16)12

15(24)18

20(32)24

25(40)30

30(48)36

35(56)42

40(64)48

45(72)54

50(80)60

55(88)66

60(96)72

Brake lines and cables I I I I I IBrake pads and rotors � I I I I I IBrake fluid � R R RAutomatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I ISteering gear and linkage, axle and suspensionparts �

I I I

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)�

I I I I I I

Exhaust system � I I IIn-cabin microfilter R R R RNISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R




Months


(104)78

70(112)84

75(120)90

80(128)96

85(136)102

90(144)108

95(152)114

100(160)120

105(168)126

110(176)132

115(184)138

120(192)144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I IBrake pads and rotors � I I I I I IBrake fluid � R R RAutomatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I ISteering gear and linkage, axle and suspensionparts �

I I I


I I I I I I

Exhaust system � I I IIn-cabin microfilter R R R RNISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “�” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.(1) Periodic maintenance is not required under normal driving condition. If using under the severe condition such as towing atrailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)or 24 months. NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S automatic transmission fluid. Using automatic transmissionfluid that is not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S may damage the transmission or impact transmission durability. Damagecaused by the use of fluid other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.(3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.


The maintenance intervals shown on thepreceding pages are for normal operatingconditions. If the vehicle is mainly operatedunder severe driving conditions as shownbelow, more frequent maintenance mustbe performed on the following items asshown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-ing for long distance, such as police, taxior door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spreadroads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or acar-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance intervalBrake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 monthsBrake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsSteering gear and linkage, axle and suspensionparts

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsExhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

GASOLINE MAINTENANCE UNDERSEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS


The following tables show the standardmaintenance schedule. Depending uponweather and atmospheric conditions,varying road surfaces, individual drivinghabits and vehicle usage, additional ormore frequent maintenance may be re-quired. Maintenance beyond the last pe-riod on the tables requires similar main-tenance.EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace, D = Drain water



Months


(8)6

10(16)12

15(24)18

20(32)24

25(40)30

30(48)36

35(56)42

40(64)48

45(72)54

50(80)60

55(88)66

60(96)72

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R REngine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R REngine oil filter See NOTE (4) R R R R R REngine coolant Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 monthsFuel lines I* I* I*Fuel filter See NOTES (5) R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D

DIESEL STANDARD MAINTENANCE




Months


(104)78

70(112)84

75(120)90

80(128)96

85(136)102

90(144)108

95(152)114

100(160)120

105(168)126

110(176)132

115(184)138

120(192)144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R REngine oil See NOTE (3) R R R R R REngine oil filter See NOTE (4) R R R R R REngine coolant Replace every 45,000 miles or 36 monthsFuel lines I* I* I*Fuel filter See NOTE (5) R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D R/D

NOTE:

(1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged.(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.(3) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil should be changed at least every 8,000 miles(12,875 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.(4) If operating on biodiesel blends between 6% and 10% (B6 and B10), the oil filter should be changed at least every 8,000 miles(12,875 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first.(5) Both Stage I and Stage II fuel filters.


CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,



Months


(8)6

10(16)12

15(24)18

20(32)24

25(40)30

30(48)36

35(56)42

40(64)48

45(72)54

50(80)60

55(88)66

60(96)72

Brake lines and cables I I I I I IBrake pads and rotors � I I I I I IBrake fluid � R R RAutomatic transmission fluid I R I R I RDifferential gear oil See NOTE (1) I I I I I ITransfer fluid I I I I I ISteering gear and linkage, axle and suspensionparts �

I I I


I I I I I I

Exhaust system � I I I I I IIn-cabin microfilter R R R RNISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R




Months


(104)78

70(112)84

75(120)90

80(128)96

85(136)102

90(144)108

95(152)114

100(160)120

105(168)126

110(176)132

115(184)138

120(192)144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I IBrake pads and rotors � I I I I I IBrake fluid � R R RAutomatic transmission fluid I R I R I RDifferential gear oil See NOTE (1) I I I I I ITransfer fluid I I I I I ISteering gear and linkage, axle and suspensionparts �

I I I


I I I I I I

Exhaust system � I I I I I IIn-cabin microfilter R R R RNISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “�” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance Under Severe Driving Conditions”.(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.(2) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.


The maintenance intervals shown on thepreceding pages are for normal operatingconditions. If the vehicle is mainly operatedunder severe driving conditions as shownbelow, more frequent maintenance mustbe performed on the following items asshown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-ing for long distance, such as police, taxior door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spreadroads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or acar-top carrier.

OIL CHANGE MONITORThis vehicle is equipped with oil changemonitor. It calculates engine oil and filterchange interval base on driving conditions.Driving in severe conditions will shorten theengine oil and filter change interval. Whenthe Engine Oil – Service Due Now warningappears in the vehicle information display,the engine oil and filter need to be replaced.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance intervalBrake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 monthsBrake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsSteering gear and linkage, axle and suspensionparts

Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsExhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsEngine oil and filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or when the Engine Oil

– Service Due Now warning appears in the vehicleinformation display

DIESEL MAINTENANCE UNDERSEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS


5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6MonthsDealer Name:Date:Mileage:DealerStamp:









MAINTENANCE LOG



100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or120 MonthsDealer Name:Date:Mileage:DealerStamp:






MEMO


10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine oil and oil filterrecommendations (for gas engine only) . . . . . 10-7Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

When traveling or registering in anothercountry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-20Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-20Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-21Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Utili-track® channel system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Crew cab models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36King Cab® models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD)vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)test (gas engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetric

MeasureUS

MeasureImperialMeasure

FuelVK56VD 98.4 L 26 gal 21-5/8 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in this

section.

Cummins 5.0 L — — — • For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” chart of the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

Engine oil *1Drain and refill*1 For additionalinformation, refer to“Changing engineoil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section ofthis manual.

VK56VD

With oilfilter

change6.5 L 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt

Gasoline engine models:• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20” (or equivalent) is recommended.• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damagecaused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recom-mended is not covered under NISSAN’s/INFINITI’s New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oilfilter recommendations (for gas engine only)” in this section.

Withoutoil filterchange

6.2 L 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt

Cummins 5.0 L — — —Diesel engine models:• For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” chart of the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

Engine coolantwith reservoir

VK56VD

Non-XDmodel 13.4 L 3-1/2 gal 3 gal

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalentXD

model 13.2 L 3-1/2 gal 2-7/8 gal

Cummins 5.0 L — — — • For additional information, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” chart of the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information


MeasureUS


Automatic Trans-mission Fluid (ATF)

6-speed (Diesel en-gine only)

— — —

• Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF• Using automatic transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Genu-ine NISSAN Matic K ATF may damage the transmission or impacttransmission durability. Damage caused by the use of fluid otherthan as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN New Ve-hicle Limited Warranty.

7-speed (Gasoline en-gine only)

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF ONLY inNISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Usingfluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF maydamage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use offluid other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSANNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Differential gear oil

Front

Non-XDmodel 1.25 L 2-5/8 pt 2-1/4 pt

• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-CT Synthetic GL-575W-90• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil HypoidSuper-CT Synthetic GL-5 75W-90 ONLY in final drive.Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent toGenuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-CT Synthetic GL-575W-90 may damage the differential gear. Damage caused by theuse of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under theNISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

XDmodel 1.51 L 3-1/4 pt 2-5/8 pt

Rear

Non-XDmodel 2.3 L 4-7/8 pt 4 pt

XDmodel 2.6 L 5-1/2 pt 4-5/8 pt

Transfer fluid

Non-XD model 1.5 L 1-5/8 qt 1-3/8 qt• Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M (or equivalent)may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, andmay damage the transfer. Damage caused by fluids other than asrecommended is not covered by the NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

XD model 1.8 L 1-7/8 qt 1-5/8 qt

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent.

Technical and consumer information 10-3


MeasureUS


Brake fluid — — —• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *2 or equivalentDOT 3.*2 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) (or equivalent).

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —• HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) (or equivalent).• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refriger-ant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refriger-ant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze fluid or equivalent.


FUEL RECOMMENDATIONGas engine only

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number91).

CAUTION∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designed torun on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 orE-85 fuel in a vehicle not specificallydesigned for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-versely affect the emission controldevices and systems of the vehicle.Damage caused by such fuel is notcovered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Usingfuel containing MMT may adverselyaffect vehicle performance and ve-hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-tent, so you may have to consult yourgasoline retailer for more details.Note that Federal and California lawsprohibit the use of MMT in reformu-lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbre-viation or the appropriate percentagefor that region.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Fuelrecommendation” in the Titan Diesel Own-er’s Manual.

Gasoline specificationsNISSAN recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)specifications where it is available. Many ofthe automobile manufacturers developedthis specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Askyour service station manager if the gaso-line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing re-formulated gasolines. These gasolines arespecially designed to reduce vehicle emis-sions. NISSAN supports efforts towardscleaner air and suggests that you use re-formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MethylTert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol withor without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use offuels of which the oxygenate content andthe fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-not be readily determined. If in doubt, askyour service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.


∙ The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙ If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

∙ E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affectthe emission control devices and sys-tems of the vehicle and should not beused. Damage caused by such fuel isnot covered by the NISSAN New Ve-hicle Limited Warranty.

∙ If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitableamount of appropriate cosolventsand corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-erly formulated with appropriate co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors,such methanol blends may cause fuelsystem damage and/or vehicle per-formance problems. At this time, suf-ficient data is not available to ensurethat all methanol blends are suitablefor use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as enginestalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,immediately change to a non-oxygenatefuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenatescan cause paint damage.

E–15 fuelE-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.E-15 can only be used in vehicles designedto run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in yourvehicle. U.S. government regulations re-quire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to beidentified with small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbreviationor the appropriate percentage for that re-gion.

E–85 fuelE-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.E-85 can only be used in a Flexible FuelVehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-hicle. U.S. government regulations requirefuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or theappropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMTMMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-ditive. NISSAN does not recommend theuse of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel mayadversely affect vehicle performance, in-cluding the emissions control system. Notethat while some fuel pumps label MMTcontent, not all do, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer for more de-tails.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-ample, fuel injector cleaner, octanebooster, intake valve deposit removers,etc.) which are sold commercially. Many ofthese additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active sol-vents or similar ingredients that can beharmful to the fuel system and engine.


Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended cancause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”(“Spark knock” is a metallic rappingnoise.) If severe, this can lead to enginedamage. If you detect a persistent heavyspark knock even when using gasolineof the stated octane rating, or if you hearsteady spark knock while holding asteady speed on level roads, it is recom-mended that you have a NISSAN dealercorrect the condition. Failure to correctthe condition is misuse of the vehicle, forwhich NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result inspark knock, after-run and/or overheating,which may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or engine damage. If any of the abovesymptoms are encountered, have your ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is nota cause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS (for gasengine only)For diesel engine oil and oil filter recom-mendations, refer to “Engine oil and oil filterrecommendations” section of the TitanDiesel Owner’s Manual.

Selecting the correct oilIt is essential to choose the correct grade,quality and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance.For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends theuse of an energy conserving oil in order toimprove fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-cation or International Lubricant Standard-ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)certification and SAE viscosity standard.These oils have the API certification markon the front of the container. Oils which donot have the specified quality label shouldnot be used as they could cause enginedamage.

LTI2051


Oil additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important to select the engine oilviscosity based on the temperatures atwhich the vehicle will be operated beforethe next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-ity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. Whenreplacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter orits equivalent for the reason described in“Change intervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-fied quality, or exceeding recommended oiland filter change intervals could reduceengine life. Damage to the engine causedby improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity isnot covered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not haveto change the oil before the first recom-mended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how youuse your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditionsmay require more frequent oil and filterchanges:

∙ repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ towing a trailer

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the“Maintenance and schedules” section ofthis manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in yourNISSAN vehicle must be charged with therefrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) andNISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or theexact equivalents.

CAUTIONThe use of any other refrigerant or oilmay cause severe damage to the airconditioning system and may requirethe replacement of all air conditionersystem components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) inyour NISSAN vehicle does not harm theearth’s ozone layer. Although this refriger-ant does not affect the earth’s atmo-sphere, certain government regulations re-quire the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air condi-tioner system service. Air conditioner sys-tem should only be service by trained andcertified technicians to ensure proper andsafe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealerhas the trained technicians and equip-ment needed to recover and recycle yourair conditioner system refrigerant.


A damaged or leaking air conditioningevaporator shall never be repaired or re-placed with one removed from a used orsalvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged orleaking evaporator, use only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerwhen servicing your air conditioner sys-tem.


ENGINEGas engine only

Model VK56VD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)Displacement cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552)Firing order 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.A/T (in “N” position)Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idle

Spark plug DILKAR7B11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chainThis spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Engine” in the Titan Diesel Owner’s Manual.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRESWheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel1.73 (44) 17 x 7.5 J

0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J

Alloy

0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J

0.91 (23) 18 x 8.0 J1.63 (41.5) 18 x 7.5 J0.91 (23) 20 x 8.0 J1.63 (41.5) 20 x 7.5 J

Tire type Performance type Size

Passenger

All season 265/70R18

All season P265/70R18All season P275/60R20All terrain P275/70R18

Light truck

All season LT245/75R17

All terrain LT275/65R18All season LT265/60R20

Spare wheel type Performance type Size

Full size(Non Matching) Steel

- 265/70R18

- P265/70R18- P265/75R18- P275/70R18- P275/60R20- LT245/75R17

Full size(Non Matching) Alloy

- P275/60R20

Full size (Matching)Alloy

- P275/70R18- P275/60R20- LT265/60R20- LT275/60R20- LT275/65R18


DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Non-XD single cab models

Models Units: in (mm)Overall Length: 228.1 (5,794)Overall width: 79.5 (2,020)Overall height:

2WD S 74.5 (1,893)2WD SV 74.6 (1,894)4WD S 75.1 (1,907.9)4WD SV 75.2 (1,908.9)

Front Track:S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

Rear Track:S and SV 67.9 (1,725)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)Gross vehicle weight rating:

Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” onthe center pillar between the driver’s side front andrear doors.

Gross axle weight rating:Front:Rear:


XD single cab models

Models Units: in (mm)Overall Length: 231 (5,866.5)Overall width: 79.5 (2,020)Overall height:

2WD with diesel engine 77.2 (1,960)4WD with diesel engine 77.1 (1959)2WD with gasoline engine 77.3 (1,962.5)4WD with gasoline engine 77.2 (1,962)

Front Track:S and SV 68.4 (1,738)

Rear Track:S and SV 68.4 (1,737)





Non-XD crew cab models

Models Units: in (mm)Overall Length:

S, SV, SL and Platinum 228.1 (5,794)Pro-4X 228.5 (5,804)

Overall width:Tow mirrors non-extended 98.2 (2,494)Tow mirrors extended 103.9 (2,640)Without overfenders S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,020)With overfenders Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,050)Overall height:

2WD S/SV 75.4 (1,915.1)4WD S/SV 76.0 (1,929.7)2WD SL/Platinum 75.6 (1,920.4)4WD Pro-4X 77.2 (1,960.3)4WD SL/Platinum 77.2 (1,959.7)

Front Track:S and SV 67.9 (1,725)SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Rear Track:S and SV 67.9 (1,725)SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)





XD crew cab models

Models Units: in (mm)Overall Length:Without front license plate bracket S, SV, SL and Platinum 242.7 (6,165.7)Without front license plate bracket Pro-4X 243.6 (6,187.1)With front license plate bracket S, SV, SL and Platinum 243.0 (6,172.6)With front license plate bracket Pro-4X 243.9 (6,194.6)Overall width:Tow mirrors non-extended 98.2 (2,494)Tow mirrors extended 103.9 (2,640)Without overfenders S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,020)With overfenders Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,049)Overall height:

2WD/4WD S/SV 78.0 (1981)4WD Pro-4X 78.4 (1,992.3)2WD/4WD SL/Platinum 78.9 (2,002.8)

Front Track:S and SV 68.4 (1,738)SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,743)

Rear Track:S and SV 68.4 (1,737)SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,742)





Non-XD King Cab® models


S and SV 228.1 (5,794)Pro-4X 228.5 (5,804)

Overall width:S and SV 79.5 (2,020)Pro-4X 80.7 (2,049.6)

Overall height:2WD S 75.1 (1,906.6)4WD S 75.7 (1,921.8)2WD SV 75.1 (1,908)4WD SV 75.7 (1,923.2)Pro-4X 76.9 (1,953.2)

Front Track:S and SV 67.9 (1,725)Pro-4X 68.1 (1,729)

Rear Track:S and SV 67.9 (1,725)Pro-4X 68.1 (1,729)





XD King Cab® models


S and SV 230.5 (5,854.7)Pro-4X 231.3 (5876.1)

Overall width:S and SV 79.5 (2,020)Pro-4X 80.7 (2,049)

Overall height:2WD S and SV with diesel engine 77.7 (1,974)2WD S and SV with gasoline engine 77.8 (1,975.9)4WD S and SV with diesel engine 77.7 (1,974)4WD S and SV with gasoline engine 77.8 (1,975.9)4WD Pro-4X with diesel engine 78.1 (1,983)4WD Pro-4X with gasoline engine 78.1 (1,987.7)

Front Track:S and SV 68.4 (1,738)Pro-4X 68.6 (1,743)

Rear Track:S and SV 68.4 (1,737)Pro-4X 68.6 (1,742)





When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should firstfind out if the fuel available is suitable foryour vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is toolow may cause engine damage. All gaso-line vehicles must be operated with un-leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid takingyour vehicle to areas where appropriatefuel is not available.

When transferring the registration ofyour vehicle to another country, state,province or district, it may be necessaryto modify the vehicle to meet local lawsand regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standardsvary according to the country, state, prov-ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation and registration are the re-sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-sponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN)plate is attached as shown. This number isthe identification for your vehicle and isused in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is lo-cated as shown.

LTI2195 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGIN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe engine serial number is stamped onthe engine as shown.

VK56VDWTI0095

Cummins 5.0LLTI2383

Cummins 5.0LLTI2155


F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATIONLABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-cation label is affixed as shown. This labelcontains valuable vehicle information, suchas: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year ofmanufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label isattached to the underside of the hood asshown.

Type A (if so equipped)LTI0135

Type B (if so equipped)WTI0099

XD modelsLTI2197


TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. The label islocated as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is af-fixed to the underside of the hood asshown.

Except XD modelsLTI2242 LTI2196

XD modelsLTI2198


Use the following steps to mount the frontlicense plate:

1. Attach the license plate bracket on theskid plate at the location marked (smalldimple) using self-tapping screws.

Use the following steps to mount the frontlicense plate:

1. Install two grommets �A into thesquare holes in the front bumper.

Except XD modelsLTI2243

Pro-4XLTI2230

Except Pro-4xLTI2225

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


2. Install the license plate bracket to thefront bumper with two tapping screws�B .

WARNING∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-hicle. In a collision, people ridingin these areas are more likely tobe seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride inany area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andseat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMSIt is important to familiarize yourselfwith the following terms beforeloading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight ofyour vehicle) - vehicle weight in-cluding: standard and optionalequipment, fluids, emergencytools, and spare tire assembly.This weight does not includepassengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weightof passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other op-tional equipment. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limitspecified for the front or rear axle.This information is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum totalweight rating of the vehicle, pas-sengers, cargo, and trailer.

Except Pro-4xLTI2226

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Loadlimit, Total load capacity - maxi-mum total weight limit specifiedof the load (passengers andcargo) for the vehicle. This is themaximum combined weight ofoccupants and cargo that can beloaded into the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load.This information is located on theTire and Loading Information la-bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissibleweight of cargo, the subtractedweight of occupants from theload limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITYBefore driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both theGVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.For additional information, refer to“Measurement of weights” in thissection.Do not exceed the load limit of yourvehicle shown as “The combinedweight of occupants and cargo” onthe Tire and Loading Information la-bel. Do not exceed the number ofoccupants shown as “Seating Ca-pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-cupants and cargo”, add the weightof all occupants, then add the totalluggage weight. Examples areshown in the following illustration.


Steps for determining correctload limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXlbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information la-bel.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengersthat will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For ex-ample, if the XXX amount equals1,400 lbs. and there will be five150 lbs. passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)Example

LTI2320


5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggageload capacity calculated instep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to deter-mine how this reduces the avail-able cargo and luggage load ca-pacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed theGVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.For additional information, refer to“Measurement of weights” in thissection.Also check tires for proper inflationpressures. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-mation label” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual.

SECURING THE LOADFor your convenience, tie down hooks areplaced at each corner of the truck box.These may be used to help secure cargoloaded into the truck box.



∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts ofyour vehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause personalinjury.

LTI0102


UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (ifso equipped)

1. Side channels

2. Header channel

3. Channel sections

4. Floor channels

WARNING∙ Properly install and tighten the tie-

down cleats into the Utili-track® chan-nel system. Also, do not attach anyrope or straps directly to the channel.Failure to properly install the tie-down cleats or attaching ropes orstraps directly to the channel cancause the cargo to become unse-cured. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from slidingor shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

NOTE:

If the bed liner storage bins (if soequipped) are installed on the vehicle,use type B cleats (if so equipped) in theside channel locations. The use of type Acleats (if so equipped) in the side channellocations with the bed liner storage binsinstalled will interfere with bed linerstorage bin lid operation. For additionalinformation on bed liner storage bins, re-fer to “Storage” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

The Utili-track® channel system allows youto move tie-down clamps in the bed to thebest location to secure a load.

The tie-down cleats must be installed sothe clamp is properly seated in the notchesin the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seatedin the notches, it will not be flush with therail and cannot be properly tightened. Thebolt in the center of the cleat must be tight-ened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)

Check the tightness of the tie-down cleatperiodically during a trip to make sure thecenter bolt has not become loose.

LTI0107


Install the tie-down cleat as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by slid-ing them out the back of the truck bed.Properly store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

3. Insert the cleat into the channel per-pendicular to the channel as shown.Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° andslide it to the desired location.

Type A cleat (if so equipped)LTI2185

Type B cleat (if so equipped)LTI0103


4. Position the cleat so the nubs on thebottom fully seat into the channel de-tents.




5. There should be no gap between thebottom of the cleat and the top of thechannel. Tighten the center bolt handtight (20-40 in-lbs.).



Type B cleat (if so equipped)WTI0124


CAUTION∙ Install only one cleat per section of

channel.

∙ Applying loads at angles to the cleatsgreater then 45° or loads greater than150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or200 lbs. (side channels) may causedamage to the channel or bed.



Type A cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installationLTI2189


WARNINGDo not install accessories over the gapbetween the front and rear side chan-nels. Doing this could affect the rearstructure in certain rear impacts, whichcould result in serious injury.

LOADING TIPS∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

∙ Do not load the front and rearaxle to the GAWR. Doing so willexceed the GVWR.

WARNING∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help preventit from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rearGAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould result in loss of controland cause personal injury.

∙ Overloading not only canshorten the life of your vehicleand the tire, but can also causeunsafe vehicle handling andlonger braking distances. Thismay cause a premature tire fail-ure which could result in a seri-ous accident and personal in-jury. Failures caused byoverloading are not covered bythe vehicle’s warranty.

Type B cleat (if so equipped) 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installationLTI0123


CREW CAB MODELSCrew Cab short wheel base modelsshould not be used to carry a slide-incamper.

KING CAB® MODELSThis information is provided for you toproperly install a slide-in camper and isbased on the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration regulations. It is rec-ommended that, before installing thecamper, you carefully read the following in-formation and ensure that the campermeets the specifications.

This information may not apply to someCanada model vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLESSome vehicles are equipped with commer-cial or camper bodies. However, this Own-er’s Manual does not cover these options.For additional information, refer to thebody manufacturer’s instruction manual.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OFGRAVITYThe illustration indicates the recom-mended cargo center of gravity location.

Single Cab models:

L1 = 49.0 in (1,245 mm)

Crew Cab Non-XD models:

L1 = 33.8 in (858 mm)

Crew Cab XD models:

L1 = 47.2 in (1,200 mm)

King Cab® Non-XD models:

L1 = 39.6 in (1,005 mm)

King Cab® XD models:

L1 = 47.4 in (1,205 mm)

WARNINGImproper loading may be dangerous. Ifa load is too far back, it can affect han-dling characteristics. If a load is too farforward, the front axle may beoverloaded.

WTI0195

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADINGINFORMATION


When the truck is used to carry a slide-incamper, the total cargo load of the truckconsists of the camper manufacturer’sweight figure, plus:

∙ the weight of installed additionalcamper equipment not included in thecamper manufacturer’s weight figure,

∙ the weight of camper cargo,

∙ and the weight of occupants in thecamper.

The total cargo load should not exceed thetruck’s pay load weight rating and thecamper’s center of gravity should fall within

the truck’s recommended center of gravitylocation when installed.

WARNINGOverloading or improper loading canadversely affect vehicle handling, brak-ing and performance and may lead toaccidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITYThe vehicle payload weight capacityshown on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the maximum total weightof passengers, optional equipment (airconditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) and cargothat your vehicle is designed to carry.

For additional information, refer to “Tire andLoading Information label” in this section.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the GVWR or theGAWR for your vehicle. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Vehicle loading informa-tion” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. For additional information, refer tothe “Tire and Loading Information label” inthis section.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTSSecure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of your vehicle. When the ve-hicle is loaded, drive to a scale andweigh the front and the rear wheelsseparately to determine axle loads.Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weightratings (GAWR). The total of the axleloads should not exceed the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR). Theseratings are given on the vehicle cer-tification label. If weight ratings areexceeded, move or remove items tobring all weights below the ratings.

LTI0129


WARNINGOverloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (805 km).Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not makestarts at full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of your vehiclewear in at the heavier load.

Your new vehicle was designed to be usedprimarily to carry passengers and cargo.Remember that towing a trailer places ad-ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,drive train, steering, braking and other sys-tems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-able on the website atwww.nissanusa.com. This guide includes

information on trailer towing capability andthe special equipment required for propertowing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceedthe value specified in the “Towingload/specification” chart found in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailerweight plus its cargo weight.

∙ When towing a trailer load of3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailerswith a brake system MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR should not exceedthe value specified in the following “Towingload/specification” chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight ofthe towing vehicle (including passengersand cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-ing loads greater than these or using im-proper towing equipment could adverselyaffect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer isnot only related to the maximum trailerloads, but also the places you plan to tow.Tow weights appropriate for level highwaydriving may have to be reduced for lowtraction situations (for example, on slipperyboat ramps).

LTI0161

TOWING A TRAILER


Temperature conditions can also affecttowing. For example, towing a heavy trailerin high outside temperatures on gradedroads can affect engine performance andcause overheating. The engine protectionmode, which helps reduce the chance ofengine damage, could activate and auto-matically decrease engine power. Vehiclespeed may decrease under high load. Planyour trip carefully to account for trailer andvehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNINGOverheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase the chanceof a collision. Be especially careful whendriving. If the vehicle cannot maintain asafe driving speed, pull to the side of theroad in a safe area. Allow the engine tocool and return to normal operation. Foradditional information, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

CAUTIONVehicle damage resulting from im-proper towing procedures is not cov-ered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weightdistributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or usethe trailer tongue load specified by thetrailer manufacturer. The tongue loadmust be within the maximum tongue loadlimits shown in the following “Towingload/specification” chart. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange cargo to al-low for proper tongue load.

WTI0160


King pin loadWhen using a 5th wheel hitch, keep thetongue load between 15 - 25% of the totaltrailer load within the maximum king pinload limits shown in the following “Towingload/specification” chart. If the king pinload becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper king pin load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross AxleWeight (GAW)The GVW of the towing vehicle must notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label. The GVW equals thecombined weight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongueload and any other optional equipment. Inaddition, front or rear GAW must not ex-ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label.

Towing with Weight Distributing Class 4Hitch

The Class 4 towing capacities shown in thetowing load specification charts are calcu-lated per the SAE J2807 standards. Addi-tional passengers, cargo and/or optionalequipment, such as the trailer hitch, willadd weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity andtrailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighedto confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-sured using platform type scales com-monly found at truck stops, highway weighstations, building supply centers or salvageyards.

Towing with Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck towing capacities are cal-culated assuming a base vehicle withdriver and any options required to achievethe rating. Additional passengers, cargoand/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicleand reduce your vehicle’s maximum tow-ing capacity and trailer tongue load.

CA0036


The vehicle and trailer need to be weighedto confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-sured using platform type scales com-monly found at truck stops, highway weighstations, building supply centers or salvageyards.

To determine the available payload capac-ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-ing procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with allof the passengers and cargo that arenormally in the vehicle when towing atrailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight fromthe GVWR. The remaining amount isthe available maximum tongue/kingpin load.

To determine the available towing capacity,use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the"Towing load/specification" chartfound in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weightfrom the GCWR. The remaining amountis the available maximum towing ca-pacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-ment and cargo, that are normally in thetrailer when it is towed. Make sure theGross trailer weight is not more than theGross Trailer Weight Rating shown on thetrailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on thescale to make sure the Front Gross AxleWeight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are notmore than Front Gross Axle Weight andRear Gross Axle Weight on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. Thecargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the speci-fied ratings.

Example:

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargoand hitch - 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg).

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-bel - 8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg).

∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing load/specification" chart -19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg).

∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from“Towing load/specification" chart -9,200 lbs. (4,173 kg).

8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg) GVWR– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available for tongue/king pin weight

19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) GCWR– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Capacity available fortowing

1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available tongueweight

/ 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be lessthan the maximum towing capacity due tothe passenger and cargo load in the ve-hicle.


Remember to keep trailer tongue weightbetween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight orwithin the trailer tongue weight specifica-tion recommended by the trailer manufac-turer. If the tongue weight becomes exces-sive, rearrange the cargo to obtain theproper tongue weight. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specificationshown in the “Towing load/specification”chart even if the calculated availabletongue weight is greater than 15%. If thecalculated tongue weight is less than 10%,shift the trailer load forward until the trailertongue weight reaches 10% of the trailerweight.

Always verify that available capacities arewithin the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNINGThe towing capacities provided in thismanual are for general reference only.The safe towing capacity of your vehicleis affected by dealer and factory in-stalled options and passenger andcargo loads. You must weigh the vehicleand trailer as described in this manualto determine the actual vehicle towingcapacity. Do not exceed the publishedmaximum towing capacity or the GCWRor the GVWR shown on theFMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-sult in an accident causing serious per-sonal injury or property damage.

NOTE:

The SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class4 Hitch specifications are based on S andSV grade models . The Gooseneck Hitchspecifications are based on SV grademodels.

Non-XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Payload 1,860 lbs. (843.7 kg) 1,940 lbs. (880.0 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 9,660 lbs. (4,381.7 kg) 9,540 lbs. (4,327.3 kg)Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 966 lbs. (438.2 kg) 954 lbs. (432.7 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)


Non-XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch




Non-XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch




XD models — Single cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Payload 2,490 lbs. (1,129.4 kg) 2,400 lbs. (1,088.6 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,710 lbs. (5,765.2 kg) 12,430 lbs. (5,638.2 kg)Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 1,271 lbs. (576.5 kg) 1,243 lbs. (563.8 kg)


XD models — Crew cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Payload 1,970 lbs. (893.6 kg) 1920 lbs. (870.9 kg)




XD models — King Cab® — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Payload 2,250 lbs. (1,020.6 kg) 2,080 lbs. (943.5 kg)



XD models — Single Cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Payload 2,330 lbs. (1,056.9 kg) 2,250 lbs. (1020.6 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 12,830 lbs. (5,819.6 kg) 12,550 lbs. (5,692.6 kg)Maximum King pin load *2, *3 1,283 lbs. (582.0 kg) 1,255 lbs. (569.3 kg)


XD models — Crew Cab — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch




XD models — King Cab® — Diesel engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch





XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch



Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg) 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch




XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch




XD models — Single cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch





XD models — Crew cab — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch




XD models — King Cab® — Gasoline engine towing load specification chart — Gooseneck Hitch




*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating.Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towingcapacity.

*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

*3: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg) and 500 lbs. (227 kg)tongue load.

*4: The maximum gross combined weight rating for XD gasoline engine vehicles equipped with 20 inch wheels is 16,900 lbs. (7,666 kg).


TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitchYour vehicle may be equipped with an op-tional trailer tow package. The trailer towpackage includes a receiver-type framemounted hitch. This hitch is rated for themaximum towing capacity of this vehiclewhen the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount andhitch ball that is rated for the trailer to betowed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts andhitch balls are available at a NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-tional trailer tow package, check the tow-ing capacity of your bumper hitch orreceiver-type frame mounted hitch.Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch isavailable at a NISSAN dealer. Make sure thetrailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle to help avoid personal injury or prop-erty damage due to sway caused by cross-winds, rough road surfaces or passingtrucks.

A hitch used for towing 5th wheel andgooseneck trailers can also be installed onyour vehicle. Contact a professional sup-plier of towing equipment to purchase andhave a 5th wheel or gooseneck hitch in-stalled.

WARNINGTrailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier thanthe weight rating of the hitch compo-nents. Never exceed the weight ratingof the hitch components. Doing so cancause serious personal injury or prop-erty damage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size andweight rating for your trailer:

∙ The required hitch ball size is stampedon most trailer couplers. Most hitchballs also have the size printed on thetop of the ball.

∙ Choose the proper class hitch ballbased on the trailer weight.

∙ The diameter of the threaded shank ofthe hitch ball must be matched to theball mount hole diameter. The hitch ballshank should be no more than 1/16”smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ballmust be long enough to be properlysecured to the ball mount. There shouldbe at least 2 threads showing beyondthe lock washer and nut.

Ball mountThe hitch ball is attached to the ball mountand the ball mount is inserted into thehitch receiver. Choose a proper class ballmount based on the trailer weight. Addi-tionally, the ball mount should be chosen tokeep the trailer tongue level with theground.


Bumper towingThe Genuine NISSAN step bumper has pro-visions to install a trailer hitch ball and isdesigned to tow trailers of a maximumweight of 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

NOTE:

The trailer hitch ball cannot be installedon the step bumper if the receiver-typeframe mounted hitch is installed on thevehicle.

To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circlein the center of the step bumper �A , thenremove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitchesA weight carrying or “dead weight” ballmount is one that is designed to carry thewhole amount of tongue weight and grossweight directly on the ball mount and onthe receiver.

Weight distribution hitchThis type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of barsattach to the ball mount and to the trailerto distribute the tongue weight (hitchweight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’tcarry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongueweight transferred through the frame andpushing down on the front wheels. Thisgives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (ClassIV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towingequipment manufacturers to determine ifthey recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system mayaffect the operation of trailer surgebrakes. If you are considering use of aweight-distributing hitch system with asurge brake-equipped trailer, check withthe surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-turer to determine if and how this can bedone.

Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using theweight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-face. With the ignition on and the doorsclosed, allow the vehicle to stand forseveral minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference pointon the front and rear bumpers at thecenter of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-just the hitch equalizers so that thefront bumper height is within 0 -.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the referenceheight measured in step 2. The rearbumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.

LTI2227


WARNINGProperly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. Ifthe rear bumper is higher than the mea-sured reference height when loaded,the vehicle may handle unpredictablywhich could cause a loss of vehicle con-trol and cause serious personal injury orproperty damage.

Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-feting caused by other vehicles can affecttrailer handling. Sway control devices maybe used to help control these affects. If youchoose to use one, contact a reputabletrailer hitch supplier to make sure the swaycontrol device will work with the vehicle,hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using thesway control device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to towtrailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.(907 kg).

Class II hitchClass II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).

Class III hitchClass III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitchClass IV hitches are weight carrying (WC)and weight distributing (WD) hitches de-pending on the vehicle and hitch specifica-tions. Not all Class IV hitches are rated to beboth. See the specific hitch for that infor-mation. Class IV trailer hitch equipment (re-ceiver, ball mount and hitch ball) used asweight carrying are rated up to 10,000 lbs.(4,535 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW) with amaximum trailer tongue weight (TW) of1,000 lbs. (453 kg). Class IV hitches used forweight distributing are rated up to14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) gross trailer weight(GTW) with a maximum trailer tongueweight (TW) of 1,400 lbs. (635 kg). A Class IVhitch usually has a 2" square receiver open-ing. A higher class drawbar does not in-

crease the towing capacity of the hitch. Touse this class of hitch for weight distribu-tion requires a weight distribution system.Class IV hitches attach to the vehicle frameonly. A weight distributing hitch should beused to tow trailers that weigh over5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVweigh distributing trailer hitch that has a14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) maximum weight rat-ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-ing the maximum trailer weights shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart in thissection.

5th wheel/gooseneckA 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can betowed by installing a 5th wheel or goose-neck trailer hitch. These types of hitchesare mounted in the bed of the pick-up. Aprofessional trailer equipment suppliershould install these hitches as it is very im-portant to mount the hitch correctly to dis-tribute the king pin weight for the properload carrying and sway control perfor-mance.

The king pin weight should be 15% of thefully loaded trailer. Make sure the king pinweight does not cause the gross vehicleweight to exceed the Gross Maximum


Weight Rating or the rear axle weight toexceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight rating.For additional information, refer to “Maxi-mum load limits” in this section.

The weight of the trailer should not exceedthe maximum towing capacity for the ve-hicle. For additional information, refer to“Towing load/specification” chart in thissection.

Make sure the trailer design allows for thecorrect vehicle to trailer clearances beforepurchasing a 5th wheel trailer.

WARNING∙ The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaustsystem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

∙ To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securelymounted.

∙ When towing with the hitch ballmounted to the rear bumper, do notmake sharp turns. The trailer maycontact the bumper and cause dam-age to the bumper or trailer.

∙ When towing a 5th wheel trailer, donot make sharp turns while driving orbacking. The trailer may contact thevehicle and cause damage to both thetrailer and vehicle.

CAUTION∙ A 5th wheel hitch adapter is necessary

to use an aftermarket 5th wheel hitch.A Genuine NISSAN 5th wheel hitchadapter (as shown) may be availableat a NISSAN dealer.

∙ Ensure kit components are properlystored when not in use. Improperlystowed components could result inserious personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden stop.

LTI2305


Gooseneck hitch ball and safety chainanchor attachment installation

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Remove the gooseneck hitch ball andsafety chain anchor attachments fromthe storage pouch.

3. Remove the center and both of the rearcaps from the puck plugs.

∙ Once removed, place the pucks in thestorage pouch for future use.

4. Lift the handle from the center of thehitch ball and rotate 90° from the rest-ing position.

LTI2209 LTI2160


5. Position the ball bearings to the sidesof the truck bed and Insert the goose-neck hitch ball into the center receivertube of the truck bed.

6. Rotate the handle 90° seat the handleback to the original resting position. Ifthe handle does not seat fully, rotatethe hitch ball until the handle dropsinto the original resting position.

7. Place the safety chain anchor attach-ments into the q-turn pucks.

LTI2210 LTI2164 LTI2211


8. Rotate the safety chain anchor attach-ments 90° until the center of the an-chor seats into place.

NOTE:

Removal of the gooseneck hitch ball andsafety chain anchor attachments are inthe reverse order of installation. To re-move safety chain anchor attachment,lift the center�1 , rotate 90°, and liftsafety chain anchor attachment away.

Tire pressures∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recom-mended cold tire pressure indi-cated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-ing and proper inflation pressureshould be in accordance with thetrailer and tire manufacturer’sspecifications.

Safety chainsAlways use suitable safety chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. The safetychains should be crossed and should beattached to the hitch, not to the vehiclebumper or axle. The safety chains can beattached to the bumper if the hitch ball ismounted to the bumper. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turn-ing corners.

LTI2212 LTI2192


Trailer lights

CAUTIONWhen splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially availablepower-type module/converter must beused to provide power for all trailerlighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-tery as a direct power source for alltrailer lights while using the vehicle taillight, stop light and turn signal circuitsas a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethan 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using amodule/converter that exceeds thesepower requirements may damage thevehicle’s electrical system. See a repu-table trailer retailer to obtain the properequipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federaland/or local regulations. For assistance inhooking up trailer lights, it is recommendedthat you contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped withthe optional trailer tow package areequipped with a 7-pin trailer harness con-nector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed

to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.Adapters are available at auto parts storesand hitch retailers.

Trailer brakes (if so equipped)If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it is prop-erly installed.

Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer har-ness connector are pre-wired for a trailerbrake controller. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brakeadapter harness.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, moststates require a separate braking systemon trailers with a loaded weight above aspecific amount. Make sure the trailermeets the local regulations and the regu-lations where you plan to tow.

WARNINGThe Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) must never exceed the vehiclemanufacturers recommendation.

Several types of braking systems are avail-able.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-draulic line running to each trailer wheel.Surge brakes are activated by the trailerpushing against the hitch ball when thetow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surgebrakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system,there is no hydraulic or electric connectionfor brake operation between the tow ve-hicle and the trailer.

CAUTIONYour factory trailer brake control unitwill not activate surge-style trailerbrakes

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric brakingsystems are activated by an electronic sig-nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe-cial brake-sensing module). If electric trailerbrakes are used, refer to “Electric trailerbrake controller" in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towingequipment make sure the trailer brakes areproperly installed and demonstrate properbrake function testing.


WARNINGThe NISSAN trailer brake controller hasbeen verified to be compatible withtrailers having electric actuated drumbrakes (one to four axles) and electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not acti-vate hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes

WARNINGNever connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controller (ifso equipped)Trailers equipped with electric brakes mayrequire the installation of an aftermarkettrailer brake controller.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a con-nector and jumper harness that is specifi-cally designed to be used when installingan aftermarket brake controller.

To install the electric trailer brake controllerjumper harness, perform the following pro-cedure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat tothe rearmost position.

exampleLTI0117


2. Apply the parking brake to access thejumper harness connector.

3. Locate the jumper harness connectorunder the lower portion of the instru-ment panel. The connector is taped tothe wiring harness �A as indicated.

Wire color designation for electric trailerbrake controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTERED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp

switch to trailer brakecontroller.

BLACK Brake controllerground (-).

BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controllerswitched output.

RED/BLUE Trailer brake controllerillumination.

RED Fused trailer brakecontroller battery feed(B+).LTI0122 LTI2228


4. Peel off the tape and connect thejumper harness to the connector �B .

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Install the aftermarket electric trailerbrake controller according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

�1 Gain –

�2 Gain +

�3 Manual control lever

�4 Boost

Trailer brake controller unit (if soequipped)The Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU), lo-cated on the lower instrument panel, is adevice that assists the vehicle in havingeffective and smooth braking while towinga trailer.

Operating modes:

∙ Automatic mode: This is the normaloperation of the TBCU depending onthe gain and boost settings adjusted bythe customer. This mode will activatewhen vehicle brake pedal is pressed.

∙ Manual mode: This mode is initiated byadjusting the manual control lever fromresting position. This mode will provideoutput power to trailer brakes withoutapplying the vehicle brake pedal.

To determine the output operation of thesystem:

∙ Gain + and Gain - : Used to increase ordecrease the braking force supplied tothe trailer brakes. To adjust the gain,press Gain + or Gain - to the desiredpoint (0-10). For example: gain setting6.0 is a typical starting point for heavyloads.

∙ Boost: Used to adjust the feel of theautomatic brake event that occurswhen the vehicle brake pedal is applied.To set up boost, press Boost buttononce to display for current boost set-ting (display for 3 seconds). Keep press-ing to increase boost level until the de-sired level (0-3) is achieved.

LTI2229 LTI2157


∙ Manual Control Lever: Provides brakeoutput power to trailer brakes withoutapplying the vehicle brake pedal. Theamount of brake output supplied corre-sponds to the amount of pinch pres-sure applied to the manual controllever.

Prodigy® P2 initial screen at start up (15 seconds*) Boost off

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature notengaged

Boost level 1

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature notengaged

Boost level 2

Power to Prodigy® P2, trailer not connected Boost level 3

Gain feature is adjustable from to by incrementsof

*if sustained for longer, check trailer connections or visit a dealer for service


WARNINGDo not exceed Gross Combined WeightRating (GVWR). For additional informa-tion about GVWR, refer to “Towingload/specification” in this section of themanual.

Pre-towing tips∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or un-loaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive thevehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up ornose-down condition; check for im-proper tongue load, overload, worn sus-pension or other possible causes of ei-ther condition.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-vent load shift while driving.

∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possiblein the trailer to keep the trailer center ofgravity low.

∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%of the trailer load is in the front half and40% is in the back half. Also make surethe load is balanced side to side.

This graphic shows the suggested boost levels for different trailer sizes relative to thevehicle size.

LTI2156


∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts everytime you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-form to all federal, state or local regula-tions. If not, install any mirrors requiredfor towing before driving the vehicle.

∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-hicle and trailer so the required clear-ance is known.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understandingof the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-tice turning, stopping and backing up in anarea which is free from traffic. Steering sta-bility and braking performance will besomewhat different than under normaldriving conditions.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-vent load shift while driving.

∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pinor lock to prevent the coupler from in-advertently becoming unlatched.

∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration orstops.

∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

∙ When backing up, hold the bottom ofthe steering wheel with one hand. Moveyour hand in the direction in which youwant the trailer to go. Make small cor-rections and back up slowly. If possible,have someone guide you when you arebacking up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, if youmust do so:

CAUTIONIf you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on thedownhill side of the vehicle and trailerwheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,slowly release the brake pedal until theblocks absorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case isin 4H, 4LO, or 2H and that the ATP light isoff. If the indicator light is flashing,or the ATP light is ON, make sure thetransmission is in P (Park) (A/T) andturn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. Foradditional information, refer to “Auto-matic transmission park warning light”in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” inthe “Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

7. Turn off the engine.To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailerare clear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store theblocks.


∙ While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle maydecrease overall stability. Therefore, tomaintain adequate control, reduce yourspeed and shift to a lower gear. Avoidlong or repeated use of the brakeswhen descending a hill, as this reducestheir effectiveness and could causeoverheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-stead provides “engine braking” and re-duces the need to brake as frequently.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature risesto a high temperature, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this owner’smanual.

∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’sfirst 500 miles (805 km).

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that youdo tow, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h).

∙ Have your vehicle serviced more oftenthan at intervals specified. For addi-tional information, refer to “Mainte-nance schedules” in the “Maintenanceand schedule” section of this manual.

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheelswill be closer to the inside of the turnthan your vehicle wheels. To compen-sate for this, make a larger than normalturning radius during the turn.

∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,possibly causing vehicle sway. Whenbeing passed by larger vehicles, be pre-pared for possible changes in cross-winds that could affect vehicle han-dling.

Trailer Sway Assist:

To minimize trailer sway, your vehicle mayapply braking to individual wheels basedon input from your vehicle sensors and ve-hicle speed. Trailer sway control is a func-tion of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system and is active when the VDC func-tion is enabled.

CAUTIONIf the VDC-OFF switch is on (meaningVDC system OFF), the Trailer Sway As-sist is also disabled

When Trailer Sway Assist is in operation, theVDC warning light blinks. When vehicle con-trol is regained, VDC warning light will turnOFF.

For additional information about the VDCsystem, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section and “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

If Trailer Sway Assist activates, do the fol-lowing:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedalto allow the vehicle to coast and steeras straight ahead as the road condi-tions allow. This combination will helpstabilize the vehicle

CAUTIONDo not try to correct trailer sway bysteering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-ply the brakes and pull to the side of theroad in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it isbalanced. For additional information,refer to “Pre-towing tips” in this section.


NOTE:

Trailer Sway Assist cannot reduce trailersway in all situations.

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than nor-mal passing. Remember, the length ofthe trailer must also pass the other ve-hicle before you can safely changelanes.

∙ Use the Tow Mode or downshift thetransmission to a lower gear for enginebraking when driving down steep orlong hills. This will help slow the vehiclewithout applying the brakes.

∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat, resulting in re-duced braking efficiency.

∙ Increase your following distance to al-low for greater stopping distanceswhile towing a trailer. Anticipate stopsand brake gradually.

∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruisecontrol (if so equipped) not be usedwhile towing a trailer.

∙ Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for ve-hicles that are towing trailers. Obey thelocal speed limits.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harnessconnections, and trailer wheel lug nutsafter 50 miles (80 km) of travel and atevery break.

∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow thewater level to go over the exhaust tailpipe or rear bumper.

∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailerlights before backing the trailer into thewater or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, referto the “Do-it-yourself” section in thismanual.

Tow modeUsing tow mode is recommended whenpulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavyload. Press the TOW MODE switch to acti-vate tow mode. The indicator light on theTOW MODE switch illuminates when towmode is selected. Press the TOW MODEswitch again to turn tow mode off. Tow

mode is automatically canceled when theignition switch is turned off.

Tow mode includes the following features:

∙ Grade logic — Adjusts transmissionshifts when pulling a trailer or hauling aload up a grade.

∙ Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto-matically downshifts when drivingdown a grade with a trailer or heavyload to help control vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will notcause any damage. However, fueleconomy may be reduced and thetransmission/engine driving characteris-tics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, referto the “Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.


FLAT TOWING FOR 2-WHEEL DRIVE(2WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)Towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground is sometimes called flat towing.This method is sometimes used whentowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Never flat tow your 2WD vehicle.

∙ Never tow your 2WD vehicle with therear wheels on the ground. Doing somay cause serious and expensivedamage to the powertrain.

∙ DO NOT tow your 2WD vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground (flat tow-ing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internaltransmission parts due to lack oftransmission lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-fer to “Towing recommended byNISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR 4-WHEEL DRIVE(4WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)Towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground is sometimes called flat towing.This method is sometimes used whentowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Never flat tow your 4WD vehicle.

∙ DO NOT tow your 4WD vehicle withany wheels on the ground. Doing somay cause serious and expensivedamage to the powertrain.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-fer to “Towing recommended byNISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-hicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dollymanufacturer’s recommendations whenusing their product.

NISSAN does not make a snowplow for TI-TAN and has not evaluated the suitability ofits trucks for use as snowplow platforms.Instead, the snowplow manufacturers es-tablish minimum vehicle requirements fortheir various plow products and they makethe determination as to which vehicle plat-forms are suitable, based on their indi-vidual product specifications. Consult thesnowplow manufacturers and sellers con-cerning the fitness of the TITAN for use withtheir products. NISSAN advises cautionwhenever installing aftermarket parts andaccessories because these products havenot been tested or certified by NISSAN.Please reference the NISSAN Body Builder’sguide for the appropriate upfit capacitiesand requirements of the TITAN XD ‘Snow-plow Prep’ package (if so equipped) or ‘HDFront GAWR’ Package (if so equipped).

WARNING∙ Installing a snowplow may affect ve-

hicle handling. This may cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicleand could result in vehicle damage,serious injury, or death.

SNOW PLOW


∙ A snowplow attached may affect theoperation of the air bags. Use extremecaution while driving and plowing toavoid vehicle damage, serious injury,or death.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA TemperatureA

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include ac-celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat, and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-cessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passengercar tires must meet under the Federal Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. GradesB and A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly in-flated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combi-nation, can cause heat build-up andpossible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet which comes withyour NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,you may obtain a replacement by writingto:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet which comes withyour NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,you may obtain a replacement by writingto:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY


For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a re-call and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehicle

safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.You may notify NISSAN by contact-ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.For CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifyingNISSAN.If Transport Canada receives com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayrequest that NISSAN conduct a recallcampaign. However, TransportCanada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’sDefect Investigations and RecallsDivision toll free at 1-800-333-0510.You may also report safety defectsonline at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)Additional information concerningmotor vehicle safety may be ob-tained from Transport Canada’sRoad Safety Information Centre at1-800-333-0371 or online atwww.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (Englishspeakers) orwww.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere(French speakers).To notify NISSAN of any safety con-cerns please contact our ConsumerInformation Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


WARNINGA vehicle equipped with 4-Wheel Drive(4WD) should never be tested using atwo wheel dynamometer (such as thedynamometers used by some states foremissions testing), or similar equip-ment. Make sure you inform the test fa-cility personnel that your vehicle isequipped with 4WD before it is placedon a dynamometer. Using the wrongtest equipment may result in transmis-sion damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in seriousvehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some statesand Canadian Provinces, your vehicle maybe required to be in what is called the“ready condition” for anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theemission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the ready condition canbe obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-tion. Before taking the I/M test, check thevehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Place the ignitionswitch in the ON position without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) comes on steady for 20 secondsand then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M testcondition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-tion is “ready”. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

diesel engine only


This vehicle is equipped with an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purpose of anEDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, datathat will assist in understanding how a ve-hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-signed to record data related to vehicle dy-namics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehiclewere operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (gasengine only)

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


These data can help provide a better un-derstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR dataare recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g.name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash in-vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer and NISSANdealer, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, that have the special equipment, canread the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only beaccessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for thismodel year and prior can be purchased. AGenuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information foryour vehicle. This manual is the same oneused by the factory-trained techniciansworking at NISSAN dealerships. GenuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSANService Manual or Owner’s Manual, for thismodel year and prior, please contact yournearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in yourarea, call the NISSAN Information Center at1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


11 IndexA

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . .2-52Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 1-75

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-80Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-22Air bag warning light,supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-22Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-20Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . .4-33, 4-39Air conditioner specification label . .10-21Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . .10-8Air conditioner system refrigerantrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-43

Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-43Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-17Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-56Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . .3-43, 3-45Automatic power window switch. . .2-85Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-34Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-43, 3-45Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68, 8-15Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Battery replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-27

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-15Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-23Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-56

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-32Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55Brake warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Brake wear indicators . . . . . .2-25, 8-22Parking brake operation . . . . . . . .5-23Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-17Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Cargo(See vehicle loading information) . . . .10-23Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-89Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 2-38Child restraints . . . . . . .1-24, 1-25, 1-26, 1-29

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29Precautions on childrestraints . . . . .1-26, 1-34, 1-40, 1-44, 1-49

Top tether strap anchor pointlocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-10Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-25Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . .2-55C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-20Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88Controls

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-39Heater and air conditioner controls(manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-8

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . .5-41, 5-41, 5-42Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78Curtain side-impact and rollover airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-78

D

Daytime Running Light System . . .2-52, 8-30Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). . . . . . . . .8-11Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-12Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-53Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6

Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . .3-43, 3-45Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-68Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-9

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

E

Eco Drive Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53Economy - fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-13, 6-2Emission control information label . . . .10-20Emission control system warranty . . . .10-65Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine compartment checklocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-8

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-5Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . .2-10, 2-11Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-19Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-19Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . .10-10

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-8Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . .2-10, 2-11Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-67Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2Explanation of scheduled maintenanceitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-70Eyeglass case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-13

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-20Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

11-2

Front air bag system(See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 1-75Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . .5-63Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-5Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-5Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-40

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) SystemTire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver . .2-89, 2-90, 2-91, 2-92, 2-92, 2-93Gauge

Automatic transmission fluidtemperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-8Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . .2-10, 2-11Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81

H

Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-52Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-49Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Headlights, aiming control. . . . . . . . . .2-52Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Heated rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-59Heater

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-39Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-40

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . .4-38Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-61Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . .5-61Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. .2-89, 2-90,

2-91, 2-92, 2-92, 2-93Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

I

Ignition switchPush-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-11

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 5-14Important vehicle information label . . .10-20In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-44Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . .3-34Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-53Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-8, 2-4Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-53Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . . .4-11Intelligent Key system

Key operating range. . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-16Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-22Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-87ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14, 8-18

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

11-3

Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-27Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-16

KeysNISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . .3-2, 3-10NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . .10-21C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-20Emission control information label . .10-20Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-19F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-20Tire and Loading Information label . .10-21Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-18Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-80

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-22Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-22Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-32Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-17Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-32

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-49Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-49Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-87Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Low tire pressure warning light. . . . .2-20Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-63Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-25Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-10Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-22, 2-37Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-20Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82Luggage(See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-23

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-23Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4

Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Malfunction indicator light . . . . . .2-22, 2-24Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43, 3-45Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-10

Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-53Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-34Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Rearview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-24

N

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-10NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 5-14

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

11-4

OilCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-77Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-16Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-68Owner's manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-68

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-55

Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-5Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7Power outlet . . . . . . . . . .2-67, 2-67, 2-69Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-84Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-55Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-84

Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67, 2-67, 2-69Power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Precautions

Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7Precautions on boosterseats . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-34, 1-40, 1-44, 1-49Precautions on child restraints . .1-26, 1-34,1-40, 1-44, 1-49Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 1-68Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-9

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-89

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-67Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA). . . . . . . .5-33Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41, 2-66Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) System . . .4-44Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . . . .2-64Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Rear window and/or outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Recorders

Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-67Refrigerant recommendation. . . . . . . .10-8Registering a vehicle in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-24, 5-16Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-66

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-10Child seat belts . .1-26, 1-34, 1-40, 1-44, 1-49Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-66

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment. . . . . .1-4Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-5

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72Seat belt

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-25Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-15Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-23Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15, 7-6Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-22Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-18

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-18, 2-19

11-5

SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner . . . .3-43, 3-45Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Security system (NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), engine start. . . . . . . . . .2-44, 5-14Security systems

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-43Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Service manual order form . . . . . . . .10-68Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-19Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-22Side air bag system(See supplemental side air bag, curtain androllover air bag systems) . . . . . . . . . . .1-78Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-63Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-6SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-80Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-59Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-15Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14, 8-18Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-9Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16

Starting the engine (diesel only) . . . . . .5-16Starting the engine(gasoline engine only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Steering

Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-55

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71Storage tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-80Supplemental air bag warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-22Supplemental front impact air bagsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-60, 1-75Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-80Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 1-68

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-53Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Automatic power window switch . . .2-85Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . .2-52Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-49Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-49Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . .2-61Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-53

Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-7Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . .2-63Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-64Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39, 3-39Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-8Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44, 5-14Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 6-6, 8-46Tire and Loading Information label . .10-21Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43Tires of 4-wheel drive. . . . . . . . . . .8-45Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-64Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-35, 10-11Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Low tire pressure warning light. . . . .2-20

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3, 6-3Towing

2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-63

11-6

Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-42Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-38

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-38Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) . . . .2-66Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . .2-89,2-90, 2-91, 2-92, 2-92, 2-93

Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . .5-46Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission . .5-17Travel (See registering a vehicle in anothercountry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39, 3-39Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . .10-36Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

U

Under seat storage bin. . . . . . . . .2-73, 2-77Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-64USB/iPod® Charging Ports. . . . . . . . . .4-43Using 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-19Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-12Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. .5-59

Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-18Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18Vehicle immobilizer system. . . . . .2-44, 5-14Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . .2-26Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-23Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19, 6-20Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Vehicle security system (NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System), engine start . .2-44, 5-14Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-22Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-17Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-19Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-19Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-19Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-40Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-22, 2-37Low tire pressure warning light. . . . .2-20Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-63Passenger's seat belt warning light andchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-18, 2-19Supplemental air bag warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-22Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-43Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . .1-80

Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-23Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Warning systems switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-59Weights(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-12Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35, 10-11Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11When traveling or registering in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83

Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-84Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-84Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-84Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . .2-86

Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Wiper

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-46

11-7

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:Gas engine only

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-KnockIndex) number (Research octane number91).

CAUTION∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designed torun on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 orE-85 fuel in a vehicle not specificallydesigned for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-versely affect the emission controldevices and systems of the vehicle.Damage caused by such fuel is notcovered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Usingfuel containing MMT may adverselyaffect vehicle performance and ve-hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-tent, so you may have to consult yourgasoline retailer for more details.Note that Federal and California lawsprohibit the use of MMT in reformu-lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbre-viation or the appropriate percentagefor that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”in the “Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Fuelrecommendation” in the Titan Diesel Own-er’s Manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:Gas engine only

∙ Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20” (orequivalent).

For additional information, refer to “Engineoil and oil filter recommendations” in the“Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Engineoil recommendation” in the Titan DieselOwner’s Manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:Refer to the Tire and Loading Informationlabel.

The label is typically located on the driverside center pillar or on the driver’s door. Foradditional information, refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:Gas engine only

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ofvehicle use, follow the break-in procedurerecommendations for the future reliabilityand economy of your new vehicle. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Break-inschedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in vehicledamage or shortened engine life.

Diesel engine only

For additional information, refer to “Enginebreak-in recommendations” in the TitanDiesel Owner’s Manual.

A61-D

Printing : July 2018Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.OM19EA 0A61U0

2019 TITAN DIESELOWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SUPPLEMENT

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Owner’s Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates the followinginformation in the 2019 NISSAN Titan Diesel Supplement. In “FUEL FILTER(CUMMINS 5.0L)” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of the Owner’s Manual.

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: December 2018Publication No. SU19EA +A61U0

SchulzH

Rectangle

CAUTIONYour vehicle may require more frequentmaintenance if it operates on biodieselblends between 6% and 10% (B6 andB10). To avoid damage to your vehicle,the oil, oil filter, and fuel filter will needto be replaced after a shorter time in-terval than if your vehicle was operat-ing on pure petroleum-based diesel.For additional information, refer to the“Maintenance and schedules” section inthe Titan Owner’s Manual.

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage1)

NOTE:

∙ It is possible the “Low Fuel Pressure:See Owner’s Manual” message willdisplay on the vehicle informationdisplay after fuel filter replacementdue to air being introduced into thefuel system.

∙ If the “Low Fuel Pressure: See Owner’sManual” message is displayed on thevehicle information display with theengine running, complete a full keycycle (turn the vehicle off and wait2 minutes) and restart the vehicle. Ifthe message is still displayed or theMalfunction Indicator Light is illumi-nated after a full key cycle , it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for service.

WARNING∙ The fuel system (fuel pump, high pres-

sure fuel lines, fuel rail, injectors) con-tain very high pressure fuel. To avoidthe risk of personal injury or fire;

– Do not loosen any fittings while theengine is running.

– Wait at least 10 minutes after shut-ting down the engine before loos-ening any fittings in the high-pressure fuel system to allowpressure to decrease to a lowerlevel.

– Wear appropriate eye protectionand protective equipment as high-pressure fuel spray can penetratethe skin.

Fuel filter (stage 1) locationLDI2921

FUEL FILTER (CUMMINS 5.0L)

SchulzH

Rectangle

– Never smoke or allow sparks orflames (such as pilot lights, electri-cal switches, or welding equip-ment) in the work area. Never allowdiesel fuel to spill onto a hot ex-haust manifold which can cause afire.

∙ Depending on the circumstance, die-sel fuel is flammable. When inspect-ing or performing service or repairson the fuel system, to reduce the pos-sibility of fire and resulting severepersonal injury, death, or propertydamage, never smoke or allow sparksor flames (such as pilot lights, electri-cal switches, or welding equipment) inthe work area.

∙ Do not vent the fuel system on a hotengine; this can cause fuel to spillonto a hot exhaust manifold, whichcan cause a fire.

∙ Batteries can emit explosive gases. Toreduce the possibility of personal in-jury, always ventilate the compart-ment before servicing the batteries.To reduce the possibility of arcing, re-move the negative (-) battery cablefirst and attach the negative (-) bat-tery cable last.

∙ When using a steam cleaner, wearsafety glasses or a face shield, as wellas protective clothing. Hot steam cancause serious personal injury.

∙ Wear appropriate eye and face pro-tection when using compressed air.Flying debris and dirt can cause per-sonal injury.

CAUTIONClean all around the filter area beforedisassembly. Dirt or contaminants candamage the fuel system.

REMOVAL

NOTE:

Leaving the housing un-installed fromthe module for extended periods of timecould cause the fuel tank to drainthrough the stage 1 fuel filter module.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition and wait 2 minutes before dis-connecting the batteries.

2. Disconnect the left and right side bat-teries.

LDI2895

SchulzH

Rectangle

3. Clean the area around the stage 1 fuelfilter.

4. Drain the fuel filter housing. For addi-tional information, refer to “Drainingwater” in this section.

5. Close the water-in-fuel drain.

6. Disconnect the wiring harness �A fromthe water-in-fuel sensor.

7. Remove the fuel filter housing (Stage 1)protector �B from the module �C .

NOTE:

- It may be necessary to use a screw-driver in the slots provided to remove thefuel filter element from the housing.- If fuel filter element does not releasewith housing remove the element bytwisting and pulling directly away frommodule simultaneously. Do not bend orexert a side force as that may damagethe filter assembly and result in no-start.

8. Remove the fuel filter element �D bylifting it out of the fuel filter housing.

9. Remove and discard the sealing o-ring�E from the fuel filter housing.

INSPECTIONInspect the fuel filter housing and modulefor cracks, passage blockages, and otherdamage. If damage is found, replacementis mandatory.


LDI2896

SchulzH

Rectangle

INSTALLATION

CAUTIONDo not pre-fill the fuel filter with fuel.Pre-filling the filter can result in debrisentering the fuel system and damagingfuel system components.

10. Inspect the fuel filter element �1 for theNo Filter No Run (NFNR) pin �H and re-place fuel filter element if pin is dam-aged or missing.

NOTE:

A broken/sheared NFNR pin can causethe pump to operate without supplyingfuel pressure.

11. Lubricate the inner seal of the fuel filterelement with petroleum jelly or whitelithium grease.

12. Install a new o-ring on the housing. Lu-bricate the o-ring with petroleum jellyor white lithium grease.

NOTE:

If you are using a new fuel filter housingthat has not had fuel in it, lubricate the lipseal at the bottom of the fuel filter ele-ment with petroleum jelly or whitelithium grease before placing it into thehousing.

13. Install the fuel filter element into the fuelfilter housing and make sure the fourtabs �F are properly seated into thefour slots �G .

14. Install the fuel filter housing on themodule.

Fuel filter housing tightening torque:18 ft-lb (25 N·m)

CAUTIONAlways use a socket on the hex on thebottom of the fuel filter housing to as-sist in proper installation. Failure totorque as required may result in a fuelleak and a no start condition.

LDI2897 LDI3406

SchulzH

Rectangle

15. Connect the wiring harness to thewater-in-fuel sensor.

16. Reinstall the fuel filter housing (stage 1)protector.

17. Connect the left and right side batter-ies.

18. Prime the fuel system. For additionalinformation, refer to “Fuel system prim-ing” in this section.

FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage2)

NOTE:

∙ It is possible the “Low Fuel Pressure:See Owner’s Manual” message willdisplay on the vehicle informationdisplay after fuel filter replacementdue to air being introduced into thefuel system.

LDI2891 LDI2893

SchulzH

Rectangle

∙ If the “Low Fuel Pressure: See Owner’sManual” message is displayed on thevehicle information display with theengine running, complete a full keycycle (turn the vehicle off and wait2 minutes) and restart the vehicle. Ifthe message is still displayed or theMalfunction Indicator Light is illumi-nated after a full key cycle , it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for service.

∙ For additional information on the lo-cation of the fuel filter (stage 2), referto the “Engine compartment checklocations” in this section.

WARNING∙ The fuel system (fuel pump, high pres-

sure fuel lines, fuel rail, injectors) con-tain very high pressure fuel. To avoidthe risk of personal injury or fire;

– Do not loosen any fittings while theengine is running.

– Wait at least 10 minutes after shut-ting down the engine before loos-ening any fittings in the high-pressure fuel system to allowpressure to decrease to a lowerlevel.

– Wear appropriate eye protectionand protective equipment as high-pressure fuel spray can penetratethe skin.

– Never smoke or allow sparks orflames (such as pilot lights, electri-cal switches, or welding equip-ment) in the work area. Never allowdiesel fuel to spill onto a hot ex-haust manifold which can cause afire.

∙ Batteries can emit explosive gases. Toreduce the possibility of personal in-jury, always ventilate the compart-ment before servicing the batteries.To reduce the possibility of arcing, re-move the negative (-) battery cablefirst and attach the negative (-) bat-tery cable last.

∙ When using a steam cleaner, wearsafety glasses or a face shield, as wellas protective clothing. Hot steam cancause serious personal injury.

∙ Wear appropriate eye and face pro-tection when using compressed air.Flying debris and dirt can cause per-sonal injury.

CAUTIONClean all around the filter area beforedisassembly. Dirt or contaminants candamage the fuel system.

REMOVAL

WARNING∙ Depending on the circumstance, fuel

is flammable. When inspecting or per-forming service or repairs on the fuelsystem, to reduce the possibility offire and resulting severe personal in-jury, death, or property damage, neversmoke or allow sparks or flames (suchas pilot lights, electrical switches, orwelding equipment) in the work area.

∙ Do not bleed the fuel system of a hotengine; this can result in fuel spillingonto a hot exhaust manifold, whichcan cause a fire.

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition and wait 2 minutes before dis-connecting the battery.

2. Disconnect the left and right side bat-teries.

SchulzH

Rectangle

3. Disconnect the harness connector �Dfrom the mass air flow sensor �1 .

4. Disconnect the harness connector �Efrom the turbocharger compressor in-take pressure/temperature sensor �2 .

5. Clean the area around the fuel filter(Stage 2).

6. Remove the air cleaner lid and air inletconnection air ducts.

CAUTION∙ Cap or wrap the air inlet ducts with

suitable material to avoid dirt or con-taminants from entering the air inletsystem or engine.

∙ If step 6 is not performed, the fuel fil-ter element (Stage 2) cannot be in-stalled correctly and will likely dam-age the fuel filter element (Stage 2)inner seal and can cause DTC’s to setand/or a no-start condition.

7. Remove the cover �A from the stage 2fuel filter by rotating counter-clockwise.

NOTE:

Remove the cover slowly to avoid fuelspillage.

8. Remove the fuel filter element �C fromthe cover by hand.

9. Inspect the fuel filter element (Stage 2�3 ) to verify the inner seal �F is present.If inner seal is missing from the filterelement proceed to step 10.

LDI3407 LDI3408

SchulzH

Rectangle

10. Remove inner seal �G from fuel filter(Stage 2) housing �4 .

11. Remove and discard the sealing o-ring�B from the cover.

CAUTIONDo not reuse O-ring.

INSPECTIONInspect the fuel filter housing and cover forcracks, passage blockages, and otherdamage. If damage is found, replacementis mandatory.


INSTALLATION

CAUTIONDo not pre-fill the fuel filter with fuel.Pre-filling the filter can result in debrisentering the fuel system and damagingfuel system components.

12. Install a new o-ring on the cover. Lubri-cate the o-ring with petroleum jelly orwhite lithium grease.

LDI3412 LDI2892

SchulzH

Rectangle

13. Lubricate the inner seal on the fuel filterelement with petroleum jelly or whitelithium grease.

14. Install the fuel filter element onto thestandpipe in the fuel filter housing.

CAUTION∙ Do not install the fuel filter element

into the fuel filter lid first or the fuelfilter element may be damaged dur-ing installation into the housing.

∙ Be sure the fuel filter element isseated in the housing by pushingdownward on the top of the element.If the fuel filter element is not fullyseated in the housing after installa-tion, the engine can fail to startand/or set low fuel pressure Diagno-sis Trouble Codes (DTCs).

NOTE:

It is possible Diagnosis Trouble Codes(DTCs) may be stored after fuel filter ele-ment replacement due to air introducedin the system. Make sure to run the en-gine until air is purged. If the engine failsto start and/or set low fuel pressurewarning, illuminate it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer or otherqualified technician.

15. Install and tighten the cover.

Cover tightening torque:18 ft-lb (25 N·m)

16. Install the air cleaner lid and air inletconnection air ducts.

17. Connect the left and right side batter-ies.

18. Prime the fuel system. For additionalinformation, refer to “Fuel system prim-ing” in this section.

LDI2894

SchulzH

Rectangle

DRAINING WATER

WARNINGTo avoid the risk of personal injury orfire, drain diesel fuel into an approvedcontainer and safely dispose of in ac-cordance with local environmentalregulations.

CAUTIONContinuing vehicle operation withoutproperly draining could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

1. Shut the engine off.

2. Place a large drain pan under the drainvalve �A .

3. Turn the drain valve counterclockwise1/4 turn to open.

4. Drain the filter sump until clear fuel isvisible. If draining the stage 1 fuel filterhousing, drain until fuel reduces to atrickle.

5. Turn the drain valve clockwise 1/4 turnto close.

FUEL SYSTEM PRIMING

WARNINGThe fuel pump, high-pressure fuel lines,and fuel rail contain very high-pressurefuel. To reduce the possibility of per-sonal injury, never loosen any fittingswhile the engine is running.

NOTE:

∙ It is not necessary to vent air from thehigh-pressure fuel system beforestarting the engine.

∙ Upon ignition on the electric lift pumpwill run until the fuel system is primedor 90 seconds, whichever comes first.

After a filter change or running the fuel tankdry, complete the following:

1. Key ON vehicle for 90 seconds to primethe fuel system. After 90 seconds, crankthe engine for a maximum of 30 sec-onds or until the engine fires. If it doesnot fire, verify the following.

– Confirm fuel level is not empty.

– Water in fuel drain valve is closed.

– Stage 1 filter housing shell is fullyseated on module and stage 2 cap isproperly seated on module.

– Stage 1 shell O-ring and stage 2 capO-ring are properly installed and notdamaged.

LDI2898

SchulzH

Rectangle

– Stage 1 fuel filter element �1 “NoFilter/No Run” pin �A is not dam-aged.

– Stage 2 fuel filter element �2 seal �B(at bottom of element) is not dam-aged (seal can be damaged if ele-ment is installed incorrectly).

– Then repeat the step above.

2. When the engine does start, it may op-erate erratically and with increasednoise levels for a few minutes. This is anormal condition as air is being re-moved from the system.

CAUTIONRepeated dry priming may damage thefilter assembly and result in a no-start.

NOTE:

It is possible for a warning or indicatorlight to illuminate due to air entering thefuel system. If this happens, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor service.

LDI3410 LDI3411

SchulzH

Rectangle

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGWARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passengervehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you tochemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoidbreathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated areaand wear gloves or wash your hands frequently whenservicing your vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This diesel engine supplement includes in-formation needed to correctly operate andmaintain all Cummins diesel engine sys-tems available on this model. For addi-tional information about vehicle specificsystems, refer to the Owner’s Manual pro-vided with your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect atthe time of printing. NISSAN reserves theright to change specifications, perfor-mance, design, or component supplierswithout notice and without obligation.From time to time, NISSAN may update orrevise this manual to provide Owners withthe most accurate information currentlyavailable. Please carefully read and retainwith this manual all revision updates sentto you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and anyupdates can also be found in the Ownersection of the NISSAN website athttps://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/navigation/manualsGuide.

If you have questions concerning any infor-mation in your Owner’s Manual, it is recom-mended that you contact NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs for this service. For additionalinformation, refer to the NISSAN CUS-TOMER CARE PROGRAM page in your 2019TITAN Owner’s Manual for contact informa-tion.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNINGThis is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause death or seri-ous personal injury. To avoid or reducethe risk, the procedures must be fol-lowed precisely.

CAUTIONThis is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damage toyour vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,the procedures must be followedcarefully.

FOREWORD WHEN READING THIS SUPPLEMENT

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in anillustration, it means the arrow points tothe front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese call attention to an item in the illus-tration.

© 2018 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted in anyform, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-erwise, without the prior written permis-sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

Table ofContents

Introduction

Instrument Panel

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Fuel and Refueling

In Case of Emergency

Vehicle Care

Do-it-yourself

Capacities and Specifications

Index

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 Introduction

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Diesel engine operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Engine break-in recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Diesel fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Engine protection mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

Lubrication system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Glow plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) System . . . . . . . . . 1-4Selective catalytic reduction system. . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Nissan customer care program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Preventive maintenance is the easiest andleast expensive type of maintenance. Keeprecords of regularly scheduled mainte-nance and follow the maintenance sched-ule recommendations outlined in the TitanOwner’s Manual.

Use the correct fuel, lubricating oil, andcoolant in your engine. Blending engine oilwith fuel is prohibited for engines with anaftertreatment system. For additional in-formation, refer to the “Capacities andspecifications” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle.When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist youwith the extensive resources available tothem.

DIESEL ENGINE OPERATIONThe operation of the diesel engine in yournew vehicle varies from the operation oftraditional gasoline engines found in othervehicles. Reading this supplement will fa-miliarize you and other operators of thevehicle with the unique maintenance andoperating procedures that will prolong thelife of the diesel engine and related sys-tems.

ENGINE BREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS

∙ Warm up the engine before operating itunder load

∙ Do not operate the engine at idle forextended periods

∙ Prevent engine lugging by selecting theappropriate transmission gear

∙ Monitor the vehicle oil pressure andtemperature gauges

∙ Check fluid levels frequently (Oil & Cool-ant)

∙ Vary the throttle position at highwayspeeds when carrying weight or towing

NOTE:

Extended light or no load operation willextend the time before the enginereaches its full efficiency. If the engine isoperated in this manner, reduced fueleconomy and power may be observed.

The aforementioned procedure should beobserved for the first 6,000 miles. The en-gine run-in is improved by operating thevehicle under load.

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEMThe diesel engine fuel system is a pressur-ized two-stage filtration system and con-sists of:

∙ A frame-mounted primary (stage 1) fuelfilter containing water/fuel separator,electric fuel pump, and water in fueldrain valve

∙ An engine-mounted secondary (stage2) fuel filter

∙ A fuel injector for each cylinder (8 total)

∙ A high-pressure fuel pump

∙ A high-pressure fuel rail for each cylin-der bank (2 total)

∙ High-pressure fuel lines from the high-pressure fuel pump to the right bankfuel rail, right bank fuel rail to the leftbank fuel rail, and fuel rails to fuel injec-tors.

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-2 Introduction

The stage 1 fuel filter separates water andfilters impurities from the fuel. The stage 2fuel filter filters finer impurities from thediesel fuel. The stage 1 and stage 2 fuelfilters should be changed at the recom-mended service interval or when indicatedby the information display. For additionalinformation, refer to “Maintenance andschedules” and “Instruments and controls”sections of the Titan Owner’s Manual.

The water/fuel separator should bedrained when indicated by illumination ofthe water in fuel warning light.

NOTE:

Proper fuel filter maintenance andprompt water draining when the waterin the fuel filter warning light illuminatesis essential to prevent damage to fuelinjection system components. Ignoringthe water in fuel warning light can causeyour vehicle to go into a reduced powermode and has the potential for fuel sys-tem damage.

ENGINE PROTECTION MODEThe diesel engine in this vehicle is equippedwith electronically controlled fuel andemission systems. Both systems monitorengine temperatures and pressures, andthen modify engine operation accordingly.It is normal for the diesel engine to operateunder these modified conditions for shortdurations of time. If the engine operatesunder the modified conditions for ex-tended periods of time, and the service en-gine soon light is illuminated, have the sys-tem checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service assoon as possible.

LUBRICATION SYSTEMIt is important to change the engine oil atthe recommended service intervals tomaintain oil viscosity. Extending the oil andfilter change interval beyond the recom-mended interval can negatively affect en-gine performance, fuel economy and en-gine life. For additional information, refer tothe “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

GLOW PLUGSThe diesel engine glow plug system con-sists of:

∙ Eight Glow Plugs (one per cylinder)

∙ Glow Plug Control Module - Uses inputfrom the Engine Coolant TemperatureSensor

The glow plugs are energized momentarilywhen the ignition is first turned on. Thelength of time that the glow plugs are en-ergized varies depending on engine andenvironmental conditions. The requiredtime for the glow plugs to be energizeddecreases as coolant temperature in-creases. For additional information, refer tothe “Starting and stopping the engine” sec-tion of this manual.

Introduction 1-3

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with a diesel par-ticulate filter in the exhaust system. Thediesel particulate filter reduces carbonemissions by trapping exhaust particu-lates (soot) before they reach the tailpipe.You must properly maintain your dieselparticulate filter in order for it to functionproperly. Regeneration of the diesel par-ticulate filter occurs automatically duringoperation above 5 mph (8 km/h) and re-quires no actions from the driver. If you do alot of idling or stop and go driving, pay at-tention to maintenance messages thatalert you when you need to drive to acti-vate the automatic regeneration process.For additional information, refer to the “Au-tomatic regeneration” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTIONSYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with a selectivecatalytic reduction system designed to re-duce emission levels of nitrogen oxidesfrom the exhaust of your diesel engine. Thissystem relies on the use of Diesel ExhaustFluid (DEF) that you must replenish at cer-tain intervals. Failure to maintain properDEF levels or if the DEF becomes contami-nated will result in vehicle speed limitationto 5 mph. For additional information, referto “Meters and gauges” in the “Instrumentpanel” section and “Recommendedfluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Ca-pacities and specifications” section of thismanual.

1-4 Introduction

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and yourNISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and serviceneeds.However, if there is something that yourNISSAN dealer cannot assist you with oryou would like to provide NISSAN directlywith comments or questions, please con-tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will askfor the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephonenumber

– Vehicle identification number (attachedto the top of the instrument panel on thedriver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-tion at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003or via e-mail at:[email protected]

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5or via e-mail at:[email protected]

If you prefer, visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

2 Instrument Panel

Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Warnings lights, indicator lights, metersand gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Vehicle information display warningsand indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Resetting the oil control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

WARNINGS LIGHTS, INDICATORLIGHTS, METERS AND GAUGESThese lights, meters and gauges are spe-cific to the diesel engine.

1. Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) warninglight

2. Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) warninglight

3. Vehicle information display

4. Water in Fuel warning light

5. Malfunction warning light (red)

LIC3469

METERS AND GAUGES

2-2 Instrument Panel

Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)warning lightWhen this warning light illuminates, theDEF fluid needs to be topped off.

For additional information, refer to the “Fueland refueling” section of this manual.

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)warning lightWhen the warning light illuminates, it indi-cates that particulate matter is accumu-lated to the specified amount of the limit inthe filter and the filter needs to regenerate.For additional information, refer to “DieselParticulate Filter (DPF)” in the “Maintenance”section of this manual.

CAUTIONIf you continue driving with the DPFwarning light on without performingthe filter regeneration, this will lead toparticle matter overload in the filter. Ifthis happens, the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) will turn on to indicate thenecessity that a NISSAN or qualifieddealer performs the service regenera-tion. The performance of the enginemight be limited to protect the DPFsystem.

Vehicle information displayThe vehicle information display shows vari-ous meters and gauges that pertain to thediesel engine. The information that can befound within the vehicle information dis-play is as follows:

Exhaust temperature gauge

The exhaust temperature gauge is part ofthe Auxiliary Gauges in the vehicle informa-tion display.

Turbo meter

The turbo meter shows the amount of en-gine boost.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) LEVEL

This gauge indicates the level of DEF in thediesel system.

The DEF LEVEL information screen can beturned on or off in the vehicle informationdisplay. For additional information, refer to“How to use the vehicle information dis-play” in the “Vehicle information display”section of the Titan Owner’s Manual.

Water in Fuel warning lightIf this light illuminates, pull off of the road ina safe area, stop the engine and immedi-ately drain the water from the fuel sedi-ment filter. For additional information, referto “Draining water” in the “Do-it-yourself ”section of this manual.

Malfunction warning light (red)If the warning light illuminates this indi-cates either coolant temperature is abovea critical threshold or the exhaust tem-peratures are above a critical threshold.When illuminated this lamp indicates theneed to stop the engine as soon as it canbe safely done. The engine must remainshut down until the engine can be repaired.

Instrument Panel 2-3

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAYWARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. DEF Low XX% Refill Soon

2. DEF Low XX% Limited Engine PowerSoon

3. DEF Low Limited Engine Power In XXMiles

4. DEF Empty 5mph Limit Soon See Own-er’s Manual

5. DEF Empty Refill DEF See Owner’sManual

6. DEF System Error See Dealer

7. DEF System Error 5MPH Speed LimitXXX Miles

8. DEF System Error 5MPH Speed LimitSoon

LIC4100


9. DEF System Error 5MPH Speed LimitSee Dealer

10. Exhaust Filter Overloaded See Owner’sManual For Drive Pattern

11. Exhaust Filter Regeneration Started

12. Exhaust Filter Overloaded EnginePower Reduced See Owner’s Manual

13. Exhaust Filter Overloaded ImmediateService Required

14. Engine Warming Keep Foot on Brake

15. Engine Shutdown Stop Safely

16. Engine Power Reduced

17. Service Air Filter

18. Engine Oil Service Due XX

19. Coolant Level Low: See Owner’s Manual

20. Low Fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

DEF Low XX% Refill Soon

This message appears when the DEF be-comes low. It is recommended that theDEF be topped off. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)” inthe “Fueling and refueling” section of thismanual.

DEF Low XX% Limited Engine PowerSoon

This message appears as the DEF be-comes low. Engine power will be limitedsoon. It is recommended that the DEF betopped off. For additional information, referto “Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)” in the “Fuelingand refueling” section of this manual.

DEF Low Limited Engine Power In XXMiles

This message appears when the DEF be-comes low. Engine power will be limited inthe approximate distance shown. It is rec-ommended that the DEF be topped off. Foradditional information, refer to “Diesel Ex-haust Fluid (DEF)” in the “Fueling and refuel-ing” section of this manual.

DEF Empty 5mph Limit Soon See Own-er’s Manual

This message appears when the DEF be-comes empty. It is recommended that theDEF be refilled as soon as possible. Thefollowing conditions will limit the vehiclespeed when this message is shown:

∙ Engine shutdown and restart

∙ Engine is idled for approximately 1 hour

∙ Control module detects a fuel level in-crease For additional information, referto “Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)” in the “Fu-eling and refueling” section of thismanual.

DEF Empty Refill DEF See Owner’sManual

This message appears when the DEF isempty and the vehicle speed is reduced toa maximum of 5 mph. It is recommendedthat the DEF be refilled as soon as possible.For additional information, refer to “DieselExhaust Fluid (DEF)” in the “Fueling and re-fueling” section of this manual.

DEF System Error See Dealer

This message appears when the DEF sys-tem encounters an error. It is recom-mended that you have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer or other quali-fied technician. For additional information,refer to “Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)” in the“Fueling and refueling” section of thismanual.


DEF System Error 5MPH Speed LimitXXX Miles

This message appears when the DEF sys-tem encounters an error. The vehiclespeed will be reduced in the approximatedistance shown. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)” inthe “Fueling and refueling” section of thismanual.

DEF System Error 5MPH Speed LimitSoon

This message appears when the DEF sys-tem has encountered an error. The follow-ing conditions will reduce the vehicle speedwhen this message is shown:

∙ Engine shutdown and restart

∙ Engine is idled for approximately 1 hour

∙ Control module detects a fuel level in-crease

For additional information, refer to “DieselExhaust Fluid (DEF)” in the “Fueling and re-fueling” section of this manual.

DEF System Error 5MPH Speed Limit:See Dealer

This message appears when the DEF sys-tem encounters an error and the vehicle

speed is reduced. It is recommended thatyou have the system checked by a NISSANdealer or other qualified technician. For ad-ditional information, refer to “Diesel Ex-haust Fluid (DEF)” in the “Fueling and refuel-ing” section of this manual.

Exhaust Filter Overloaded: See Owner’sManual For Drive Pattern

This message appears when the dieselparticulate filter starts to overload. The Die-sel Particulate Filter (DPF) warning light willalso illuminate. When this message isseen, the vehicle should be driven on thehighway where the road conditionssafely allow and the speed limit permits,over 55 mph (90 km/h) for at least45 minutes. For additional information, re-fer to “Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)” in the“Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

Exhaust Filter Regeneration Started

This message appears when the auto-matic regeneration has started to cleanthe exhaust filter. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

Exhaust Filter Overloaded Engine PowerReduced: See Owner’s Manual

This message appears when the dieselparticulate filter starts to overload. Enginetorque and speed will be reduced. The Die-sel Particulate Filter (DPF) warning light willalso blink.

If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off,the vehicle should be driven on the high-way where the road conditions safely allowand the speed limit permits, over 55 mph(90 km/h) for at least 45 minutes.

If the MIL illuminates, the exhaust filter can-not be regenerated by driving the vehicle. Itis recommended that you have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer or other quali-fied technician.

For additional information, refer to “DieselParticulate Filter (DPF)” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of this manual.

Exhaust Filter Overloaded ImmediateService Required

This message appears when the dieselparticulate filter is overloaded. The DieselParticulate Filter (DPF) warning light blinksquickly and the Malfunction IndicatorLamp (MIL) illuminates. When this messageis displayed, the engine speed and torque


will be reduced. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer or qualified tech-nician immediately. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)”in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual.

Engine Warming Keep Foot on Brake

This message appears during cold startconditions when:

∙ Brake pedal is depressed

∙ Push-button start button has beenpressed

∙ Coolant temperature is below thresh-old

Keep foot on the brake until the enginestarts, which can take up to approximately4 seconds. For additional information, referto “Starting the diesel engine” in the “Start-ing and stopping the engine” section of thismanual.

Engine Shutdown: Stop Safely

This message appears 30 seconds beforethe vehicle is shutdown due to an abovenormal operating exhaust temperature.The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) andmalfunction warning light (red) will illumi-nate. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer or other qualified technicianimmediately.

Engine Power Reduced

This message appears when the engine isnot operating under normal conditions. Foradditional information, refer to “Engine Pro-tection Mode” in the “Introduction” sectionof this manual.

Service Air Filter

This warning appears when the air filterneeds to be serviced. For additional infor-mation, refer to “Air cleaner” in the ”Mainte-nance” section of the Titan Diesel Owner’sManual.

Engine Oil Service due XX

This message is a count down of mileageuntil the next engine oil service is due. Mile-age until next required engine oil servicewill be displayed by the vehicle informationdisplay and will decrease at a higher rate asvehicle operation severity (high duty cycle)increases.

Coolant Level Low: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when the coolantlevel in the reservoir is below the MIN level.For additional information, refer to “EngineCooling System” in this manual.

Low Fuel Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

This message appears when low fuel pres-sure has been detected downstream ofthe stage 2 fuel filter. This message canindicate the fuel filters are restricted andrequire replacement. It is recommendedthat you have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer or other qualified technician.


RESETTING THE OIL CONTROLSYSTEMThe oil control system can be manually re-set within the vehicle information display.

1. Press the buttons until you reachthe “SETTINGS” screen.

2. Use the buttons to navi-gate to the “Maintenance” selection.

3. Press the ENTER button to access themaintenance items.

4. Press the ENTER button again to select“Oil Control System.” The remaining oilcontrol system distance appears.

5. Press and hold the ENTER button formore than 1 second to reset the oil con-trol system.

6. Select “YES” to confirm the reset or se-lect “NO” to deny the reset.

For additional information, refer to “Engineoil” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section of thismanual and “Vehicle information display” inthe “Instruments and controls” section ofthe Titan Owner’s Manual .


3 Starting and Stopping the Engine

Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Switching engine off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Engine break-in recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 3-3Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

WARNING∙ Do not use starting fluid, such as

ether, in the air intake system. Use ofsuch fluid could cause engine dam-age and/or personal injury.

∙ Do not add gasoline, alcohol or kero-sene to diesel fuel.

CAUTION∙ Read all starting instructions carefully

prior to starting your vehicle.

∙ When starting the engine in ex-tremely cold temperatures, it is rec-ommended to allow the engine to idlefor several minutes before driving thevehicle.

∙ The use of the factory engine blockheater (if so equipped) will assist instarting the engine in extreme coldambient temperatures. For additionalinformation, refer to the “Starting anddriving” section of the Titan Owner’sManual.

Engine warming

This message may display during coldstarting conditions. It is a reminder thatduring cold starting conditions the enginemay not crank immediately after pushingthe ignition switch, and could take up toapproximately 4 seconds to crank. Thebrake pedal must be depressed during thiswait period.

1. Verify the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N(Neutral) position. P (Park) is recom-mended.

The shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switchis in the OFF position.

The starter is designed not to oper-ate if the shift lever is in any of thedriving positions.

2. There are two ways to start your dieselengine:

∙ Push the ignition switch to the ONposition, and wait up to 4 seconds forthe glow plug to warm up. Depressthe brake pedal and push the ignitionswitch to start the engine.

or

∙ Depress the brake pedal and pushthe ignition switch to start the en-gine. Keep the brake pedal de-pressed until the glow plug warmsup. This could take up to 4 seconds.The vehicle will start.

The starter is designed to not en-gage until the glow plugs have hadsufficient time to warm up. Duringcold temperatures this could take upto 4 seconds.

LSD2601

STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE

3-2 Starting and Stopping the Engine

CAUTIONIf the engine does not start, place theignition switch in the OFF position andwait 10 seconds before cranking again,otherwise the starter could bedamaged.

3. Allow the engine to idle for at least30 seconds after starting. Do not racethe engine while warming it up. Drive ata moderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine run-ning for a minimum of 2–3 minutesbefore shutting it off. Starting andstopping the engine over a short pe-riod of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

SWITCHING ENGINE OFFPush the ignition switch to the OFF posi-tion.

To prolong the engine life (especially afterextended high speed, high ambient tem-perature, or during heavy load operation,such as trailering), it is recommended thata hot engine be idled for 3–5 minutes be-fore shutting down. This allows the turbo-charged engine to cool down.

ENGINE BREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS

∙ Warm up the engine before operating itunder load.

∙ Do not operate the engine at idle forextended periods.

∙ Prevent engine lugging by selecting theappropriate transmission gear.

∙ Monitor the vehicle oil pressure andtemperature gauges.

∙ Check fluid levels frequently (oil andcoolant).

∙ Vary the throttle position at highwayspeeds when carrying weight or tow-ing.

NOTE:

Extended light or no load operation willextend the time before the enginereaches its full efficiency. If the engine isoperated in this manner, reduced fueleconomy and power may be observed.

The aforementioned procedure should beobserved for the first 6,000 miles. The en-gine run-in is improved by operating thevehicle under load.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if soequipped)

CAUTIONLaws in some jurisdictions prohibit useof Remote Engine Start.

Vehicles started with the Remote EngineStart require the ignition switch to beplaced in the ON position before the shiftlever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-tion. To place the ignition switch in the ONposition, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is onyou.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ONposition.

For additional information, refer to “NISSANIntelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checksand adjustments” section of the TitanOwner’s Manual.

Starting and Stopping the Engine 3-3

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)The power cable to operate the heater isavailable as a service part from an autho-rized NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, refer to “Engineblock heater” in the “Starting and driving”section of the Titan Owner’s Manual.

3-4 Starting and Stopping the Engine

4 Fuel and Refueling

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Diesel fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) fill cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

FUEL-FILLER DOOR


DIESEL FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING∙ Diesel fuel is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under certainconditions. You could be burned or se-riously injured if it is misused or mis-handled. Always stop the engine anddo not smoke or allow open flames orsparks near the vehicle whenrefueling.

King Cab® models onlyLPD2593

King Cab® models onlyLPD2594 LPD2385

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

4-2 Fuel and Refueling

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refuelingmay cause fuel overflow, resulting infuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed forproper operation of the fuel systemand emission control system. An in-correct cap can result in a serious mal-function and possible injury. It couldalso cause the Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Do not use starting fluids with this en-gine. It is equipped with an intake airheater. The use of starting fluid couldcause an explosion, fire, personal in-jury, system or engine damage.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portablefuel containers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you arefilling it.

– Use only approved portable fuelcontainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION∙ For additional information, refer to

the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”in the “Instruments and Controls” sec-tion of the Titan Owner’s Manual.

∙ If fuel or Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) isspilled on the vehicle body, flush itaway with water to avoid paintdamage

To remove the diesel fuel-filler cap �A :

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-wise to remove.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into thefuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the cap clockwise until a singleclick is heard.

LPD2386

Fuel and Refueling 4-3

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF) FILLCAP

CAUTION∙ Overfilling your DEF tank can cause

damage to the tank.

∙ DEF will freeze below 12°F (-11°C); how-ever, your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic preheating system, whichallows the DEF system to operate be-low 12°F (-11°C). When the vehicle is notin operation for an extended period oftime with temperatures at or below12°F (-11°C), the DEF tank could freeze.In this condition, adding DEF will notchange the gauge level and addedDEF will not reach the pump, becauseit will sit on top of the frozen layer.

Move the vehicle to a warm location tothaw the DEF completely for thegauge to read accurately and allownew DEF to reach the pump. If the tankis overfilled and freezes, it could bedamaged, therefore do not overfill insustained cold conditions below 12°F(-11°C).

∙ Do not put DEF into the fuel tank. Thiscan cause engine damage that is notcovered by your vehicle’s warranty.

∙ Immediately wipe away any DEF thathas spilled on painted surfaces withwater and a damp cloth to preventdamage to the paint.

Outside tempera-ture sustained at orbelow.

Amount of DEF tosafely add after 25%warning appears:

–22°F (-30°C) .25 gal

5°F (-15°C) .5 gal

Outside tempera-ture sustained at orabove

Amount of DEF tosafely add after 25%warning appears:

13°F (-10.5°C) Safe to fill the tank

LPD2385 LPD2473

DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)


NOTE:

The blue DEF fill cap is located next thediesel fuel-filler cap.

To remove the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)cap �B :

1. Turn the DEF cap counterclockwise toremove.

NOTE:

Apply DEF to the fill neck, prior to install-ing and tightening the DEF fill cap.

To install the DEF cap:

1. Insert the DEF cap straight into the fillertube.

2. Turn the DEF cap clockwise a full 360°until it locks in position.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”in the “Capacities and specifications” sec-tion of this manual.

Fuel and Refueling 4-5

MEMO


5 In Case of Emergency

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

To start your engine with a booster battery,the instructions and precautions belowmust be followed.

WARNING∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resultingin severe injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is acorrosive sulfuric acid solution whichcan cause severe burns. If the fluidshould come into contact with any-thing, immediately flush the con-tacted area with water.


∙ The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eye protec-tors (for example, goggles or indus-trial safety spectacles) and removerings, metal bands, or any other jew-elry. Do not lean over the batterywhen jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and causeserious injury.

JUMP STARTING

5-2 In Case of Emergency

WARNINGAlways follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damageto the charging system and cause per-sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle, position the two vehicles to bringtheir batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles totouch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shiftlever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-sary electrical systems (lights, heater,air conditioner, etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level andtight.

4. Remove the fuse/fusible link box andconnect jumper cables in the se-quence illustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

CAUTION∙ Always connect positive (�) to posi-

tive (�) and negative (�) to bodyground (for example, strut mountingbolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not tothe battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that the cableclamps do not contact any othermetal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicleand let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the boostervehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and startthe engine of the vehicle being jumpstarted.

CAUTIONDo not keep the starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If the enginedoes not start right away, turn the keyoff and wait 3 to 4 seconds before tryingagain.

7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-connect the negative cable and thenthe positive cable.

LCE2223

In Case of Emergency 5-3

MEMO

5-4 In Case of Emergency

6 Vehicle Care

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Cleaning the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Cleaning the exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

In order to maintain the proper operationof a diesel engine, it is important to takeproper care of it, which includes cleaning asindicated.

CLEANING THE ENGINEEngines are more efficient when they areclean because grease and dirt buildupkeep the engine warmer than normal.

When washing:

∙ Take care when using a power washerto clean the engine. The high-pressurefluid could penetrate the sealed partsand cause damage.

∙ Do not spray a hot engine with cold wa-ter to avoid cracking the engine block orother engine components.

∙ Spray an engine shampoo and/ordegreaser on all parts that requirecleaning and pressure rinse clean.

∙ Never wash or rinse the engine while itis hot or running; water in the runningengine may cause internal damage.

∙ Never wash or rinse any control boxelectrical connections.

∙ Cover the battery, power distributionbox, and air filter assembly to preventwater damage when cleaning the en-gine.

CLEANING THE EXHAUSTThe visible holes �A in the exhaust systemare functional. The holes need to be keptclear of mud/debris or foreign material tomaintain proper function of the exhaustsystem. Clean and remove debris or for-eign material if present as needed. Spray-ing with a hose during regular washing ofvehicle should help keep holes clean andclear of debris or foreign material.

LCE2252

CLEANING

6-2 Vehicle Care

WARNING∙ Failure to maintain the functional

holes in the exhaust system clean andfree of debris or foreign material mayresult in the holes becoming blockedor plugged. Do not modify or removesections of the exhaust system thatcontain these holes. Blocked orplugged holes orremoval/modification of the systemcould result in elevated exhaust gasesor exhaust gas temperatures whichmay result in vehicle damage, per-sonal injury or death.

∙ The normal operating temperature ofthe exhaust system is very high. Neverwork around or attempt to repair anypart of the exhaust system until it hascooled. Use special care when work-ing around the diesel oxidation cata-lytic converter and/or the diesel par-ticulate filter (DPF). The dieseloxidation catalytic converter and/orthe DPF heats up to a high tempera-ture after only a short period of en-gine operation and can stay hot evenafter the engine is turned off. Failureto follow these instructions may re-sult in personal injury.

∙ When cleaning blocked or pluggedholes in the exhaust system, careshould be taken to minimize thequantity of water entering the ex-haust system. Excessive water thatenters the exhaust system couldcause damage requiring exhaust sys-tem to be replaced.

Vehicle Care 6-3

MEMO

6-4 Vehicle Care

7 Do-it-yourself

Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Fuel filter (CUMMINS 5.0L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Fuel filter replacement (stage 1 and 2) . . . . . . . . 7-9

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Automatic regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse box3. Fuse/Fusible link box4. Engine coolant reservoir5. Fuel filter (Stage 2)6. Engine oil filler cap7. Brake fluid reservoir8. Air cleaner9. Battery10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Radiator cap12. Engine oil dipstick13. Drive belt location14. Fuse/Fusible link box15. Battery

Cummins 5.0LLDI2870


7-2 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water toprovide year-round antifreeze and coolantprotection. The antifreeze solution con-tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-tional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. For additional informa-tion on precautions, refer to “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of the Titan Own-er’s Manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a GenuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additivesmay clog the cooling system andcause damage to the engine, trans-mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, besure to use only Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protec-tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additionalfreeze protection is needed due toweather where you operate your ve-hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-trate following the directions on thecontainer. If an equivalent coolantother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-low the coolant manufacturer’s in-structions to maintain minimum anti-freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). Theuse of other types of coolant solu-tions other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent may cause severe enginedamage.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 45,000 miles (78,000 km) or3 years. Mixing any other type of cool-ant other than Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-ing Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or the useof non-distilled water will reduce thelife expectancy of the factory-fill cool-ant. For additional information, referto the Titan Owner’s Manual.

∙ Use Nitrite Free Coolant or equivalent.The use of coolant containing Nitrites,could cause severe engine damage.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 7-3

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoirwhen the engine is cold. If the coolantlevel is below the MIN level �B , add coolantto the MAX level �A . If the reservoir is empty,check the coolant level in the radiatorwhen the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAXlevel �A .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is45,000 miles (78,000 km) or 3 years. Mixingany other type of coolant or the use ofnon-distilled water may reduce the life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-ditional information, refer to the Titan Own-er’s Manual.

CAUTIONNever use any cooling system additivessuch as radiator sealer. Additives mayclog the cooling system and causedamage to the engine, transmissionand/or cooling system.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

For additional information on the locationof the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-gine compartment check locations” in thissection.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the enginecoolant. The service procedure can befound in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine over-heating.

WARNING∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when theengine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator or enginecoolant reservoir cap when the en-gine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escap-ing from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2871

7-4 Do-it-yourself


CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

NOTE:

The factory fill oil may include a red dyethat is added for manufacturing qualityprocesses. The dye makes the oil appearto be red. This is normal. The red dye willbe flushed from the engine after ap-proximately 4–5 oil changes.



3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than10 minutes for the oil to drain backinto the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

LDI2872

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 7-5

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between thehigh and low marks �B . This is the nor-mal operating oil level range. If the oillevel is below the low mark �A , removethe oil filler cap and pour recom-mended oil through the opening. Donot overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the sever-ity of operating conditions.

CAUTIONOil level should be checked regularly.Operating the engine with an insuffi-cient amount of oil can damage the en-gine, and such damage is not coveredby warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

LDI2873

LDI2874

7-6 Do-it-yourself

NOTE:

The factory fill oil may include a red dyethat is added for manufacturing qualityprocesses. The dye makes the oil appearto be red. This is normal. The red dye willbe flushed from the engine after ap-proximately 4–5 oil changes.


2. Start the engine and let it idle until itreaches operating temperature, thenturn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap �A by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drainplug �B .

5. Remove the drain plug �B with awrench by turning it counterclockwiseand completely drain the oil.

Remove and replace the engine oil fil-ter at this time. For additional informa-tion, refer to “Changing engine oil filter”in this section.

∙ Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

∙ Check your local regulations.

WARNING∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skincancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.


6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug. Se-curely tighten the drain plug with awrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oilthrough the oil filler opening, then installthe oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drainand refill capacity, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-ties” in the “Capacities and specifica-tions” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity dependson the oil temperature and drain time.Use these specifications for referenceonly. Always use the dipstick to deter-mine when the proper amount of oil isin the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakagearound the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-rect as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than10 minutes. Check the oil level with thedipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

NOTE:

For additional information on resettingthe oil control system, refer to “Resettingthe oil control system” in the “Instrumentpanel” section of this manual.

Do-it-yourself 7-7

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and



3. Remove bolts �A and skid plate.

4. Place a large drain pan under the oilfilter �B .

5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise.Then remove the oil filter by turning itby hand.


6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surfacewith a clean rag.

Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)LDI2876

Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)LDI2875 LDI2877

7-8 Do-it-yourself

CAUTIONBe sure to remove any old gasket mate-rial remaining on the sealing surface ofthe engine. Failure to do so could lead toan oil leak and engine damage.

7. Fill the new filter with clean engine oil.

8. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

9. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-tance is felt, then tighten an additional3/4 turn.

10. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

11. Install skid plate in reverse order of re-moval.

12. Turn the engine off and wait more than10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-gine oil if necessary.


FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT (stage1 and 2)A NISSAN dealer can change the stage 1and stage 2 fuel filters. The service proce-dure can be found in the NISSAN ServiceManual.

Improper servicing can result in the vehiclenot starting, fuel leaks and engine stalling.

Fuel filterLDI2921

FUEL FILTER (CUMMINS 5.0L)

Do-it-yourself 7-9

WARNING∙ Stay clear from the exhaust outlet and

exhaust gases. These can cause burnsor personal injury.

∙ To avoid the risk of personal injury orfire, do not park the vehicle over flam-mable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags, as hot vehiclecomponents may ignite them.

CAUTIONTo maintain maximum Diesel Particu-late Filter (DPF) performance, followthese precautions:

∙ Use ultra low-sulfur fuel.

∙ Use an engine oil specified by NISSAN.For additional information, refer to“Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities” in the “Capacities andspecifications” section of this manual.If an engine oil not specified byNISSAN is used, it could cause DPFmalfunction or reduced fuelefficiency.

∙ Do not modify the DPF, muffler or ex-haust pipe. Otherwise it could affectthe DPF performance and cause amalfunction.

∙ Do not kick or hit the DPF. The DPF hasa built-in catalyst system in the muf-fler. Such an impact could cause DPFdamage.

The DPF reduces the amount of materialsthat affect the environment by collectingparticulate matter included in exhaustgases. Normally, particulate matter accu-mulated in the DPF is automatically burnedand converted to harmless substancesduring driving. However, particulate mattercollected in the DPF cannot be burned un-der the following conditions:

∙ When vehicle speed remains below5 mph (8 km/h) for a long period of time.

∙ When the engine is frequently stoppedand restarted within 10 minutes.

∙ When the vehicle is frequently used forshort journeys of 10 minutes or less.

∙ When the engine is frequently stoppedbefore it has warmed up.

In these cases, it becomes difficult to burnparticulate matter that has accumulatedin the DPF. As a result, the DPF warning lightwill illuminate/blink and one of the follow-ing messages will display on the vehicleinformation display (in order of severity):

∙ Exhaust Filter Overloaded See Owner’sManual for Drive Pattern

∙ Exhaust Filter Overloaded EnginePower Reduced See Owner’s Manual

∙ Exhaust Filter Overloaded ImmediateService Required

For additional information, refer to “Metersand gauges" in the “Instrument panel” sec-tion of this manual.

CAUTION∙ If the vehicle continues to be driven

with the DPF warning light illumi-nated and without doing the regen-eration process, the fail-safe will limitthe engine revolutions and/or torque.In this case, it is recommended to con-tact a NISSAN dealer to have the Ser-vice Regeneration procedureperformed.

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)

7-10 Do-it-yourself

AUTOMATIC REGENERATIONAutomatic regeneration occurs when thecontrol module detects the exhaust filterneeds to be cleaned. This is a normal pro-cess and will not typically require any op-erator interaction.

If the automatic regeneration is not able toclean the exhaust filter the vehicle informa-tion display will display the following mes-sages in order of severity:

∙ Exhaust Filter Overloaded See Owner’sManual for Drive Pattern

∙ Exhaust Filter Overloaded EnginePower Reduced See Owner’s Manual

∙ Exhaust Filter Overloaded ImmediateService Required

The instructions for these messages in the“Meters and gauges” section of this manualwill inform the driver to modify their drivingpattern to enable the automatic regenera-tion process.

1. Idler pulley2. Cooling fan pulley3. Idler pulley4. Power steering fluid pump pulley5. Air conditioner compressor pulley6. Water pump pulley7. Crankshaft pulley8. Automatic belt tensioner pulley9. Generator pulley

WARNINGTo avoid the risk of personal injury, besure the ignition switch is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drivebelt. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. Ifthe belt is in poor condition or is loose,have it replaced. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

2. Have the belt checked regularly forcondition and tension in accordancewith the maintenance schedule foundin the Titan Owner’s Manual.

LDI2881

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 7-11

The dry paper type filter element may becleaned and reused. Replace it accordingto the maintenance log shown in the TitanOwner’s Manual.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1. Unlatch the clips �A and move the aircleaner cover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filterhousing and the cover with a dampcloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter,make sure the air cleaner cover is seatedin the housing and latch the clips.

WARNING∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops theflame if the engine backfires. If it isn’tthere, and the engine backfires, youcould be burned. Do not drive with theair cleaner removed, and be carefulwhen working on the engine with theair cleaner removed.

∙ Never pour fuel into the air intake sys-tem or attempt to start the enginewith the air cleaner removed. Doing socould result in serious injury.

∙ Do not use starting fluids with this en-gine. The use of starting fluid couldcause an explosion, fire, personal in-jury, system or engine damage.

CAUTION∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause damageto the turbocharger and major enginedamage.

∙ Never pour fuel into the intake or at-tempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could re-sult in engine damage.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entryof airborne dust and pollen particles andreduces some objectionable outsideodors. The filter is located behind the glovebox. For additional information on changeintervals, refer to “Gasoline standard main-tenance" or "Diesel standard mainte-nance" in the "Maintenance and sched-ules" section of the Titan Owner’s Manual.


LDI2880

AIR CLEANER

7-12 Do-it-yourself

8 Capacities and Specifications

Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Engine oil and oil filterrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)test (diesel engine only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.


MeasureUS


Fuel (Diesel) 98.4 L 26 gal 21-5/8 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation”in this section.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 24.9 L 6-1/2 gal 5-3/8 gal

• Genuine NISSAN Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) or equivalent• ISO22241• For additional information, refer to “Diesel Exhaust Fluid(DEF) storage” and “Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) disposal” in thissection.

Engine oil*1Drain and refill*1: For additionalinformation, referto “Engine oil andoil filter recom-mendations” inthis section of thismanual”.

Cummins5.0 L

With oil filter change 9.5 L 10 qt 8-3/8 qt• Engine oil with API Certification Mark, Viscosity SAE 10W-30(CES 20081) and American Petroleum Institute (API) certifica-tion (API CJ-4, Low Ash Oil).• Diesel engine oil Specification (Cold Climate)

- 5W-40 oil that meets API Certification Mark (CES 20081)and American Petroleum Institute (API) certification (API CJ-4,Low Ash Oil) is acceptable for colder climates.• Gasoline engine oil and diesel engine oil are not equal.

Without oil filterchange 9.1 L 9-5/8 qt 8 qt

Engine coolantwith reservoir 13.2 L 3-1/2 gal 2-7/8 gal

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant(blue) or equivalent• Coolant must be nitrite free• The use of other types of coolant solutions other thanGenuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) orequivalent may cause severe engine damage.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

8-2 Capacities and Specifications

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONDiesel engine

Commercially available diesel fuel is ad-justed seasonally for cold temperatures.NISSAN recommends the use of diesel fuelthat has been seasonally adjusted for tem-peratures below 32°F (0°C)

Diesel fuel of above 42 cetane minimumabove 32°F (0°C); 45 cetane minimum be-low 32°F (0°C) and with less than 15 ppm ofsulfur must be used.

A cetane number below 42 can cause poorstarting, excessive white smoke, and pooridling. A cetane number above 55 can in-crease smoke at peak torque conditions.

If two types of diesel fuel are available, usesummer or winter fuel properly accordingto the following temperature conditions.

∙ Above 32°F (0°C) . . . Summer type dieselfuel.

∙ Below 32°F (0°C) . . . Winter type dieselfuel.

If you are in any doubt, it is recommendedthat you consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION∙ Do not use home heating oil, petro-

leum, biodiesel (more than 10%) orother alternate fuels in your diesel en-gine. The use of those can cause en-gine damage.

∙ Do not use summer fuel at tempera-tures below 20°F (- 7°C). The cold tem-peratures will cause wax to form inthe fuel. As a result, it may prevent theengine from running smoothly.

B10 fuelB10 fuel is a mixture of approximately 10%biodiesel and 90% petroleum diesel. Yourvehicle was designed to run on blends ofbiodiesel up to B10 (B1-B10). Operating yourvehicle on higher blends is not recom-mended. Your vehicle’s engine, exhaustcatalyst filter and particulate filter, and fuelsystem components may be damaged ifany of these blends are used.

U.S. government regulations require thatbiodiesel blends between B6 and B10 areidentified at fuel dispensing pumps by alabel with the common abbreviation or theappropriate percentage for that region. B6--B10 blends must meet prescribed qualitystandards specified by ASTM D7467.

B10 fuel storageBiodiesel degrades more quickly than purepetroleum-based diesel. When storing avehicle that runs on a biodiesel blend, it isimportant to keep the following in mind:

∙ If storing a vehicle for longer than onemonth, empty the fuel tank of biodiesel.

∙ To prepare a vehicle to run after pro-longed storage, fill the fuel tank with apure petroleum-based diesel fuel andrun your vehicle for at least half an hour.

∙ Fuel system seals, plastics and steelparts can be damaged by degraded oroxidized biodiesel.

During cold weather, biodiesel fuel mayneed to be stored in a heated storage tankin order to prevent it from gelling or solidi-fying.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)DEF is a solution composed of urea andde-ionized water. In diesel vehicles, it isused as part of the exhaust system tobreak down harmful NOx emissions intonitrogen and water. It is important to keepyour vehicle’s DEF tank filled properly.

Capacities and Specifications 8-3

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) storageThe shelf life of DEF is limited, whether it isstored in containers or in the vehicle’s die-sel exhaust fluid tank. There are a variety offactors that can contribute to reducingDEF’s shelf life, particularly temperatureand duration.

To increase shelf life when storing DEF,keep the following in mind:

∙ Avoid contamination by storing insealed containers.

∙ Protect from direct sunlight.

∙ Store DEF at temperatures between23°F and 77°F (-5°C and 25°C) to protectfrom overheating or freezing.

DEF has a minimum expected shelf life of18 months, but its shelf life will be reduced ifthe above conditions are not met.

It will be necessary to recheck the DEF con-centration if it has been stored for an ex-tensive period of time, or if it has been ex-posed to water. More information can befound in the manufacturer’s Owner’sManual.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) disposalAlways check with local authorities forregulations on proper disposing processesand requirements for DEF.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONSSelecting the correct oil

NOTE:

The factory fill oil may include a red dyethat that is added for manufacturingquality processes. The dye makes the oilappear to be red. This is normal. The reddye will be flushed from the engine afterapproximately 4-5 oil changes.

It is essential to choose the correct grade,quality and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance.For additional information, refer to “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”in this section. NISSAN recommends theuse of an energy conserving oil in order toimprove fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the Cum-mins® Engineering Standard (CES) classifi-cation (CES 20081) and American Petro-leum Institute (API) certification (API CJ-4,Low Ash Oil) and SAE viscosity standard(10W-30 or 5W-40). These oils have the APIcertification mark and CES 20081 on thecontainer. Oils which do not have thespecified information on the label shouldnot be used as they could cause enginedamage.

Oil additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

LTI2207


Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important to select the engine oilviscosity based on the temperatures atwhich the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-ity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. Whenreplacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter orits equivalent for the reason described in“Change intervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Using en-gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-fied quality, or exceeding recommended oiland filter change intervals could reduceengine life. Damage to the engine causedby improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity isnot covered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not haveto change the oil before the first recom-mended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how youuse your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditionsmay require more frequent oil and filterchanges:

∙ repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ towing a trailer

∙ stop and go commuting

∙ you must also change your oil and filterwhen the “Engine Oil-Service Due Now”message is displayed.

For additional information, refer to the Ti-tan Owner’s Manual.

LTI2208


ENGINE

Model Cummins 5.0L

Type Diesel, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.701 x 3.543 (94 x 90)Displacement cu in (cm3) 305.10 (5,000)

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.A/T (in “N” position)Ignition speed at the N (Neutral) position(RPM)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

SPECIFICATIONS


WARNINGA vehicle equipped with Four-WheelDrive (4WD) should never be tested us-ing a two wheel dynamometer (such asthe dynamometers used by somestates for emissions testing), or similarequipment. Make sure you inform thetest facility personnel that your vehicleis equipped with 4WD before it is placedon a dynamometer. Using the wrongtest equipment may result in transmis-sion damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in seriousvehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some statesand Canadian Provinces, your vehicle maybe required to be in what is called the“ready condition” for anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theemission control system.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-tion.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the ready condition canbe obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-hicle.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (dieselengine only)


9 IndexA

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

B

Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Coolant

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . .7-4Checking engine coolant level . . . . .7-4

D

Diesel Particulate Filter(DPF) . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-5, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 7-10Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11

E

EngineCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . .7-4Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .7-8Checking engine coolant level . . . . .7-4Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .7-5Engine compartment checklocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .7-3Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Engine Block Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

F

FluidCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5

FuelCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .8-3

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-2Fuel filter (CUMMINS 50L) . . . . . . . . . . .7-9

I

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

J

Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2

O

OilCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .7-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .7-5Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

R

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

S

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Starting

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . .3-2

9-2

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:For additional information, refer to “Fuelrecommendation” in the “Capacities andspecifications” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:For additional information, refer to “Engineoil and oil filter recommendation” in the“Capacities and specifications” section ofthis manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:For additional information, refer to “Tire andLoading Information label” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section in theTitan Owner’s Manual.

The label is typically located on the driverside center pillar or on the driver’s door. Foradditional information, refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “Do-it-yourself ” section in theTitan Owner’s Manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:For additional information, refer to the “En-gine break-in recommendations” sectionin the “Introduction” section of this manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

+A61-D

Printing : December 2018Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.OM19EA +A61U1

2019 Nissan Titan | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information … · 2021. 1. 13. · 2019 TITAN...

Documents

Transcript of 2019 Nissan Titan | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information … · 2021. 1. 13. · 2019 TITAN...